FAQs

Please take a look at our comprehensive list of FAQs.

  • Breast Augmentation

  • Am I suitable for a Breast Augmentation?

    The size and shape of a woman’s bust can cause a great feeling of unhappiness and insecurity. In cases like these, a breast augmentation is a great way to provide both a safe and convenient solution to help restore confidence. There are many reasons why our patients decide to go ahead with breast augmentation but here at The Private Clinic we have a team of expert breast surgeons using the best techniques to help provide you with the results that you wish to achieve. All patients are handled with sensitivity and discretion. If you are over 18 years old, in good health and generally feeling fit and well then you will be suitable for a breast augmentation. However, in some cases, a breast augmentation may not be suitable for the results that you are expecting and in such cases an alternative or combined surgery method may be advised. The best way to ascertain your suitability for any type of surgery is to book a consultation to speak with your chosen surgeon. To book a consultation with our highly experienced surgeons click here.

  • Am I suitable for a Breast Augmentation?

    The size and shape of a woman’s bust can cause a great feeling of unhappiness and insecurity. In cases like these, a breast augmentation is a great way to provide both a safe and convenient solution to help restore confidence. There are many reasons why our patients decide to go ahead with breast augmentation but here at The Private Clinic we have a team of expert breast surgeons using the best techniques to help provide you with the results that you wish to achieve. All patients are handled with sensitivity and discretion. If you are over 18 years old, in good health and generally feeling fit and well then you will be suitable for a breast augmentation. However, in some cases, a breast augmentation may not be suitable for the results that you are expecting and in such cases an alternative or combined surgery method may be advised. The best way to ascertain your suitability for any type of surgery is to book a consultation to speak with your chosen surgeon. To book a consultation with our highly experienced surgeons click here.

  • What are the most natural looking breast implants?

    The right implant for you will be decided on by one of our expert breast surgeons. Your chosen breast implant will take into consideration your natural breast size and your body shape and frame. It is not possible to give an idea of one type of breast implant as different implant sizes, shapes and profiles will not all look the same on every patient. For each implant there are usually up to 4 different profiles which range from low to extra high and these decide on how much of the implant projects away from the chest wall.  A low profile will usually deliver more of a subtle or natural result but in certain cases the surgeon may advise that you go for a higher profile implant so that your breasts will be more in proportion to your body, therefore achieving a more natural result. Your surgeon will then discuss implant placement, usually for patients wanting a more natural implant result the implant will be placed below the muscle as this allows for more natural breast tissue to sit on top of the implant but in some cases it may be more appropriate to go an over the muscle option as that it what will suit your body the best. Taking care of your new breasts post-surgery will also have a big impact on the final result so it is very important to follow your surgeon’s aftercare advice to help you achieve the most natural result. We have an expert team of surgeons and nurses who will ensure that you receive the best advice both pre and post procedure to give you the best results.  To book a consultation click here or to find out more about the different types of breast implants take a look at our blog post here or view our breast augmentation video series here.

  • What are the most natural looking breast implants?

    The right implant for you will be decided on by one of our expert breast surgeons. Your chosen breast implant will take into consideration your natural breast size and your body shape and frame. It is not possible to give an idea of one type of breast implant as different implant sizes, shapes and profiles will not all look the same on every patient. For each implant there are usually up to 4 different profiles which range from low to extra high and these decide on how much of the implant projects away from the chest wall. A low profile will usually deliver more of a subtle or natural result but in certain cases the surgeon may advise that you go for a higher profile implant so that your breasts will be more in proportion to your body, therefore achieving a more natural result. Your surgeon will then discuss implant placement, usually for patients wanting a more natural implant result the implant will be placed below the muscle as this allows for more natural breast tissue to sit on top of the implant but in some cases it may be more appropriate to go an over the muscle option as that it what will suit your body the best. Taking care of your new breasts post-surgery will also have a big impact on the final result so it is very important to follow your surgeon’s aftercare advice to help you achieve the most natural result. We have an expert team of surgeons and nurses who will ensure that you receive the best advice both pre and post procedure to give you the best results. To book a consultation click here or to find out more about the different types of breast implants take a look at our blog post here or view our breast augmentation video series below.

  • What is the difference between having your breast implants placed over the muscle or behind the muscle?

    Deciding where your breast implants are placed during breast augmentation surgery is decided by your surgeon and will be discussed in your consultation. Over the muscle may also be referred to as above the muscle or subglandular and it is when the breast implant is placed in front of the pectoralis minor and pectoralis major muscles that sit in your chest.  If you have a good amount of breast tissue then this option would be suitable for you as it will be able to help conceal the shape of the implant giving a more natural result. Under the muscle is also referred to as behind the muscle or Dual Plane. Although called under the muscle, usually the implant is never placed completely under the muscle as this is a relatively old fashioned breast augmentation technique. Instead the implant is placed under the pectoralis major muscle in the upper breast but above the serratus anterior muscle in the lower breast. Under the muscle is more commonly referred to as being dual plane and is normally the most favoured of techniques.  This option is best for patients who have little natural breast tissue as this method reduces the likelihood of your breast implants showing and gives a more natural looking result. Our expert breast surgeons are experienced in recommending the best breast augmentation technique to help suit you and your desired results. To book a consultation click here.

  • What is the difference between having your breast implants placed over the muscle or behind the muscle?

    Deciding where your breast implants are placed during breast augmentation surgery is decided by your surgeon and will be discussed in your consultation. Over the muscle may also be referred to as above the muscle or subglandular and it is when the breast implant is placed in front of the pectoralis minor and pectoralis major muscles that sit in your chest. If you have a good amount of breast tissue then this option would be suitable for you as it will be able to help conceal the shape of the implant giving a more natural result. Under the muscle is also referred to as behind the muscle or Dual Plane. Although called under the muscle, usually the implant is never placed completely under the muscle as this is a relatively old fashioned breast augmentation technique. Instead the implant is placed under the pectoralis major muscle in the upper breast but above the serratus anterior muscle in the lower breast. Under the muscle is more commonly referred to as being dual plane and is normally the most favoured of techniques. This option is best for patients who have little natural breast tissue as this method reduces the likelihood of your breast implants showing and gives a more natural looking result. Our expert breast surgeons are experienced in recommending the best breast augmentation technique to help suit you and your desired results. To book a consultation click here.

  • How Much Does Breast Augmentation Cost UK?

    The Private Clinic guides thousands of woman every year through their breast enlargement journey. We are committed to Medical Expertise, Patient Care and Satisfaction, Honest advice and most importantly the best breast enlargement results. The Private Clinic ensures you have the best cover and quality which includes;

    • A consultation with your specialist surgeon.
    • 24 hour patient helpline to ensure you are always in the best of hands.
    • Three years cover for all surgical, hospital and nursing care, in case of any medical issue giving you peace of mind.
    • The Private Clinic offers a unique warranty of £1000 towards surgical costs in case of rupture for 10 years from the date of your operation.
    • Comprehensive Breast Enlargement Patient Guide.
    • Highly experienced Cosmetic Breast Surgeons who have decades of experience.
    • Outstanding hospital facilities.
    • As many post-operative care and appointments with your surgeon and nursing team as required.
    • Our experience and medical expertise makes your journey a reassuring one click here
    Breast enlargement cost can be part of your decision to undergo a procedure but it should never be the deciding factor. Breast augmentation costs start from £5,800, it is an all inclusive procedure cost, with no hidden extras. Plus we have the best cover. See our comprehensive before and after photos and start your journey today. Book a consultation or request information. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon.

  • How Much Does Breast Augmentation Cost UK?

    The Private Clinic guides thousands of woman every year through their breast enlargement journey. We are committed to Medical Expertise, Patient Care and Satisfaction, Honest advice and most importantly the best breast enlargement results. The Private Clinic ensures you have the best cover and quality which includes; • A consultation with your specialist surgeon. • 24 hour patient helpline to ensure you are always in the best of hands. • Three years cover for all surgical, hospital and nursing care, in case of any medical issue giving you peace of mind. • The Private Clinic offers a unique warranty of £1000 towards surgical costs in case of rupture for 10 years from the date of your operation. • Comprehensive Breast Enlargement Patient Guide. • Highly experienced Cosmetic Breast Surgeons who have decades of experience. • Outstanding hospital facilities. • As many post-operative care and appointments with your surgeon and nursing team as required. • Our experience and medical expertise makes your journey a reassuring one click here Breast enlargement cost can be part of your decision to undergo a procedure but it should never be the deciding factor. Breast augmentation costs start from £5,800, it is an all inclusive procedure cost, with no hidden extras. Plus we have the best cover. See our comprehensive before and after photos and start your journey today. Book a consultation or request information. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Please note all consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon.

  • Will I be able to see before and after photos of a breast augmentation procedure?

    Our surgeons at The Private Clinic will be more than happy to show you a selection of before and after photos of the procedure you are considering at your consultation. We do also have a breast augmentation before and after photo gallery for you to view on our website by clicking here.

  • Will I be able to see before and after photos of a breast augmentation procedure?

    Our surgeons at The Private Clinic will be more than happy to show you a selection of before and after photos of the procedure you are considering at your consultation. We do also have a breast augmentation before and after photo gallery for you to view on our website by clicking here.

  • Cosmetic Surgery

  • Am I suitable for a Breast Augmentation?

    The size and shape of a woman’s bust can cause a great feeling of unhappiness and insecurity. In cases like these, a breast augmentation is a great way to provide both a safe and convenient solution to help restore confidence. There are many reasons why our patients decide to go ahead with breast augmentation but here at The Private Clinic we have a team of expert breast surgeons using the best techniques to help provide you with the results that you wish to achieve. All patients are handled with sensitivity and discretion. If you are over 18 years old, in good health and generally feeling fit and well then you will be suitable for a breast augmentation. However, in some cases, a breast augmentation may not be suitable for the results that you are expecting and in such cases an alternative or combined surgery method may be advised. The best way to ascertain your suitability for any type of surgery is to book a consultation to speak with your chosen surgeon. To book a consultation with our highly experienced surgeons click here.

  • What are the most natural looking breast implants?

    The right implant for you will be decided on by one of our expert breast surgeons. Your chosen breast implant will take into consideration your natural breast size and your body shape and frame. It is not possible to give an idea of one type of breast implant as different implant sizes, shapes and profiles will not all look the same on every patient. For each implant there are usually up to 4 different profiles which range from low to extra high and these decide on how much of the implant projects away from the chest wall.  A low profile will usually deliver more of a subtle or natural result but in certain cases the surgeon may advise that you go for a higher profile implant so that your breasts will be more in proportion to your body, therefore achieving a more natural result. Your surgeon will then discuss implant placement, usually for patients wanting a more natural implant result the implant will be placed below the muscle as this allows for more natural breast tissue to sit on top of the implant but in some cases it may be more appropriate to go an over the muscle option as that it what will suit your body the best. Taking care of your new breasts post-surgery will also have a big impact on the final result so it is very important to follow your surgeon’s aftercare advice to help you achieve the most natural result. We have an expert team of surgeons and nurses who will ensure that you receive the best advice both pre and post procedure to give you the best results.  To book a consultation click here or to find out more about the different types of breast implants take a look at our blog post here or view our breast augmentation video series here.

  • What is the difference between having your breast implants placed over the muscle or behind the muscle?

    Deciding where your breast implants are placed during breast augmentation surgery is decided by your surgeon and will be discussed in your consultation. Over the muscle may also be referred to as above the muscle or subglandular and it is when the breast implant is placed in front of the pectoralis minor and pectoralis major muscles that sit in your chest.  If you have a good amount of breast tissue then this option would be suitable for you as it will be able to help conceal the shape of the implant giving a more natural result. Under the muscle is also referred to as behind the muscle or Dual Plane. Although called under the muscle, usually the implant is never placed completely under the muscle as this is a relatively old fashioned breast augmentation technique. Instead the implant is placed under the pectoralis major muscle in the upper breast but above the serratus anterior muscle in the lower breast. Under the muscle is more commonly referred to as being dual plane and is normally the most favoured of techniques.  This option is best for patients who have little natural breast tissue as this method reduces the likelihood of your breast implants showing and gives a more natural looking result. Our expert breast surgeons are experienced in recommending the best breast augmentation technique to help suit you and your desired results. To book a consultation click here.

  • How Much Does Breast Augmentation Cost UK?

    The Private Clinic guides thousands of woman every year through their breast enlargement journey. We are committed to Medical Expertise, Patient Care and Satisfaction, Honest advice and most importantly the best breast enlargement results. The Private Clinic ensures you have the best cover and quality which includes;

    • A consultation with your specialist surgeon.
    • 24 hour patient helpline to ensure you are always in the best of hands.
    • Three years cover for all surgical, hospital and nursing care, in case of any medical issue giving you peace of mind.
    • The Private Clinic offers a unique warranty of £1000 towards surgical costs in case of rupture for 10 years from the date of your operation.
    • Comprehensive Breast Enlargement Patient Guide.
    • Highly experienced Cosmetic Breast Surgeons who have decades of experience.
    • Outstanding hospital facilities.
    • As many post-operative care and appointments with your surgeon and nursing team as required.
    • Our experience and medical expertise makes your journey a reassuring one click here
    Breast enlargement cost can be part of your decision to undergo a procedure but it should never be the deciding factor. Breast augmentation costs start from £5,800, it is an all inclusive procedure cost, with no hidden extras. Plus we have the best cover. See our comprehensive before and after photos and start your journey today. Book a consultation or request information. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon.

  • Will I be able to see before and after photos of a breast augmentation procedure?

    Our surgeons at The Private Clinic will be more than happy to show you a selection of before and after photos of the procedure you are considering at your consultation. We do also have a breast augmentation before and after photo gallery for you to view on our website by clicking here.

  • What does a Breast Augmentation involve?

    A Breast augmentation is known by many names – like breast enhancement, breast enlargement, or more commonly, a ‘boob job’ – but one thing is clear, it’s one of the most sought-after cosmetic procedure in the UK. A breast augmentation procedure involves breast implants being inserted into the chest to enhance the appearance of the breast by increasing the size, shape, form and feel of a woman’s breast. The procedure does involve a general anaesthetic but there is not usually an overnight stay required. There are 3 potential incision sites but the most common and widely used is the inframammary fold (IMF) which means the scar is placed along the natural crease line underneath the breast. A typical breast augmentation scar is very small usually 5-6cm. Other alternative incision sites are Periareolar (around the underside of the nipple) and axillary (through the armpit) these are not used on a regular basis and the option to use them will come down to the preference of the surgeon. There is also an option as to where the implant is placed which is either in front of the pectoral muscle or behind. This decision will be made by your surgeon and is often based on the amount of natural breast tissue that you have. Once your implant has been put into place, your surgeon will use dissolvable stitches to secure the incision and bandages and a support bra will be placed on you to wake up in once in recovery. After the procedure, you shouldn’t be in too much pain as the local anaesthetic administered in and around the breast will still be in place. Once you are feeling well and your surgeon has assessed you, you will be able to return home to recover. At The Private Clinic your chosen specialist breast surgeon will be able to discuss your options with you and speak to you about the procedure in detail. They will be able to assess your shape in detail and advise on the most suitable placement for your implants and give you their objective opinion on the best breast enlargement shape that you can achieve. To find out more about Breast augmentation procedures at The Private Clinic, or to book a consultation click here.

  • What Type Of Implants Do You Use?

    At The Private Clinic for breast augmentation, types of breast implants we offer are Nagor, Mentor, Motiva, Allergan Smooth and B-lite  . The best option is to discuss the type of breast implant and what is best for your shape in your consultation with your breast cosmetic surgeon. We primarily use silicone implants, which we believe give the most natural and long-lasting results. They consist of a solid silicone outer shell which is pre-filled with medical-grade, fully approved cohesive silicone gel. Breast implants can be round or shaped. Your suitability will be established during consultations where you will discuss the different shapes and sizes and how they might suit your needs and shape. For more information on breast implants see the following blogs;

    • How to choose breast implants
    • Choosing the perfect implants
    • Choosing the correct breast implant shape and size
    To find out more about the types of implants we offer, visit us for a consultation with an expert breast surgeon who will be able to advise on the best implant to help you achieve your desired look and suit your frame.

  • Will the Results Feel Natural?

    Implants have been designed to mimic the natural feel of the breasts. Silicone implants offer the best possible feel. In particular, if the implant is positioned below the muscle then the natural breast tissue become more prominent – allowing for a more natural feel. Initially, your breast implants may feel unnatural to you this is most likely because you are not used to them but breast implants can also take a month or so to properly settle. Our medical team at The Private Clinic have many years of experience and are at the forefront of their field, regularly helping women achieve the results they want. It is always their aim to ensure that your results are natural looking and will always recommend the best options to suit you, your frame and your ideal goal from surgery.

  • What is a Keller Funnel?

    The Keller Funnel is a device used by some surgeons to insert the breast implant into the chest pocket without the need to touch it. The Keller Funnel is made of a clear polymeric material that’s interior is surfaced with a hydrophilic coating. This coating is then submerged in a sterile solution causing it to become very slippy allowing the breast implant to move through it. Round implants are loaded into the funnel usually direct from the packaging which is why this is often called a ‘no-touch technique’.  Shaped implants are usually hand placed into the funnel to allow the surgeon to make sure that they are in the correct position, direction and orientation and this is called the ‘Minimal Touch Technique’. The smallest part of the funnel is then placed into the incision and the implant is gently moved through the Keller funnel and into the chest pocket. Benefits of the Keller Funnel include shorter incision lengths, improved patient comfort, increased protection against infection, reduced force on the breast implant and less trauma caused to tissue surrounding the implant. The Keller Funnel is an FDA (Food & Drug Administration) approved device in the USA. The Keller Funnel is owned by Allergan, one of the world’s largest medical, pharmaceutical research and development companies To find out more about the Keller Funnel technique book a breast augmentation consultation with one of our expert surgeons.

  • What Is The Recovery Process Like?

    All breast augmentation procedures at The Private Clinic are performed as day cases unless otherwise specified by the surgeon. Once you have been assessed by your surgeon or a member of the nursing team you will be able to leave to carry on your recovery in the comfort of your own home. Initially, we advise that you take a week off work to recover but some patients choose to take two weeks but this depends on your healing rate and the nature of your occupation. Those with a desk job may find returning to work easier than those who spend all on their feet. The week following your procedure you should be resting and taking it easy but do not spend all your time stationery, it is important to keep active and make sure to get up for regular short walks but do not try to do too much. You should arrange for someone to help you around the house and to help with childcare if necessary. Exercise and other strenuous activities should be avoided for 4-6 weeks post procedure and your surgeon will be able to advise you on this. You will be required to attend a series of follow-up appointments at The Private Clinic with a nurse and then a 6 week check-up appointment with your surgeon. At this stage you should be pretty much back to your everyday activities and your surgeon will be able to advise you on anything that you are unsure of or have questions about. Find out more about what to expect after a Breast Augmentation here. Or take a look at our Breast Enlargement Journey video series here. Contact us to book an appointment with a breast implant specialist at The Private Clinic.

  • Breast Augmentation After Procedure

  • Will the Results Feel Natural?

    Implants have been designed to mimic the natural feel of the breasts. Silicone implants offer the best possible feel. In particular, if the implant is positioned below the muscle then the natural breast tissue become more prominent – allowing for a more natural feel. Initially, your breast implants may feel unnatural to you this is most likely because you are not used to them but breast implants can also take a month or so to properly settle. Our medical team at The Private Clinic have many years of experience and are at the forefront of their field, regularly helping women achieve the results they want. It is always their aim to ensure that your results are natural looking and will always recommend the best options to suit you, your frame and your ideal goal from surgery.

  • What Is The Recovery Process Like?

    All breast augmentation procedures at The Private Clinic are performed as day cases unless otherwise specified by the surgeon. Once you have been assessed by your surgeon or a member of the nursing team you will be able to leave to carry on your recovery in the comfort of your own home. Initially, we advise that you take a week off work to recover but some patients choose to take two weeks but this depends on your healing rate and the nature of your occupation. Those with a desk job may find returning to work easier than those who spend all on their feet. The week following your procedure you should be resting and taking it easy but do not spend all your time stationery, it is important to keep active and make sure to get up for regular short walks but do not try to do too much. You should arrange for someone to help you around the house and to help with childcare if necessary. Exercise and other strenuous activities should be avoided for 4-6 weeks post procedure and your surgeon will be able to advise you on this. You will be required to attend a series of follow-up appointments at The Private Clinic with a nurse and then a 6 week check-up appointment with your surgeon. At this stage you should be pretty much back to your everyday activities and your surgeon will be able to advise you on anything that you are unsure of or have questions about. Find out more about what to expect after a Breast Augmentation here. Or take a look at our Breast Enlargement Journey video series here. Contact us to book an appointment with a breast implant specialist at The Private Clinic.

  • Are There Any Risks?

    As a potential breast enlargement patient, you need to consider the potential risks and consequences that sometimes can occur with the surgery you are seeking. Breast Augmentation surgery carries risk just like any surgical procedure would do. The common risks are infection, seromas, excessive bleeding or reaction to the anaesthetic. Other risks specific to breast augmentation surgery include;

    • Capsular Contracture After you have had breast implants, your body begins to naturally surround the implant with a layer of scar tissue. This tissue is known as a ‘capsule’ because it encapsulates or surrounds the implant. Sometimes, for a number of reasons, the capsule can tighten and squeeze the implant. This is then known as a capsular contracture. It can cause the breast to feel hard, look misshaped and can sometimes be painful. Capsular contracture is treatable and it may require additional surgery. Your surgeon will discuss this with you in more detail at your consultation. Capsular contracture is one of the most common reasons for reoperation, and is also a risk factor for implant rupture. As part of your initial clinical assessment your surgeon will take steps to reduce your chance of developing capsular contracture. The severity of capsular contracture is graded using the four-grade baker scale; Grade I capsular contracture is the least severe and Grade IV is the most severe.
    • Implant rupture An implant rupture is a tear or hole in the breast implant shell. When this occurs in a silicone gel-filled implant, the gel may remain in the shell, leak into the tissue (or capsule) tht forms around the implant or spread beyond the capsule. Breast implant ruptures can be caused by a variety of causes such as excessive trauma to the chest, extreme capsular contracture or damage by surgical instruments. The symptoms of implant rupture that you may notice include; decreased breast size, changes in the breast shape, pain or tenderness and swelling. In some cases a ‘silent rupture’ may occur and the woman will experience no changes to the way the implant looks or feels. This type of rupture is diagnosed by magnetic resonance imaging (MRI), and this may be recommended as part of your post-surgery medical examinations. Implant rupture is treatable, a removal of the implant will be recommended. Your surgeon will diagnose if your implant has ruptured and determine if you should have it replaced or removed. At The Private Clinic you are initially provided with 3 years cover for higher grades of capsular contracture and breast implant rupture that may require further treatments. This cover period can be extended with our unique Extended Aftercare Scheme for additional peace of mind, ask your co-ordinator for details on this.
    • Breast Implant Associated Anaplastic Large Cell Lymphoma (BIA-ALCL) BIA-ALCL is a Breast Implant Associated Anaplastic Large Cell Lymphoma, a rare T-cell lymphoma that can arise around breast implants. Currently the cause of BIA-ALCL is not clearly understood. BIA-ALCL is rare and the true incidence is hard to estimate. To date, the estimated incidence rates in scientific literature range from 0.03% to 0.003% or 1 in 3,817 to 1 in 30,000. Current MHRA (The UK Regulator for Medical Devices) estimates that the rate is 1 in 24,000. BIA-ALCL has been associated with both saline and silicone implants, round and anatomical implants, all gel types, all types of implant texturing, and all projections and seizes, as well as breast implants that have been used for both reconstructive and cosmetic purposes. Presently, no specific risk factors have been identified by health bodies around the world that are studying this disease. However, factors such as breast implant texture, genetics and bacteria have been implicated and are presently undergoing further study. Breast implants have different surface textures, including smooth or textured. For cases reported to date, BIA-ALCL has been seen most often in patients with textured implants. Your plastic surgeon will be able to provide you with much more information at your consultation and please don’t hesitate to ask any questions you may have regarding BIA-ALCL or any other risk associated with breast implant surgery. When diagnosed early BIA-ALCL can be treated, often successfully by removing the breast implant and surrounding scar capsule, however additional treatment may be necessary depending on the individual and whether the disease has spread throughout the body. As with all cancers it is important to be diagnosed and treated as early as possible. At The Private Clinic we advise it is good health practice to self-examine breasts regularly and we would recommend that all patients with breast implants do this. Should anything such as swelling of the breast or other symptoms such as pains, lumps and unevenness between the breasts be detected an appointment to see your surgeon or GP should be made as soon as possible.
    • Other breast augmentation surgery risks include change in breast or nipple sensation, implant displacement, breast asymmetry and ptosis.
    What to expect at your consultation? At your consultation, your plastic surgeon will discuss all the risks and complications mentioned above. You will also receive a Breast Enlargement Patient Guide which details all of the information that you need to know before going ahead with breast augmentation surgery. Your consultation is a great time to discuss any questions or concerns that you may have, your surgeon will also be able to go through the different implant sizes, shapes and brands available and assess which is suitable for you and your shape alongside your desired goals. last update April 2019 BAAPS statement on breast implants and guidance for patients -April-4’2019 Breast Implant Safety and Risks For information on Breast Implant Safety and risks please see; https://www.theprivateclinic.co.uk/breast-implant-safety

  • How long do the results of tummy tuck surgery last for?

    The results you get after a tummy tuck procedure are essentially permanent however as we age, our bodies change and our skin may become more elasticated which could affect the results. Gaining weight or becoming pregnant can also alter the results of a tummy tuck procedure.

  • What Do I Do If My Implant Ruptures?

    If a leak or rupture is spotted, you shouldn’t panic, as implants are made in such a way as not to damage your body’s tissue. However, if anything goes wrong, it’s best to address the issue as soon as possible, because complications may arise otherwise. If you suspect that you’ve suffered a rupture, the best course of action is to immediately contact your surgeon to arrange for a consultation. Once you’ve been examined, your surgeon will discuss your options with you. There are two kinds of possible ruptures. A silent rupture is contained within the breast tissue and may not present any symptoms or discomfort. Some women decide to leave things be and to see what happens, but your surgeon will weigh in on what’s most advisable in your case. On the other hand, if you are experiencing any pain, tissue distortion or swelling, you’ll most probably have to undergo surgery. In both cases you will have the option to either completely remove, or to replace, your implants. If a leak or rupture is spotted, you shouldn’t panic, as implants are made in such a way as not to damage your body’s tissue. However, if anything goes wrong, it’s best to address the issue as soon as possible, because complications may arise otherwise. If you suspect that you’ve suffered a rupture, the best course of action is to immediately contact your surgeon to arrange for a consultation. Once you’ve been examined, your surgeon will discuss your options with you. There are two kinds of possible ruptures. A silent rupture is contained within the breast tissue and may not present any symptoms or discomfort. Some women decide to leave things be and to see what happens, but your surgeon will weigh in on what’s most advisable in your case. On the other hand, if you are experiencing any pain, tissue distortion or swelling, you’ll most probably have to undergo surgery. In both cases you will have the option to either completely remove, or to replace, your implants.

  • What Aftercare Does The Private Clinic Offer?

    We believe that the right aftercare is essential to a successful recovery process and at The Private Clinic we’re proud to be known for the high quality of ours. Our elite medical team will be at your disposal every step of the way and you will be assigned a dedicated Patient Coordinator, who will be there to support you throughout your time with us, all the way up until you’ve fully recovered. You will be able to contact them with any questions or concerns that you may have. As well as being able to offer you information, they are also there to give you emotional support should you need it. You will be treated with utmost professionalism while you’re under our care. Your surgeon will take you through a detailed recovery guide following your breast enhancement procedure and we will call you to check up on your progress. Our highly skilled nurses will see you while you heal and at the end of the line, a final consultation will be arranged with your surgeon. We offer a 24 hour patient helpline direct to your nursing team and surgeon, which means should you have any concern we are here to help. Dedicated post-operative care and appointments with your surgeon and nursing team are arranged in order to give you the best experience. In the unlikely event of any medical complications from your surgery you are covered for three years for re-admission. This covers all surgical, hospital and nursing care free of charge. To book a consultation for breast enlargement at The Private Clinic click here.

  • Will I Be Able To Breastfeed After Breast Augmentation Surgery?

    Many patients are able to breastfeed after they have had breast augmentation surgery. As long as your breasts contain functioning breast tissue before the surgery then this will be unaffected during the procedure. If your procedure is combined with another procedure such as an areola or nipple correction or even uplift then there may a risk of your milk ducts being damaged or functioning breast tissue being removed. Your surgeon will discuss this thoroughly at your consultation. Our expert breast surgeons are very experienced in performing breast enlargement procedures that allow patients to breastfeed after the procedure. If you are concerned about breast feeding post-procedure then it is important to discuss this with your surgeon as it may affect their surgical method. To find out more about breast enlargement procedures at The Private Clinic click here.

  • Will having a breast augmentation affect my nipple sensation?

    Overall, a breast augmentation procedure should not cause too much change to your nipple sensation. Some patients may experience extra sensitive nipples after the procedure and others may notice a decrease in sensitivity. In both cases this change should be temporary and you can normally expect nipple sensitivity to return to normal 2-3 months after breast enlargement surgery but it can be permanent in very rare cases. Breast implants are placed beneath the gland of the breast so they will not interfere with the lactation process. There is also no evidence to suggest that silicone implants will harm your baby. Our specialist breast surgeons here at The Private Clinic use their expertise to ensure that patients do not experience this problem by picking sensible implant sizes, using a inframammary incision technique that does not interfere with the nipple and ensuring that the implant location is suitable for the breast size, shape and frame for the patient. Click here to book a breast enlargement consultation with one of our expert surgeons.

  • When will I be able to exercise again after breast augmentation?

    A breast augmentation is a form of surgical procedure so you will need to take some rest post-procedure to ensure that you heal well. At The Private Clinic we provide our patients with detailed aftercare information which will include particulars about returning to exercise and general activity post breast enlargement surgery. We usually recommend that you avoid exercise for at least 4 weeks after surgery. No heavy lifting or strenuous activities should be carried out until you are 6 weeks post-surgery and have been given the go-ahead from your surgeon.

  • What Long-Term Precautions Should I Be Taking Following My Breast Augmentation Procedure?

    As a precautionary measure, we advise that you have an MRI scan every couple of years to make sure that everything’s as it should be. It’s also advisable that you check your breasts regularly to monitor any changes in shape, size or texture. Other than that, you should handle your breasts the same way you would have prior to surgery.

  • Breast Augmentation Day of Procedure

  • How Long Does The Procedure Last?

    A breast augmentation procedure tends to last roughly an hour and a half but this will depend on your surgeon and the process of your individual procedure. The procedure is performed under general anaesthetic but you will not be required to stay overnight at hospital unless your surgeon has advised otherwise. After your procedure, you will be given time to rest from surgery and will be able to leave to return home later on in the day once checked over by the nursing team. You will need to have a friend or family member to leave with you to ensure that you get home safely.

  • Do I need to purchase a specific bra for my breast enlargement surgery?

    A surgical bra will be provided to you by The Private Clinic and you will be wearing this once your procedure is complete. We recommend that you wear your post-op bra for 6 weeks after your surgical procedure. We do advise for patients to purchase a spare bra to wear when their original bra is in the wash, these can be purchased from many high street stores such as Marks & Spencer and Asda.

  • Breast Augmentation Before Procedure

  • Am I suitable for a Breast Augmentation?

    The size and shape of a woman’s bust can cause a great feeling of unhappiness and insecurity. In cases like these, a breast augmentation is a great way to provide both a safe and convenient solution to help restore confidence. There are many reasons why our patients decide to go ahead with breast augmentation but here at The Private Clinic we have a team of expert breast surgeons using the best techniques to help provide you with the results that you wish to achieve. All patients are handled with sensitivity and discretion. If you are over 18 years old, in good health and generally feeling fit and well then you will be suitable for a breast augmentation. However, in some cases, a breast augmentation may not be suitable for the results that you are expecting and in such cases an alternative or combined surgery method may be advised. The best way to ascertain your suitability for any type of surgery is to book a consultation to speak with your chosen surgeon. To book a consultation with our highly experienced surgeons click here.

  • Am I suitable for a Breast Augmentation?

    The size and shape of a woman’s bust can cause a great feeling of unhappiness and insecurity. In cases like these, a breast augmentation is a great way to provide both a safe and convenient solution to help restore confidence. There are many reasons why our patients decide to go ahead with breast augmentation but here at The Private Clinic we have a team of expert breast surgeons using the best techniques to help provide you with the results that you wish to achieve. All patients are handled with sensitivity and discretion. If you are over 18 years old, in good health and generally feeling fit and well then you will be suitable for a breast augmentation. However, in some cases, a breast augmentation may not be suitable for the results that you are expecting and in such cases an alternative or combined surgery method may be advised. The best way to ascertain your suitability for any type of surgery is to book a consultation to speak with your chosen surgeon. To book a consultation with our highly experienced surgeons click here.

  • What are the most natural looking breast implants?

    The right implant for you will be decided on by one of our expert breast surgeons. Your chosen breast implant will take into consideration your natural breast size and your body shape and frame. It is not possible to give an idea of one type of breast implant as different implant sizes, shapes and profiles will not all look the same on every patient. For each implant there are usually up to 4 different profiles which range from low to extra high and these decide on how much of the implant projects away from the chest wall.  A low profile will usually deliver more of a subtle or natural result but in certain cases the surgeon may advise that you go for a higher profile implant so that your breasts will be more in proportion to your body, therefore achieving a more natural result. Your surgeon will then discuss implant placement, usually for patients wanting a more natural implant result the implant will be placed below the muscle as this allows for more natural breast tissue to sit on top of the implant but in some cases it may be more appropriate to go an over the muscle option as that it what will suit your body the best. Taking care of your new breasts post-surgery will also have a big impact on the final result so it is very important to follow your surgeon’s aftercare advice to help you achieve the most natural result. We have an expert team of surgeons and nurses who will ensure that you receive the best advice both pre and post procedure to give you the best results.  To book a consultation click here or to find out more about the different types of breast implants take a look at our blog post here or view our breast augmentation video series here.

  • What are the most natural looking breast implants?

    The right implant for you will be decided on by one of our expert breast surgeons. Your chosen breast implant will take into consideration your natural breast size and your body shape and frame. It is not possible to give an idea of one type of breast implant as different implant sizes, shapes and profiles will not all look the same on every patient. For each implant there are usually up to 4 different profiles which range from low to extra high and these decide on how much of the implant projects away from the chest wall. A low profile will usually deliver more of a subtle or natural result but in certain cases the surgeon may advise that you go for a higher profile implant so that your breasts will be more in proportion to your body, therefore achieving a more natural result. Your surgeon will then discuss implant placement, usually for patients wanting a more natural implant result the implant will be placed below the muscle as this allows for more natural breast tissue to sit on top of the implant but in some cases it may be more appropriate to go an over the muscle option as that it what will suit your body the best. Taking care of your new breasts post-surgery will also have a big impact on the final result so it is very important to follow your surgeon’s aftercare advice to help you achieve the most natural result. We have an expert team of surgeons and nurses who will ensure that you receive the best advice both pre and post procedure to give you the best results. To book a consultation click here or to find out more about the different types of breast implants take a look at our blog post here or view our breast augmentation video series below.

  • What is the difference between having your breast implants placed over the muscle or behind the muscle?

    Deciding where your breast implants are placed during breast augmentation surgery is decided by your surgeon and will be discussed in your consultation. Over the muscle may also be referred to as above the muscle or subglandular and it is when the breast implant is placed in front of the pectoralis minor and pectoralis major muscles that sit in your chest.  If you have a good amount of breast tissue then this option would be suitable for you as it will be able to help conceal the shape of the implant giving a more natural result. Under the muscle is also referred to as behind the muscle or Dual Plane. Although called under the muscle, usually the implant is never placed completely under the muscle as this is a relatively old fashioned breast augmentation technique. Instead the implant is placed under the pectoralis major muscle in the upper breast but above the serratus anterior muscle in the lower breast. Under the muscle is more commonly referred to as being dual plane and is normally the most favoured of techniques.  This option is best for patients who have little natural breast tissue as this method reduces the likelihood of your breast implants showing and gives a more natural looking result. Our expert breast surgeons are experienced in recommending the best breast augmentation technique to help suit you and your desired results. To book a consultation click here.

  • What is the difference between having your breast implants placed over the muscle or behind the muscle?

    Deciding where your breast implants are placed during breast augmentation surgery is decided by your surgeon and will be discussed in your consultation. Over the muscle may also be referred to as above the muscle or subglandular and it is when the breast implant is placed in front of the pectoralis minor and pectoralis major muscles that sit in your chest. If you have a good amount of breast tissue then this option would be suitable for you as it will be able to help conceal the shape of the implant giving a more natural result. Under the muscle is also referred to as behind the muscle or Dual Plane. Although called under the muscle, usually the implant is never placed completely under the muscle as this is a relatively old fashioned breast augmentation technique. Instead the implant is placed under the pectoralis major muscle in the upper breast but above the serratus anterior muscle in the lower breast. Under the muscle is more commonly referred to as being dual plane and is normally the most favoured of techniques. This option is best for patients who have little natural breast tissue as this method reduces the likelihood of your breast implants showing and gives a more natural looking result. Our expert breast surgeons are experienced in recommending the best breast augmentation technique to help suit you and your desired results. To book a consultation click here.

  • How Much Does Breast Augmentation Cost UK?

    The Private Clinic guides thousands of woman every year through their breast enlargement journey. We are committed to Medical Expertise, Patient Care and Satisfaction, Honest advice and most importantly the best breast enlargement results. The Private Clinic ensures you have the best cover and quality which includes;

    • A consultation with your specialist surgeon.
    • 24 hour patient helpline to ensure you are always in the best of hands.
    • Three years cover for all surgical, hospital and nursing care, in case of any medical issue giving you peace of mind.
    • The Private Clinic offers a unique warranty of £1000 towards surgical costs in case of rupture for 10 years from the date of your operation.
    • Comprehensive Breast Enlargement Patient Guide.
    • Highly experienced Cosmetic Breast Surgeons who have decades of experience.
    • Outstanding hospital facilities.
    • As many post-operative care and appointments with your surgeon and nursing team as required.
    • Our experience and medical expertise makes your journey a reassuring one click here
    Breast enlargement cost can be part of your decision to undergo a procedure but it should never be the deciding factor. Breast augmentation costs start from £5,800, it is an all inclusive procedure cost, with no hidden extras. Plus we have the best cover. See our comprehensive before and after photos and start your journey today. Book a consultation or request information. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon.

  • How Much Does Breast Augmentation Cost UK?

    The Private Clinic guides thousands of woman every year through their breast enlargement journey. We are committed to Medical Expertise, Patient Care and Satisfaction, Honest advice and most importantly the best breast enlargement results. The Private Clinic ensures you have the best cover and quality which includes; • A consultation with your specialist surgeon. • 24 hour patient helpline to ensure you are always in the best of hands. • Three years cover for all surgical, hospital and nursing care, in case of any medical issue giving you peace of mind. • The Private Clinic offers a unique warranty of £1000 towards surgical costs in case of rupture for 10 years from the date of your operation. • Comprehensive Breast Enlargement Patient Guide. • Highly experienced Cosmetic Breast Surgeons who have decades of experience. • Outstanding hospital facilities. • As many post-operative care and appointments with your surgeon and nursing team as required. • Our experience and medical expertise makes your journey a reassuring one click here Breast enlargement cost can be part of your decision to undergo a procedure but it should never be the deciding factor. Breast augmentation costs start from £5,800, it is an all inclusive procedure cost, with no hidden extras. Plus we have the best cover. See our comprehensive before and after photos and start your journey today. Book a consultation or request information. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Please note all consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon.

  • Will I be able to see before and after photos of a breast augmentation procedure?

    Our surgeons at The Private Clinic will be more than happy to show you a selection of before and after photos of the procedure you are considering at your consultation. We do also have a breast augmentation before and after photo gallery for you to view on our website by clicking here.

  • Will I be able to see before and after photos of a breast augmentation procedure?

    Our surgeons at The Private Clinic will be more than happy to show you a selection of before and after photos of the procedure you are considering at your consultation. We do also have a breast augmentation before and after photo gallery for you to view on our website by clicking here.

  • Breast Augmentation General Procedure

  • What does a Breast Augmentation involve?

    A Breast augmentation is known by many names – like breast enhancement, breast enlargement, or more commonly, a ‘boob job’ – but one thing is clear, it’s one of the most sought-after cosmetic procedure in the UK. A breast augmentation procedure involves breast implants being inserted into the chest to enhance the appearance of the breast by increasing the size, shape, form and feel of a woman’s breast. The procedure does involve a general anaesthetic but there is not usually an overnight stay required. There are 3 potential incision sites but the most common and widely used is the inframammary fold (IMF) which means the scar is placed along the natural crease line underneath the breast. A typical breast augmentation scar is very small usually 5-6cm. Other alternative incision sites are Periareolar (around the underside of the nipple) and axillary (through the armpit) these are not used on a regular basis and the option to use them will come down to the preference of the surgeon. There is also an option as to where the implant is placed which is either in front of the pectoral muscle or behind. This decision will be made by your surgeon and is often based on the amount of natural breast tissue that you have. Once your implant has been put into place, your surgeon will use dissolvable stitches to secure the incision and bandages and a support bra will be placed on you to wake up in once in recovery. After the procedure, you shouldn’t be in too much pain as the local anaesthetic administered in and around the breast will still be in place. Once you are feeling well and your surgeon has assessed you, you will be able to return home to recover. At The Private Clinic your chosen specialist breast surgeon will be able to discuss your options with you and speak to you about the procedure in detail. They will be able to assess your shape in detail and advise on the most suitable placement for your implants and give you their objective opinion on the best breast enlargement shape that you can achieve. To find out more about Breast augmentation procedures at The Private Clinic, or to book a consultation click here.

  • Am I too old to have breast augmentation surgery?

    There is no age limit on breast augmentation surgery; as long as you are over 18 years old, in good medical health and generally fit and well then you will be able to be considered for surgery. We have many patients who have breast enlargement surgery with us who have had children and want to regain their feminine shape following breast feeding. To find out more or book a breast augmentation consultation with our breast surgery specialists click here.

  • Why Choose The Private Clinic?

    The Private Clinic is renowned for setting the standards in the Cosmetic Industry and addresses every possible measure to ensure patient safety and satisfaction. From the first consultation, through to our first-class aftercare, the team at The Private Clinic is sympathetic, caring and highly skilled. There’s no hard-sell, just good advice and the best possible results. The Private Clinic ensures you have the best cover and quality which includes;

    • Consultations with your specialist surgeon.
    • 24 hour patient helpline to ensure you are always in the best of hands.
    • Three years cover for all surgical, hospital and nursing care, in case of any medical issue giving you peace of mind.
    • The Private Clinic offers a unique warranty of £1000 towards surgical costs in case of rupture for 10 years from the date of your operation.
    • Comprehensive Breast Enlargement Patient Guide.
    • Highly experienced Cosmetic Breast Surgeons who have decades of experience.
    • Outstanding hospital facilities.
    • As many post-operative care and appointments with your surgeon and nursing team as required.
    • Our experience and medical expertise makes your journey a reassuring one click here
    • Gallery of patient before and after photos
    • Informative Breast Augmentation Video Series
    We also have one of the highest patients’ satisfaction rates, TrustPilot 9.4, 5 star rating, 93% would recommend us to their friends and family. We are a multi award winning provider voted the Aesthetic award for Best UK Clinic Group 2017 and MyFaceMyBody Best Cosmetic Surgery Practice 2018. Click here to see our reviews or click here to read patient stories.

  • Do breast implants cause stretch marks?

    It is uncommon for your breast implants to cause stretch marks to appear on your breasts because the skin on your breast is usually very elastic and resilient to a change in size. Stretch marks can occasionally be a side effect of breast implants but this is usually for a genetic reason rather than anything to do with the implant. When you are measured for your implants, your chest dimensions are taken into consideration to avoid the stretching of the skin for implants that are too big. If you are already prone to stretch marks then it is best to take this into consideration when choosing an implant size. Here at The Private Clinic we have a team of breast implant specialists who will be able to effectively advise you on the best implant shape and size that will work best with your body in order to avoid the risk of stretch marks. To book your consultation click here.

  • Why do I need to stop smoking to have a breast augmentation?

    At The Private Clinic we always advise our patients to stop smoking both before and after having any surgical procedure. Smoking causes the blood vessels to constrict which reduces the blood supply and oxygen to the damaged tissue caused by surgery. When patients smoke after surgery they may notice that their wounds are healing much slower compared to others. Your surgeon will discuss the appropriate time frames for when to refrain from smoking in your consultation.

  • What’s The Average Lifespan Of Implants?

    The average lifespan of a breast implant according to most manufacturers is 10 years which is why many surgeons will recommend removing or replacing your implants around this time frame. This estimate however can vary between individuals so we do recommend that you attend regular check-up appointments with your surgeon who will be able to assess you and your implants. Just because you have had your implants for 10 years does not always mean that they need removing or exchanging and in most cases you will be fine to leave them in. Your surgeon may suggest that you book in for an MRI scan to check the condition of your implants. When you attend a consultation with one of our expert breast surgeons, they will fully explain the life span of your implant and what to expect for the future. It is important that you feel well informed before having a surgical procedure and here at The Private Clinic you will find that our experience and medical expertise will make your breast enlargement journey a reassuring one. The Private Clinic are experts in removal and/or change of implant procedures and we have many women choose to visit us having had their original surgery elsewhere as they want to be sure that they are choosing expert surgeons who have had lots of experience in change of implant procedures.

  • What is the breast implant registry?

    The HSCIC (The Health & Social Care Information Centre) developed a Breast Implant Registry on behalf of the Department of Health. The registry has been established to capture record of all breast implant surgery carried out both by the NHS and privately. The Breast Implant Registry has been designed to record the details of patients who have had breast implant surgery. Details are held to that in the event of a safety concern, all patients can be traced. It will also allow the identification of any possible trends or complications that relate to specific implants. In order to add your details to the register, The Private Clinic will require consent and consent forms will be provided to you on your surgery day.

  • What breast implant placement is best?

    The placement of your implants is an important decision that will be advised upon by our expert surgeons. Everyone’s body is different and implant placement will be dependent upon your body type, breast shape and your desired result. At The Private Clinic we have a wide range of patients having their implants placed above and below the muscle. It is generally advised that if you are petite with little natural breast tissue then your implants should be placed behind the muscle to create a more natural result as it makes the implant less visible. Those patients who have a suitable amount of breast tissue may be recommended to have their implants placed over the muscle as this will instead give them a more natural result.

    Our expert breast surgeons will be able to best advise you on your optimal breast implant placement at your consultation.

  • What does a free breast augmentation consultation mean?

    We offer a free breast augmentation consultations with one of our experienced patient advisers which will take place over the phone or through a video call. Our adivors are able to provide you with all the information you need to know on breast augmentation procedures and recommend the best breast augmentation surgeons to suit your requirements. In order to secure your timed phone or video appointment we ask that you pay a £25 refundable deposit. This is refunded once the consultation takes place. You can change your appointment time up to 48 hours before. Contact us to book your free phone or video consultation.

  • Breast Augmentation Most Popular

  • Am I suitable for a Breast Augmentation?

    The size and shape of a woman’s bust can cause a great feeling of unhappiness and insecurity. In cases like these, a breast augmentation is a great way to provide both a safe and convenient solution to help restore confidence. There are many reasons why our patients decide to go ahead with breast augmentation but here at The Private Clinic we have a team of expert breast surgeons using the best techniques to help provide you with the results that you wish to achieve. All patients are handled with sensitivity and discretion. If you are over 18 years old, in good health and generally feeling fit and well then you will be suitable for a breast augmentation. However, in some cases, a breast augmentation may not be suitable for the results that you are expecting and in such cases an alternative or combined surgery method may be advised. The best way to ascertain your suitability for any type of surgery is to book a consultation to speak with your chosen surgeon. To book a consultation with our highly experienced surgeons click here.

  • Am I suitable for a Breast Augmentation?

    The size and shape of a woman’s bust can cause a great feeling of unhappiness and insecurity. In cases like these, a breast augmentation is a great way to provide both a safe and convenient solution to help restore confidence. There are many reasons why our patients decide to go ahead with breast augmentation but here at The Private Clinic we have a team of expert breast surgeons using the best techniques to help provide you with the results that you wish to achieve. All patients are handled with sensitivity and discretion. If you are over 18 years old, in good health and generally feeling fit and well then you will be suitable for a breast augmentation. However, in some cases, a breast augmentation may not be suitable for the results that you are expecting and in such cases an alternative or combined surgery method may be advised. The best way to ascertain your suitability for any type of surgery is to book a consultation to speak with your chosen surgeon. To book a consultation with our highly experienced surgeons click here.

  • What are the most natural looking breast implants?

    The right implant for you will be decided on by one of our expert breast surgeons. Your chosen breast implant will take into consideration your natural breast size and your body shape and frame. It is not possible to give an idea of one type of breast implant as different implant sizes, shapes and profiles will not all look the same on every patient. For each implant there are usually up to 4 different profiles which range from low to extra high and these decide on how much of the implant projects away from the chest wall.  A low profile will usually deliver more of a subtle or natural result but in certain cases the surgeon may advise that you go for a higher profile implant so that your breasts will be more in proportion to your body, therefore achieving a more natural result. Your surgeon will then discuss implant placement, usually for patients wanting a more natural implant result the implant will be placed below the muscle as this allows for more natural breast tissue to sit on top of the implant but in some cases it may be more appropriate to go an over the muscle option as that it what will suit your body the best. Taking care of your new breasts post-surgery will also have a big impact on the final result so it is very important to follow your surgeon’s aftercare advice to help you achieve the most natural result. We have an expert team of surgeons and nurses who will ensure that you receive the best advice both pre and post procedure to give you the best results.  To book a consultation click here or to find out more about the different types of breast implants take a look at our blog post here or view our breast augmentation video series here.

  • What are the most natural looking breast implants?

    The right implant for you will be decided on by one of our expert breast surgeons. Your chosen breast implant will take into consideration your natural breast size and your body shape and frame. It is not possible to give an idea of one type of breast implant as different implant sizes, shapes and profiles will not all look the same on every patient. For each implant there are usually up to 4 different profiles which range from low to extra high and these decide on how much of the implant projects away from the chest wall. A low profile will usually deliver more of a subtle or natural result but in certain cases the surgeon may advise that you go for a higher profile implant so that your breasts will be more in proportion to your body, therefore achieving a more natural result. Your surgeon will then discuss implant placement, usually for patients wanting a more natural implant result the implant will be placed below the muscle as this allows for more natural breast tissue to sit on top of the implant but in some cases it may be more appropriate to go an over the muscle option as that it what will suit your body the best. Taking care of your new breasts post-surgery will also have a big impact on the final result so it is very important to follow your surgeon’s aftercare advice to help you achieve the most natural result. We have an expert team of surgeons and nurses who will ensure that you receive the best advice both pre and post procedure to give you the best results. To book a consultation click here or to find out more about the different types of breast implants take a look at our blog post here or view our breast augmentation video series below.

  • What is the difference between having your breast implants placed over the muscle or behind the muscle?

    Deciding where your breast implants are placed during breast augmentation surgery is decided by your surgeon and will be discussed in your consultation. Over the muscle may also be referred to as above the muscle or subglandular and it is when the breast implant is placed in front of the pectoralis minor and pectoralis major muscles that sit in your chest.  If you have a good amount of breast tissue then this option would be suitable for you as it will be able to help conceal the shape of the implant giving a more natural result. Under the muscle is also referred to as behind the muscle or Dual Plane. Although called under the muscle, usually the implant is never placed completely under the muscle as this is a relatively old fashioned breast augmentation technique. Instead the implant is placed under the pectoralis major muscle in the upper breast but above the serratus anterior muscle in the lower breast. Under the muscle is more commonly referred to as being dual plane and is normally the most favoured of techniques.  This option is best for patients who have little natural breast tissue as this method reduces the likelihood of your breast implants showing and gives a more natural looking result. Our expert breast surgeons are experienced in recommending the best breast augmentation technique to help suit you and your desired results. To book a consultation click here.

  • What is the difference between having your breast implants placed over the muscle or behind the muscle?

    Deciding where your breast implants are placed during breast augmentation surgery is decided by your surgeon and will be discussed in your consultation. Over the muscle may also be referred to as above the muscle or subglandular and it is when the breast implant is placed in front of the pectoralis minor and pectoralis major muscles that sit in your chest. If you have a good amount of breast tissue then this option would be suitable for you as it will be able to help conceal the shape of the implant giving a more natural result. Under the muscle is also referred to as behind the muscle or Dual Plane. Although called under the muscle, usually the implant is never placed completely under the muscle as this is a relatively old fashioned breast augmentation technique. Instead the implant is placed under the pectoralis major muscle in the upper breast but above the serratus anterior muscle in the lower breast. Under the muscle is more commonly referred to as being dual plane and is normally the most favoured of techniques. This option is best for patients who have little natural breast tissue as this method reduces the likelihood of your breast implants showing and gives a more natural looking result. Our expert breast surgeons are experienced in recommending the best breast augmentation technique to help suit you and your desired results. To book a consultation click here.

  • How Much Does Breast Augmentation Cost UK?

    The Private Clinic guides thousands of woman every year through their breast enlargement journey. We are committed to Medical Expertise, Patient Care and Satisfaction, Honest advice and most importantly the best breast enlargement results. The Private Clinic ensures you have the best cover and quality which includes;

    • A consultation with your specialist surgeon.
    • 24 hour patient helpline to ensure you are always in the best of hands.
    • Three years cover for all surgical, hospital and nursing care, in case of any medical issue giving you peace of mind.
    • The Private Clinic offers a unique warranty of £1000 towards surgical costs in case of rupture for 10 years from the date of your operation.
    • Comprehensive Breast Enlargement Patient Guide.
    • Highly experienced Cosmetic Breast Surgeons who have decades of experience.
    • Outstanding hospital facilities.
    • As many post-operative care and appointments with your surgeon and nursing team as required.
    • Our experience and medical expertise makes your journey a reassuring one click here
    Breast enlargement cost can be part of your decision to undergo a procedure but it should never be the deciding factor. Breast augmentation costs start from £5,800, it is an all inclusive procedure cost, with no hidden extras. Plus we have the best cover. See our comprehensive before and after photos and start your journey today. Book a consultation or request information. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon.

  • How Much Does Breast Augmentation Cost UK?

    The Private Clinic guides thousands of woman every year through their breast enlargement journey. We are committed to Medical Expertise, Patient Care and Satisfaction, Honest advice and most importantly the best breast enlargement results. The Private Clinic ensures you have the best cover and quality which includes; • A consultation with your specialist surgeon. • 24 hour patient helpline to ensure you are always in the best of hands. • Three years cover for all surgical, hospital and nursing care, in case of any medical issue giving you peace of mind. • The Private Clinic offers a unique warranty of £1000 towards surgical costs in case of rupture for 10 years from the date of your operation. • Comprehensive Breast Enlargement Patient Guide. • Highly experienced Cosmetic Breast Surgeons who have decades of experience. • Outstanding hospital facilities. • As many post-operative care and appointments with your surgeon and nursing team as required. • Our experience and medical expertise makes your journey a reassuring one click here Breast enlargement cost can be part of your decision to undergo a procedure but it should never be the deciding factor. Breast augmentation costs start from £5,800, it is an all inclusive procedure cost, with no hidden extras. Plus we have the best cover. See our comprehensive before and after photos and start your journey today. Book a consultation or request information. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Please note all consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon.

  • Will I be able to see before and after photos of a breast augmentation procedure?

    Our surgeons at The Private Clinic will be more than happy to show you a selection of before and after photos of the procedure you are considering at your consultation. We do also have a breast augmentation before and after photo gallery for you to view on our website by clicking here.

  • Will I be able to see before and after photos of a breast augmentation procedure?

    Our surgeons at The Private Clinic will be more than happy to show you a selection of before and after photos of the procedure you are considering at your consultation. We do also have a breast augmentation before and after photo gallery for you to view on our website by clicking here.

  • Thread & Spider Veins

  • What do the treatments involve?

    At The Private Clinic, we offer some of the best vein treatments available including; Sclerotherapy: Sclerotherapy treatment involves using a small thin needle to inject the veins with a solution called ‘sclerosing agent’ which causes them to collapse and fade, improving the appearance as well as the associated symptoms. The full benefit can take up to 12 weeks to be seen. After that you will find that the veins often continue to improve for up to a year after the treatment. Depending on the number of thread veins on the legs, several sessions may be needed to get the required results, but usually three to five will be enough. CoolGlide: The CoolGlide Laser thread vein treatment can be used, especially in the case of smaller spider veins where a needle would not be appropriate. Laser spider vein removal treatment involves directing intense light directly at the veins. This causes the blood within them to coagulate and the blood is then diverted to veins deeper below the surface of the skin where it should be.

  • How long will the results last?

    Once the veins have been removed, they are gone. However, clients should bear in mind that this does not mean new ones won’t develop. Hormonal changes, pregnancy, weight gain and occupations that involve long periods on your feet can all be contributing factors.

  • How much does Thread & Spider Veins cost?

    Thread vein removal costs for Legs

    • Cutera CoolGlide laser thread veins treatment: From £400
    • Sclerotherapy/Microsclerotherapy: from £250
    If your thread veins are more serious you might be deemed unsuitable for thread vein removal by liquid sclerotherapy  or cutera coolglide and instead referred to a Vascular surgeon for varicose vein treatment. Our vascular surgeons can perform:
    • Foam Sclerotherapy: from £400
    • EVLA: from £2350
    • VenaSeal: from £2960
    • Phlebectomy: from £997
    If you are having a consultation with a vascular surgeon this will cost £150 but this include a free ultrasound scan of your legs (usually priced between £350 and £450 at most clinics and private hospitals). Find out more about Varicose Vein treatment. Thread vein removal costs for facial veins Facial thread vein treatment with IPL: From £200 Facial thread vein treatment Cutera CoolGlide / ND YAG: From £200 Find out more about facial thread vein treatment. Thread vein removal costs for under eye veins Under eye thread vein treatment Cutera CoolGlide / ND YAG: From £450 Find out more about under eye thread vein treatment.

  • What is the difference between spider veins and varicose veins?

    Spider veins and varicose veins are not the same and treatments for both will be different. Spider veins or thread veins are small veins that are blue or red in colour. They appear just beneath the surface of the skin often in a web-like pattern or as singular lines. Varicose veins often have a twisted cord-like appearance and although they sit deeper than thread veins, they often cause the skin to raise where they appear. Varicose veins can be flesh-coloured or blue and often cause pain and cramping in the legs To find out more about varicose veins click here. If you are unsure of which type of vein you have and what treatment would be suitable, make an appointment with one of our specalised vascular surgeons here.

  • Is there a thread vein treatment clinic near me?

    The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an thread vein treatment clinic located near to you although treatment options will vary from clinic to clinic. Our clinics are in;

    • London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ
    • Manchester –  25 St John Street, M3 4DT
    • Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands
    • Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire
    • Buckinghamshire – Stokenchurch Medical Center Oxford Road, HP14 3SX – South East England
    • Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton
    • Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands
    To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here.

  • What causes broken blood vessels

    There are a number of reasons why a broken blood vessel may occur. This could be due to; Genetics – If broken blood vessels or thread veins are common in your family then you are going to be more prone to developing them too. Age – As we become older, we come more at risk at developing broken blood vessels or thread veins as the collagen and elastin in the skin breaks down which causes the skin to become thinner and veins to become more noticeable. Trauma – Injury or trauma to the skin can cause broken blood vessels to develop. Medical Conditions – Certain medical conditions such as rosacea and liver disease can make you more likely to develop broken blood vessels. Hormones – Hormonal changes such as puberty, menopause and pregnancy can cause spider veins to develop as body tries to adapt which is why women are often more susceptible to developing broken capillaries than men.

  • Can certain lifestyle factors and your genes make you more susceptible to visible veins (varicose and thread) on certain parts of the body?

    One of the inherited risk factors for varicose veins is a positive family history of varicose veins. Occupations that involve lots of standing are also a risk factor for developing varicose veins. Being pregnant and having a high BMI can also exacerbate varicose veins. Thread veins can be idiopathic or secondary to hormonal changes. Thread veins on legs may be associated with venous reflux or varicose veins. Sun worshipers may notice that they also develop spider veins because of damage to the collagen.

  • What causes thread veins on the face?

    Facial spider veins or broken capillaries are commonly caused by genetics, They can also be caused by hormone changes, sun exposure and injuries to the area. For example if you have a cold, the pressure of blowing your nose can cause an injury and that can result in the vein bursting resulting into spider veins. To find out more about what may be causing your veins click here to make an appointment to see one of our specialists. Best treatment for facial veins is our Cutera CoolGlide or Intense Pulse Light (IPL) treatments. Both are minimally invasive and don’t require a huge downtime.

  • Is there anything you can do to prevent thread veins on the face?

    In some cases, thread veins are unavoidable especially if you are genetically prone to them. For others, we would recommend to wear SPF50 daily and try to stay out of the sun. Try to also avoid too much pressure on the face, hard blowing of the nose, leaning and pressure to the cheeks. Best treatment for thread veins on the face is our Cutera CoolGlide or Intense Pulse Light (IPL) treatments. Both are minimally invasive and don’t require a huge downtime.

  • What causes thread veins to appear around the ankles?

    Thread veins around the ankle are most often associated with venous reflux which is a condition where the flow of blood through the veins is blocked. To find out more information about what may be causing your thread veins click here to make a consultation to visit one of our vascular specialists.

  • Varicose Veins General Procedure

  • What are Varicose Veins?

    Varicose Veins commonly present themselves as lumpy / bulging veins found on the surface of the legs, although they can be present in other areas such as around the ankle and foot.  Varicose veins may also be dark purple or blue in colour. If you have varicose veins you may experience an itchy sensation around the site of the veins, pain after sitting or standing for extended periods of time, consistent aching feeling in the leg and burning, swelling or muscle cramping in the lower legs. At The Private Clinic we have performed over 7,000 vein procedures and offer the Gold Standard for treatment of Varicose Veins; EVLA. To find out more or book a consultation with our specialist vascular surgeons click here.

  • What Varicose Vein Treatments do you offer?

    EVLA (Endovenous Laser Ablation) EVLA is a minimally invasive and highly effective varicose vein treatment, and is considered by the National Institute for Clinical Excellence to be the best method for vein removal. It eliminates the reflux from the faulty valve creating the varicose vein and addresses the cause of the problem, rather than just the symptoms. During your procedure, an ultrasound scan will mark the position of the vein before local anaesthetic is injected around the area and a fine catheter is inserted through a small incision, usually near the knee. Laser energy is delivered through the probe in short pulses to seal the faulty valve so blood cannot flow through and the vein walls collapse. The leg is then bandaged to reduce swelling and bruising, and to aid recovery. Sclerotherapy (liquid or foam) For very small veins the issue can be addressed by sclerotherapy.  The treatment involves injecting a saline solution into your varicose vein which damages it and causes it to close. Liquid sclerotherapy is often used to treat smaller varicose veins and spider veins. For larger veins, foam sclerotherapy is sometimes used. You may have thread veins (or spider veins) which are characterised by fine dilated marks that appear under the skin – they may look like a web of very thin red or blue lines and can cause aching and itching. These can be removed through microsclerotherapy which is similar to foam sclerotherapy, but on a much smaller scale. The procedures take less than 30 minutes and are done under local anaesthesia meaning you will not feel any pain during treatment. Simply call us to book a consultation and you will be on your way to vein free legs. VenaSeal VenaSeal is a minimally invasive, pain free procedure that uses a form of medical  adhesive glue to close varicose veins. The procedure is performed under local anaesthetic and has a quick recovery time and you are not required to wear compression stockings after treatment. VenaSeal is a great option for those who have a phobia of needles or are just looking for a quick recovery time. Call us today to arrange a consultation with one of our experienced vascular surgeons to help you decide on the best treatment option for you. Phlebectomy  Phlebectomy is a method of removing varicose veins and spider veins on the surface of the legs. The name comes from the Greek terms “phleb” which means vein, and “ectomy” which means removal. The procedure is performed under local anaesthesia and involves making tiny punctures or incisions through which the varicose veins are removed. The incisions are so small that no stitches are required and recovery is speedy. During your consultation at The Private Clinic, your vascular surgeon will explain your options to you and help you decide which treatment is best for you. As per NICE guidelines, we do not offer vein stripping, which requires a lengthy recovery period and does not yield as effective results. Click here to book a consultation with our experienced vascular surgeons who will be able to advise on the best treatment for you.

  • What is the difference between EVLA and EVLT?

    VLA stands for EndoVenous Laser Ablation. It is any varicose vein treatment that uses laser heat energy to target and break down varicose veins. EVLT stands for EndoVenous Laser Treatment or EndoVenous Laser Therapy.  Back in 2000, it was a new and effective treatment that used heat from the laser to break down the varicose vein. Subsequently as the treatment’s popularity rocketed and others wanted to offer the effective treatment: so EVLA became a popular general term to describe laser ablation treatments like EVLT. EVLA simply means a collection of treatments using varying wavelengths of lasers (including 940 nm, 1064 nm and 1320 nm) and equipment but with a similar method and result. Today, well over 10 years after EVLT’s introduction, there are many EVLA procedures available, including EVLT. To discuss the wavelength and equipment used in our EVLA procedure please make a consultation with one of our specialised vascular surgeons who will be able to provide you with all the information you need to make an informed decision about your varicose vein treatment.

  • How much does Varicose Veins cost?

    A consultation with our expert Consultant Vascular Surgeons are the best place to  determine the most appropriate treatment for you costs £150, which includes a free ultrasound scan of your legs (this is usually priced between £350 and £450 at most clinics and private hospitals). Our varicose vein removal treatment prices are very competitive, you will be given an accurate quote following your consultation.

    Treatment Cost
    Phlebectomy Consultation: £150 Ultrasound Scan: £0 1 Leg: £997 2 Legs: £1,350 Compression Stockings: £0 Follow up appointments: £0
    Foam Sclerotherapy Consultation: £150 Ultrasound Scan: £0 Treatment: From £400 Compression Stockings: £0 Follow up appointments: £0
    Endovenous Laser Ablation (EVLA) Consultation: £150 Ultrasound Scan: £0 Treatment: From £2,260 Compression Stockings: £0 Follow up appointments: £0
    Venaseal Consultation: £150 Ultrasound Scan: £0 Treatment: From £2,960 Compression Stockings: £0 Follow up appointments: £0
    Follow up consultation cost At The Private Clinic, we do not charge for any follow-up consultations, this is always included in our price. You can come back as many times as you feel is necessary. How to research a Varicose Vein Clinic When you are researching your Varicose Vein clinic always ask about a multiple varicose vein removal price.  Many Varicose vein clinics try to quote a cheap varicose vein price by listing a price for one vein only as a starting price.  This is in our opinion is false selling. Our Consultant Vascular surgeons often treat multiple veins that cause the underlying problems. To have a thorough consultation with one of our expert Varicose Vein Consultant Vascular surgeons click here. Why The Private Clinic is the best place to have vein treatment:
    • We have carried out over 7,000 vein treatments, we have the reputation and experience to ensure you are in safe hands.
    • We have highly specialised Vascular surgeons.
    • We treat in our state of the art clinics located in our clinics (London Harley Street, Birmingham, Bristol, Manchester, Leeds, Glasgow and Bournemouth)
    • You do not need to travel to a big hospital.
    • Aftercare is paramount to us and you will be provided with detailed instructions following your procedure.
    • 24-hour patient helpline to ensure you are always in the best of hands.
    • As many post-operative care and appointments with your surgeon and nursing team as required.
    • Your consultation with the specialist Vascular surgeon includes a free ultrasound scan normally priced at £350-£450 at other clinics.
    • Word of mouth is high with 95% recommending us to their friends and family.
    • Check out our before and after photos and see the results for yourself.
    We offer 0% (interest free) APR loans for varicose vein treatments.

  • How do Varicose Veins develop?

    The role of veins is to carry blood towards the heart. In order to do this the blood has to flow upwards against gravity, so it is helped along by a series of muscle contractions and one-way valves. If the valves become weak or break, they do not close properly and the blood flows back to the legs where, over a period of time, the veins will start to bulge. These damaged veins serve no purpose meaning it is perfectly safe to remove them. Around one in five people will develop varicose veins as they get older, and women are affected more than men. Risk factors include age, gender and being overweight, but genetics are the biggest cause. Although most people seek treatment for cosmetic reasons, varicose veins can also cause aching, itchiness, a feeling of heaviness in the leg, and night cramps. Varicose veins do not tend to get better and can actually worsen with time if not treated. At The Private Clinic we recommend you talk to one of our highly experienced vascular surgeons who can put your mind at ease and discuss the options available to you. We offer a range of treatments and payment plans to help you. Click here to contact us and find out more about our varicose vein treatments.

  • Where do Varicose Veins appear?

    Varicose veins most commonly appear on the legs and thighs but they can also show up in the scrotum, pelvis and vulva. At The Private Clinic we are able to offer specialised vein treatments which includes Pelvic Vein Embolisation (PVE) for Pelvic Congestion and Varicose vein removal in the Scrotum. To find out more about our varicose vein treatments for all areas click here to book a consultation with our experienced vascular surgeons.

  • Are Varicose Veins serious?

    Varicose veins are not only an unsightly nuisance but they are also potential health hazards putting you at risk of blood clots, ulcers, swelling, hyperpigmentation and venous disease. Patients suffering with varicose veins report symptoms such as pain and discomfort in the legs, itchiness, fatigue and swelling of the skin. These symptoms can get worse with untreated varicose veins and if you are not currently experiencing symptoms then these are likely to develop over time. If you are concerned about your varicose veins then click here to book a consultation with our experienced vascular surgeons who will be able to advise on the best course of treatment for you.

  • Could my varicose veins be caused by underlying health issues?

    It is unlikely that an underlying health problem has caused varicose veins. The only thing to be cautious about would be if your varicose veins are clotting. If you find your veins clotting then it would definitely be recommended that you visit your GP before receiving treatment to rule out any underlying health issues that could be causing the clotting. At The Private Clinic, we offer a free ultrasound scan at your varicose vein consultation which will help your vascular surgeon to see if there are any underlying issues that need to be dealt with before your start treatment. To find out more about our varicose vein treatments and to see if you are suitable for varicose vein removal procedures click here to book a consultation with one of our experienced vascular surgeons.

  • How can I stop the formation of Varicose Veins?

    Unfortunately there is no guaranteed way to avoid varicose veins. They are often a genetic issue so if members of your family have them then it is likely that you will too. Exercise is always a great way to not only control your weight but it keeps your leg muscles active and fit. If you are prone to varicose veins then try low-impact activities like cycling and swimming. We also recommend wearing flat shoes over high heels as this will allow for your calf muscles to contract fully. If you find that your legs are aching then try wearing compression stockings as much as possible as these can help prevent the blood from pooling. Our experienced vascular surgeons have carried out over 7,000 treatments and are available to offer their advice on all things to do with varicose veins. To book a consultation with one of our surgeons click here.

  • What is an ultrasound scan?

    Ultrasound scanning is widely used in the medical setting and is most commonly used during pregnancy to see the foetus, but an ultrasound scan is a very important step to ensuring that you receive the correct treatment for your varicose veins.  When you come in for your consultation you will receive a free Duplex Ultrasound scan. A duplex ultrasound scan varies slightly to a traditional ultrasound scan where only a greyscale picture is seen, the duplex ultrasound scan adds a secondary layer to the picture allowing your surgeon to not only see the location of your veins but the way in which the blood is flowing within them.

  • Varicose Veins After Procedure

  • How soon will I see the results?

    You should be able to see a difference straight away after most varicose vein treatments but as you are required to wear the compression stocking for at least a week afterwards your leg will not be visible. When you take off the stocking you will notice a big difference in the appearance of your treated leg, there will be some bruising but the visible varicose veins should have disappeared. We advise that usually you will be able to see the final results of your treatment 6 weeks post procedure. VenaSeal does not require a compression stocking so you may be able to see the results of the treatment much quicker. Click here to book a consultation with our vascular surgeons and find out more about the treatments we offer for varicose veins.

  • Can Varicose Veins return after treatment?

    At The Private Clinic we believe the best results are seen after EVLA treatment where there is less than 10% of a chance of the veins coming back this is because the EVLA method is very comprehensive at sealing the vein. Although it is unlikely for the same vein to appear again after treatment, you may find that new veins appear and sometimes even normal looking veins you have had for years can develop into varicose veins so it is best to keep a close eye on them. We average that there is a 1% chance of new veins developing for each year after treatment. To find out more about our range of varicose vein removal treatments click here to book a consultation with one of our experienced vascular surgeons.

  • What happens to the blood flow in my legs after the varicose veins have been removed?

    There are two types of veins within your leg, superficial veins and deep veins. Deep veins are the ones that carry the vast amount of your blood back to your heart compared to your superficial veins. Varicose veins will only occur in your superficial veins so when they are removed, the blood flow will just return back to your deep veins which will improve your circulation and blood flow. To speak to one of our vascular surgeons about how our varicose vein treatments work, click here to book a consultation.

  • When will I be able to resume normal activities after treatment?

    Varicose vein treatments at The Private Clinic are all walk-in, walk-out procedures with the majority of patients being able to return to everyday activities straight away. We do advise that strenuous exercise is avoided for at least 5 days and it should be returned to at a gradual pace. This is to avoid unnecessary injury but it is recommended that you do keep active by taking regular walks. The best way to get information about downtime after varicose vein removal surgery is to book a consultation with one of our experienced vascular surgeons who will be able to answer all of your questions.

  • Will I be able to drive myself home after treatment?

    We do not recommend that you drive yourself home after varicose vein treatment at The Private Clinic. Your legs will be bandaged and you will be wearing a compression stocking which although it shouldn’t interfere with your ability to walk, it may interfere with your ability to drive safely and do an emergency stop for example. The day after your treatment you will be able to remove the bandage but you will carry on wearing the stocking, if you feel comfortable and you know that you are in control of your car you may wish to drive but more importantly you should always check with your motor insurance to make sure that they are happy to cover you in these circumstances. The Private Clinic have carried out over 7,000 varicose vein treatments. To discuss all of the options best for you click here to book a consultation with one of our Vascular surgeons at a clinic close to you.

  • How long will I need to wear compression stockings for?

    We advise that after varicose vein treatments at The Private Clinic you should be wearing a compression stocking for two weeks. This should not get in the way of your daily life too much and you will be able to remove it for showers etc. You may not be required to wear a compression stocking after VenaSeal treatment although some surgeons may still advise if for the first couple of days post-procedure. Over 7,000 varicose vein procedures have been performed at The Private Clinic. Click here to book a consultation with one of our highly experienced vascular surgeons.

  • Do I need to take time off work after treatment?

    Provided you have non strenuous job, we recommend that patients can go back to work the day after EVLA, VenaSeal and Foam Sclerotherapy treatments. If you have had a phlebectomy you may wish to wait 2-3 days before returning. At The Private Clinic we have performed over 7,000 vein procedures and offer the Gold Standard for treatment of Varicose Veins; EVLA. To find out more or book a consultation with our specialist vascular surgeons click here.

  • Will I be able to fly immediately after my treatment?

    In the majority of cases, we recommend that you do not travel on a plane for at least 3 weeks after your varicose vein removal procedure. After having treatment, you are at an increased risk of developing DVT (Deep vein thrombosis) and travelling on long haul flights over 3 hours can increase the risk further. Your consultant will be able to advise you on this at your consultation. It will depend on the severity of the veins removed, the treatment method and the length of the flight.

  • Can I breastfeed after treatment?

    We do not advise that you breastfeed after having a varicose vein procedure. EVLA is not reported to have any effect on breastfeeding however the treatment drugs used in other procedures such as sclerotherapy do have the possibility of contaminating the breast milk. We advise patients to wait until they have stopped breast feeding before going ahead with vein removal treatment. Click here to find out more about our varicose vein treatments and to book a consultation.

  • Is there a chance of staining post procedure?

    There is a 10% risk of staining after Foam Sclerotherapy treatment and although in most cases the staining does fade over a few months, we are unable to guarantee this. Click here to find out more about our varicose vein treatments and to book a consultation.

  • Varicose Veins

  • What are Varicose Veins?

    Varicose Veins commonly present themselves as lumpy / bulging veins found on the surface of the legs, although they can be present in other areas such as around the ankle and foot.  Varicose veins may also be dark purple or blue in colour. If you have varicose veins you may experience an itchy sensation around the site of the veins, pain after sitting or standing for extended periods of time, consistent aching feeling in the leg and burning, swelling or muscle cramping in the lower legs. At The Private Clinic we have performed over 7,000 vein procedures and offer the Gold Standard for treatment of Varicose Veins; EVLA. To find out more or book a consultation with our specialist vascular surgeons click here.

  • What Varicose Vein Treatments do you offer?

    EVLA (Endovenous Laser Ablation) EVLA is a minimally invasive and highly effective varicose vein treatment, and is considered by the National Institute for Clinical Excellence to be the best method for vein removal. It eliminates the reflux from the faulty valve creating the varicose vein and addresses the cause of the problem, rather than just the symptoms. During your procedure, an ultrasound scan will mark the position of the vein before local anaesthetic is injected around the area and a fine catheter is inserted through a small incision, usually near the knee. Laser energy is delivered through the probe in short pulses to seal the faulty valve so blood cannot flow through and the vein walls collapse. The leg is then bandaged to reduce swelling and bruising, and to aid recovery. Sclerotherapy (liquid or foam) For very small veins the issue can be addressed by sclerotherapy.  The treatment involves injecting a saline solution into your varicose vein which damages it and causes it to close. Liquid sclerotherapy is often used to treat smaller varicose veins and spider veins. For larger veins, foam sclerotherapy is sometimes used. You may have thread veins (or spider veins) which are characterised by fine dilated marks that appear under the skin – they may look like a web of very thin red or blue lines and can cause aching and itching. These can be removed through microsclerotherapy which is similar to foam sclerotherapy, but on a much smaller scale. The procedures take less than 30 minutes and are done under local anaesthesia meaning you will not feel any pain during treatment. Simply call us to book a consultation and you will be on your way to vein free legs. VenaSeal VenaSeal is a minimally invasive, pain free procedure that uses a form of medical  adhesive glue to close varicose veins. The procedure is performed under local anaesthetic and has a quick recovery time and you are not required to wear compression stockings after treatment. VenaSeal is a great option for those who have a phobia of needles or are just looking for a quick recovery time. Call us today to arrange a consultation with one of our experienced vascular surgeons to help you decide on the best treatment option for you. Phlebectomy  Phlebectomy is a method of removing varicose veins and spider veins on the surface of the legs. The name comes from the Greek terms “phleb” which means vein, and “ectomy” which means removal. The procedure is performed under local anaesthesia and involves making tiny punctures or incisions through which the varicose veins are removed. The incisions are so small that no stitches are required and recovery is speedy. During your consultation at The Private Clinic, your vascular surgeon will explain your options to you and help you decide which treatment is best for you. As per NICE guidelines, we do not offer vein stripping, which requires a lengthy recovery period and does not yield as effective results. Click here to book a consultation with our experienced vascular surgeons who will be able to advise on the best treatment for you.

  • How soon will I see the results?

    You should be able to see a difference straight away after most varicose vein treatments but as you are required to wear the compression stocking for at least a week afterwards your leg will not be visible. When you take off the stocking you will notice a big difference in the appearance of your treated leg, there will be some bruising but the visible varicose veins should have disappeared. We advise that usually you will be able to see the final results of your treatment 6 weeks post procedure. VenaSeal does not require a compression stocking so you may be able to see the results of the treatment much quicker. Click here to book a consultation with our vascular surgeons and find out more about the treatments we offer for varicose veins.

  • What is the difference between EVLA and EVLT?

    VLA stands for EndoVenous Laser Ablation. It is any varicose vein treatment that uses laser heat energy to target and break down varicose veins. EVLT stands for EndoVenous Laser Treatment or EndoVenous Laser Therapy.  Back in 2000, it was a new and effective treatment that used heat from the laser to break down the varicose vein. Subsequently as the treatment’s popularity rocketed and others wanted to offer the effective treatment: so EVLA became a popular general term to describe laser ablation treatments like EVLT. EVLA simply means a collection of treatments using varying wavelengths of lasers (including 940 nm, 1064 nm and 1320 nm) and equipment but with a similar method and result. Today, well over 10 years after EVLT’s introduction, there are many EVLA procedures available, including EVLT. To discuss the wavelength and equipment used in our EVLA procedure please make a consultation with one of our specialised vascular surgeons who will be able to provide you with all the information you need to make an informed decision about your varicose vein treatment.

  • How much does Varicose Veins cost?

    A consultation with our expert Consultant Vascular Surgeons are the best place to  determine the most appropriate treatment for you costs £150, which includes a free ultrasound scan of your legs (this is usually priced between £350 and £450 at most clinics and private hospitals). Our varicose vein removal treatment prices are very competitive, you will be given an accurate quote following your consultation.

    Treatment Cost
    Phlebectomy Consultation: £150 Ultrasound Scan: £0 1 Leg: £997 2 Legs: £1,350 Compression Stockings: £0 Follow up appointments: £0
    Foam Sclerotherapy Consultation: £150 Ultrasound Scan: £0 Treatment: From £400 Compression Stockings: £0 Follow up appointments: £0
    Endovenous Laser Ablation (EVLA) Consultation: £150 Ultrasound Scan: £0 Treatment: From £2,260 Compression Stockings: £0 Follow up appointments: £0
    Venaseal Consultation: £150 Ultrasound Scan: £0 Treatment: From £2,960 Compression Stockings: £0 Follow up appointments: £0
    Follow up consultation cost At The Private Clinic, we do not charge for any follow-up consultations, this is always included in our price. You can come back as many times as you feel is necessary. How to research a Varicose Vein Clinic When you are researching your Varicose Vein clinic always ask about a multiple varicose vein removal price.  Many Varicose vein clinics try to quote a cheap varicose vein price by listing a price for one vein only as a starting price.  This is in our opinion is false selling. Our Consultant Vascular surgeons often treat multiple veins that cause the underlying problems. To have a thorough consultation with one of our expert Varicose Vein Consultant Vascular surgeons click here. Why The Private Clinic is the best place to have vein treatment:
    • We have carried out over 7,000 vein treatments, we have the reputation and experience to ensure you are in safe hands.
    • We have highly specialised Vascular surgeons.
    • We treat in our state of the art clinics located in our clinics (London Harley Street, Birmingham, Bristol, Manchester, Leeds, Glasgow and Bournemouth)
    • You do not need to travel to a big hospital.
    • Aftercare is paramount to us and you will be provided with detailed instructions following your procedure.
    • 24-hour patient helpline to ensure you are always in the best of hands.
    • As many post-operative care and appointments with your surgeon and nursing team as required.
    • Your consultation with the specialist Vascular surgeon includes a free ultrasound scan normally priced at £350-£450 at other clinics.
    • Word of mouth is high with 95% recommending us to their friends and family.
    • Check out our before and after photos and see the results for yourself.
    We offer 0% (interest free) APR loans for varicose vein treatments.

  • How do Varicose Veins develop?

    The role of veins is to carry blood towards the heart. In order to do this the blood has to flow upwards against gravity, so it is helped along by a series of muscle contractions and one-way valves. If the valves become weak or break, they do not close properly and the blood flows back to the legs where, over a period of time, the veins will start to bulge. These damaged veins serve no purpose meaning it is perfectly safe to remove them. Around one in five people will develop varicose veins as they get older, and women are affected more than men. Risk factors include age, gender and being overweight, but genetics are the biggest cause. Although most people seek treatment for cosmetic reasons, varicose veins can also cause aching, itchiness, a feeling of heaviness in the leg, and night cramps. Varicose veins do not tend to get better and can actually worsen with time if not treated. At The Private Clinic we recommend you talk to one of our highly experienced vascular surgeons who can put your mind at ease and discuss the options available to you. We offer a range of treatments and payment plans to help you. Click here to contact us and find out more about our varicose vein treatments.

  • Where do Varicose Veins appear?

    Varicose veins most commonly appear on the legs and thighs but they can also show up in the scrotum, pelvis and vulva. At The Private Clinic we are able to offer specialised vein treatments which includes Pelvic Vein Embolisation (PVE) for Pelvic Congestion and Varicose vein removal in the Scrotum. To find out more about our varicose vein treatments for all areas click here to book a consultation with our experienced vascular surgeons.

  • Are Varicose Veins serious?

    Varicose veins are not only an unsightly nuisance but they are also potential health hazards putting you at risk of blood clots, ulcers, swelling, hyperpigmentation and venous disease. Patients suffering with varicose veins report symptoms such as pain and discomfort in the legs, itchiness, fatigue and swelling of the skin. These symptoms can get worse with untreated varicose veins and if you are not currently experiencing symptoms then these are likely to develop over time. If you are concerned about your varicose veins then click here to book a consultation with our experienced vascular surgeons who will be able to advise on the best course of treatment for you.

  • When is the best time to treat Varicose Veins?

    We perform varicose vein treatment all year round at The Private Clinic. We find that some patients choose to treat their varicose veins during the Autumn or Winter months as it leaves them with plenty of time to recover before the summer. However we have many treatment options to suit your lifestyle, the best option is to come and talk to one of our experienced vascular surgeons who will put your mind at ease. Contact us today to schedule in your consultation with one of experienced vascular surgeons who will be able to talk you through the recovery time required post treatment.

  • Could my varicose veins be caused by underlying health issues?

    It is unlikely that an underlying health problem has caused varicose veins. The only thing to be cautious about would be if your varicose veins are clotting. If you find your veins clotting then it would definitely be recommended that you visit your GP before receiving treatment to rule out any underlying health issues that could be causing the clotting. At The Private Clinic, we offer a free ultrasound scan at your varicose vein consultation which will help your vascular surgeon to see if there are any underlying issues that need to be dealt with before your start treatment. To find out more about our varicose vein treatments and to see if you are suitable for varicose vein removal procedures click here to book a consultation with one of our experienced vascular surgeons.

  • Varicose Veins Before Procedure

  • Am I too old for Varicose Vein treatment?

    There is no age limit for Varicose Vein treatment, we will treat anyone who is over the age of 18 and is healthy. We have patients from a mix of ages and all have found the treatment to be almost life changing and many wonder why they waited so long. As long as you are able to wear the compression stocking as advised by your surgeon and walk daily as directed then you will be a suitable candidate for varicose vein treatment at The Private Clinic. The best option is to come and talk with our specialist vascular surgeons who will advise you on the best options to treat your varicose veins click here to book a consultation.

  • What will happen during my consultation?

    All varicose vein consultations at The Private Clinic are surgeon-led and include a free ultrasound scan worth over £350. This ensures that your varicose veins are examined with the utmost accuracy and your treatment is tailored to you. During your consultation, your surgeon will discuss with you exactly what the problem is, where it originates and what treatments are suitable. You will be given a detailed treatment plan with full cost and pricing details so there will be no surprises when it comes to payment. Your personal Patient Coordinator will also attend the consultation with you to ensure all your questions are answered and you are fully informed on the procedure. They will be on hand following the consultation to help you with anything you might need, and will answer any further questions you may have. Having attended your consultation, they will know your case and requirements and will always be there to guide you throughout your treatment. Click here to book a consultation with one of our highly experienced vascular surgeons.

  • Who will perform my ultrasound scan?

    All of our vascular surgeons at The Private Clinic are highly skilled and trained in performing ultrasound scanning and you can be sure that you will receive a correct diagnosis leading to the most suitable treatment for your varicose veins. Click here to book a consultation with our highly experienced vascular surgeons and receive your free ultrasound scan.

  • Is it possible to receive treatment on the same day as my consultation?

    At The Private Clinic we like our patients to come in for a consultation first to not only find out more about the treatment but it also allows our specialist vascular surgeons to assess you and decide which treatment is going to be best for you. At this stage you will be able to go away and have a think about it and do any additional research before deciding to go ahead with treatment. We do understand however that some patients do travel a long distance so in certain cases we can look to organise treatment on the same day but this may require a consultation via skype or over the phone. Click here to find out more information about varicose vein treatment.

  • Can all of my veins be treated in one sitting?

    There is no limit on the amount of veins that can be treated on the same day; however there is a limit on the amount of local anaesthetic that can be safely used in one sitting. We also have patients who prefer to only treat one leg at a time to reduce their downtime. You will be advised of the best procedure plan at your consultation. To book a consultation click here. Why would you choose EVLA over cheaper alternatives? Foam sclerotherapy although an option for Varicose Veins it is not always effective as laser treatment and therefore would only be suitable as a primary treatment for a small amount of our patients. A full consultation would be needed in order to determine if you would be suitable for just foam sclerotherapy over EVLA treatment. We would always usually favour EVLA treatment here at The Private Clinic due to the success rates of alternative treatments being low in comparison to laser treatment. You can also discuss the new VenaSeal procedure which might suit your lifestyle. To book a consultation with a vascular surgeon click here.

  • Do Varicose Vein treatments hurt?

    EVLA, Sclerotherapy, VenaSeal and Phlebectomy procedures are carried out under local anaesthetic so you won’t feel discomfort during the procedure. Some patients may experience a little discomfort afterwards but it’s minimal. To find out more about our varicose vein removal treatments click here to book a consultation with one of our experienced vascular surgeons.

  • How long does the procedure take?

    At The Private Clinic we pride ourselves on our professional outcomes for treating varicose veins and thread/spider veins. Generally EVLA takes approximately 45 minutes. Sclerotherapy can take less than 30 minutes. VenaSeal can take between 30-60 minutes and Phlebectomy procedures take between 30 minutes to an hour. We have carried out over 7,000 varicose vein treatments at The Private Clinic. To book a consultation with a Vascular surgeon to discuss all of the options best for you click here.

  • What are the common side effects of Varicose Veins treatments?

    As with every medical treatment or procedure, there are always certain risks or side effects which patients should be aware of when undergoing varicose vein treatment. Common side effects from EVLA and Foam Sclerotherapy include swelling and bruising however this should reduce over the following weeks. Common side effects from VenaSeal treatment includes mild pain in the treatment area, inflammation and skin numbness which again should only last up to 2 weeks. Our experienced vascular surgeon will go through all the risks with you in detail at your consultation so you will be able to feel well informed before deciding to go ahead with your varicose vein procedure at The Private Clinic. Click here to book a consultation.

  • What does a free varicose vein consultation mean?

    We offer free varicose vein phone or video consultations with our experienced patient coordinators. Our patient coordinators can provide you with information about our range of varicose vein treatment options and recommend the best vascular surgeon to suit your requirements. To secure your timed consultation slot, we will ask you to pay a £25 deposit which is refunded once the consultation takes place. You will be able to change your appointment time up to 48 hours before. Contact us to book a free varicose vein phone or video consultation. 

  • Thread & Spider Veins General Procedure

  • What do the treatments involve?

    At The Private Clinic, we offer some of the best vein treatments available including; Sclerotherapy: Sclerotherapy treatment involves using a small thin needle to inject the veins with a solution called ‘sclerosing agent’ which causes them to collapse and fade, improving the appearance as well as the associated symptoms. The full benefit can take up to 12 weeks to be seen. After that you will find that the veins often continue to improve for up to a year after the treatment. Depending on the number of thread veins on the legs, several sessions may be needed to get the required results, but usually three to five will be enough. CoolGlide: The CoolGlide Laser thread vein treatment can be used, especially in the case of smaller spider veins where a needle would not be appropriate. Laser spider vein removal treatment involves directing intense light directly at the veins. This causes the blood within them to coagulate and the blood is then diverted to veins deeper below the surface of the skin where it should be.

  • How much does Thread & Spider Veins cost?

    Thread vein removal costs for Legs

    • Cutera CoolGlide laser thread veins treatment: From £400
    • Sclerotherapy/Microsclerotherapy: from £250
    If your thread veins are more serious you might be deemed unsuitable for thread vein removal by liquid sclerotherapy  or cutera coolglide and instead referred to a Vascular surgeon for varicose vein treatment. Our vascular surgeons can perform:
    • Foam Sclerotherapy: from £400
    • EVLA: from £2350
    • VenaSeal: from £2960
    • Phlebectomy: from £997
    If you are having a consultation with a vascular surgeon this will cost £150 but this include a free ultrasound scan of your legs (usually priced between £350 and £450 at most clinics and private hospitals). Find out more about Varicose Vein treatment. Thread vein removal costs for facial veins Facial thread vein treatment with IPL: From £200 Facial thread vein treatment Cutera CoolGlide / ND YAG: From £200 Find out more about facial thread vein treatment. Thread vein removal costs for under eye veins Under eye thread vein treatment Cutera CoolGlide / ND YAG: From £450 Find out more about under eye thread vein treatment.

  • What is the difference between spider veins and varicose veins?

    Spider veins and varicose veins are not the same and treatments for both will be different. Spider veins or thread veins are small veins that are blue or red in colour. They appear just beneath the surface of the skin often in a web-like pattern or as singular lines. Varicose veins often have a twisted cord-like appearance and although they sit deeper than thread veins, they often cause the skin to raise where they appear. Varicose veins can be flesh-coloured or blue and often cause pain and cramping in the legs To find out more about varicose veins click here. If you are unsure of which type of vein you have and what treatment would be suitable, make an appointment with one of our specalised vascular surgeons here.

  • Is there a thread vein treatment clinic near me?

    The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an thread vein treatment clinic located near to you although treatment options will vary from clinic to clinic. Our clinics are in;

    • London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ
    • Manchester –  25 St John Street, M3 4DT
    • Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands
    • Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire
    • Buckinghamshire – Stokenchurch Medical Center Oxford Road, HP14 3SX – South East England
    • Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton
    • Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands
    To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here.

  • What causes broken blood vessels

    There are a number of reasons why a broken blood vessel may occur. This could be due to; Genetics – If broken blood vessels or thread veins are common in your family then you are going to be more prone to developing them too. Age – As we become older, we come more at risk at developing broken blood vessels or thread veins as the collagen and elastin in the skin breaks down which causes the skin to become thinner and veins to become more noticeable. Trauma – Injury or trauma to the skin can cause broken blood vessels to develop. Medical Conditions – Certain medical conditions such as rosacea and liver disease can make you more likely to develop broken blood vessels. Hormones – Hormonal changes such as puberty, menopause and pregnancy can cause spider veins to develop as body tries to adapt which is why women are often more susceptible to developing broken capillaries than men.

  • Can certain lifestyle factors and your genes make you more susceptible to visible veins (varicose and thread) on certain parts of the body?

    One of the inherited risk factors for varicose veins is a positive family history of varicose veins. Occupations that involve lots of standing are also a risk factor for developing varicose veins. Being pregnant and having a high BMI can also exacerbate varicose veins. Thread veins can be idiopathic or secondary to hormonal changes. Thread veins on legs may be associated with venous reflux or varicose veins. Sun worshipers may notice that they also develop spider veins because of damage to the collagen.

  • What causes thread veins on the face?

    Facial spider veins or broken capillaries are commonly caused by genetics, They can also be caused by hormone changes, sun exposure and injuries to the area. For example if you have a cold, the pressure of blowing your nose can cause an injury and that can result in the vein bursting resulting into spider veins. To find out more about what may be causing your veins click here to make an appointment to see one of our specialists. Best treatment for facial veins is our Cutera CoolGlide or Intense Pulse Light (IPL) treatments. Both are minimally invasive and don’t require a huge downtime.

  • Is there anything you can do to prevent thread veins on the face?

    In some cases, thread veins are unavoidable especially if you are genetically prone to them. For others, we would recommend to wear SPF50 daily and try to stay out of the sun. Try to also avoid too much pressure on the face, hard blowing of the nose, leaning and pressure to the cheeks. Best treatment for thread veins on the face is our Cutera CoolGlide or Intense Pulse Light (IPL) treatments. Both are minimally invasive and don’t require a huge downtime.

  • What causes thread veins to appear around the ankles?

    Thread veins around the ankle are most often associated with venous reflux which is a condition where the flow of blood through the veins is blocked. To find out more information about what may be causing your thread veins click here to make a consultation to visit one of our vascular specialists.

  • How does sclerotherapy work?

    Sclerotherapy treatment uses a chemical solution known as a sclerosing agent. This is injected at a number of points that run alongside the thread vein. The sclerosing agent works to irritate the lining of the veins, which when combined with compression of the leg after treatment; causes the walls of the vein to collapse. Over time, the thread veins will then be absorbed by the body. Multiple treatments will be required to achieve the best results, but sclerotherapy can be very effective in reducing the appearance of most spider veins and some small varicose veins significantly. In most cases sclerotherapy is performed with a concentrated saline solution however other chemical solutions or special foam may be used if the vein is larger such as a varicose vein.

  • Thread & Spider Veins Before Procedure

  • Do the treatments hurt?

    Sclerotherapy is performed under local anaesthetic so you won’t feel any pain at all during the treatment. If you are having your spider veins removed with CoolGlide laser vein treatment you may feel a slight stinging sensation as the pulses of light are delivered. However, you can opt to use a topical anaesthetic before we start the treatment to minimise discomfort.

  • Are there any complications associated with the treatments?

    The majority of side effects following Cutera CoolGlide and Scelerotherapy treatments are redness and swelling in the treated areas. Most side effects will reduce over 24-48 hours. Common side effects of sclerotherapy include; bruising, stinging, swelling, skin discoloration, discomfort and raised red areas that appear around the injection sites. Common side effects of Cutera CoolGlide treatment is; redness and swelling in the treated area. More serious side effects include: allergic reaction to the sclerosing agent, ulceration of skin around the injection site, blood clot formation in the treated veins or mild inflammation that can cause discomfort around the injection site. Your practitioner or surgeon will go through all the side effects associated with treatment both before and after your procedure. Should you have any worries following your treatment, we are on-hand 24 hours to take your call.

  • Thread & Spider Veins Day of Procedure

  • How long do the treatments take?

    Sclerotherapy takes between 5 and 30 minutes depending on the number of spider veins to be treated. A course of between 3 to 5 treatments is often required to achieve the desired results. CoolGlide sessions last between 15 and 30 minutes, again depending on the area to be treated. A course of 3 treatments is recommended.

  • Thread & Spider Veins After Procedure

  • How long will the results last?

    Once the veins have been removed, they are gone. However, clients should bear in mind that this does not mean new ones won’t develop. Hormonal changes, pregnancy, weight gain and occupations that involve long periods on your feet can all be contributing factors.

  • How soon will I see the results?

    You will notice an improvement in the appearance of your spider veins after your first treatment session, however, a number of sessions may be needed before the veins are fully eliminated. The results from a sclerotherapy or Cutera CoolGlide procedure will vary depending on the extent of veins that require treatment. It is important to understand that sclerotherapy or Cutera CoolGlide treatment may not be able to remove spider veins completely and it will not prevent new enlarged veins from developing in the future. Patients should expect to see significant improvement for at least half of the veins treated and the rest may show partial improvement. Overall sclereotherapy and Cutera CoolGlide treatments are a great option to safely and effectively reduce the overall appearance of thread veins.

  • Why do I need to wear compression stockings following vein removal treatment?

    After you have had Sclerotherapy treatment for spider veins removal it is important to use compression stockings provided to promote proper healing. The compression stocking helps to prevent the veins from re-opening as well as stopping the blood from clotting within the collapsed vein. Your surgeon or practitioner will provide you with a compression stocking if required and detail the length of time you should wear it for.

  • Facial Thread Veins

  • What causes spider veins on the face?

    Spider veins or thread veins on the face are broken blood vessels that have become dilated and more noticeable. There are a number of different causes as to why facial spider / thread veins have developed which include; injury, sun damage, hormonal changes, pregnancy, topical irritants, genetics, ageing, pregnancy and excessive alcohol consumption.

  • How can I get rid of facial spider veins?

    Laser treatments are a great way to treat facial spider veins. The lasers target the blood vessels causing them to become smaller and gradually fade of the course of a week or two. The laser does not damage the surface of the skin meaning patients do not experience downtime or require time off work.  To find out more about facial spider vein treatment book a consultation to speak to one of our experts.

  • How do I prevent spider veins on my face?

    here are presentations you can take to try and avoid developing facial thread veins. These include; Regular Exercise – This helps to improve your circulation and vein strength. Avoid extreme heat – Washing your face with hot water, saunas and hot weather can increase your risk of broken blood vessels. Try to turn down the heat in your shower and limit your time in spas/saunas. Sun Protection – Protecting your skin from the sun is one of the best ways to avoid facial veins. Excess sun or heat exposure can cause broken blood vessels, be sure to use SPF protection and using a simple cold compress after heat exposure can reduce the appearance of burst blood vessels. Avoid Vasodilators – Vasodilaters encourage vessels to fill with blood which can make spider veins more noticeable. Common examples of vasodilaters are caffeine, spicy food and alcohol

  • How much does facial thread vein treatment cost?

    Facial thread vein treatment with IPL IPL Full Face – £200 IPL Course of 5 – £800 Facial thread vein treatment Cutera CoolGlide / ND YAG Small area – £200 Small area course of 3 – £500 Large area – £400 Large area course of 3 – £1,000 Prices for Facial thread vein treatment will vary if a longer or shorter session is needed. For a more accurate quote, visit us for a free consultation with one of our facial thread vein experts. Are there any risks or side effects to facial vein treatment? Facial Thread Vein treatment may leave skin looking red after the procedure, this is very normal and will not last long often resolving in 24 hours. Other rare side effects from facial vein treatment include swelling, bruising, temporary lightening or darkening of the skin and superficial blisters. These will all be temporary and tend to disappear after a few days. A full list of side effects and risk from treatments will be discussed at your initial consultation. Can sclerotherapy be used to treat large facial veins? At The Private Clinic, we do not recommend using sclerotherapy to treat facial thread veins. We instead use surface laser treatments such as IPL or the Cutera CoolGlide. We recommend seeking an expert who has experience in treating facial veins. Sclerotherapy can be used to treat thread veins on the legs and foam sclerotherapy is commonly used to treat Varicose veins. At The Private Clinic we have performed over 7,000 vein procedures. We have a team of facial thread vein experts who will be able to discuss treatment options with you in a free consultation.

  • Where can I have facial thread vein removal treatment?

    Facial thread vein removal treatment is available at our clinics located in;

    • London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ
    • Manchester – 25 St John Street, M3 4DT
    • Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands
    • Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire
    • Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton
    To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here.

  • Why do I have red veins on my face?

    Red veins on your face are usually thread or spider veins. Thread / Spider veins are broken blood vessels on the face that appear just under the surface of the skin. There are a number of reasons why these have appeared which includes; sun damage, rosacea, alcohol consumption, genetics, illness, injury, hormones and genetics. To find out more about red veins on the face visit us for a consultation with one of our facial vein experts.

  • What type of facial veins can be treated?

    Our facial vein treatments can effectively remove small facial veins such as thread veins, spider veins and telangiectasia. We use IPL or Cutera CoolGlide / ND YAG laser treatments to treat facial thread veins. To find out if you are suitable for thread vein treatment visit us for a free consultation.

  • Do spider veins on the face go away?

    Spider veins on the face are caused by broken blood vessels. Depending on what caused these broken blood vessels will determine if facial veins will go away without treatment. Usually if you notice facial veins after you have experienced an injury or have been unwell then they are likely to disappear over time. If you are prone to developing facial veins, they run in your family or you have had them for a long period of time then it is likely that you will need to seek treatment in order for them to go away. To find out if you need facial vein treatment why not book a consultation with one of our experts who will be able to give you advise on the best treatment for you.

  • Are facial thread veins dangerous?

    Generally, facial thread veins are not dangerous and in some cases they even disappear on their own. However, they can sometimes signify a more severe medical condition such as; Bloom Syndrome Ataxia Talengiectasia Spider Angioma Xeroderma Pigmentosum (XP) Osler-Weber-Rendu Syndrome / Hereditary Hemorrhagic telangiecastia (HHT) Port-wine Stain Sturge-Weber Syndrome (SWS) Liver Disease Roscaea In most cases, these conditions will have a variety of other symptoms and you should visit your GP should you believe that none of the common causes we have mentioned have resulted in the appearance of your facial thread veins. In the vast majority of cases, facial thread veins are not dangerous and patients only seek removal for cosmetic purposes. Thread vein treatment is not actively available on the NHS so you will need to seek private treatment instead.

  • How do I prepare for facial vein treatment?

    Patients will need to attend a consultation with one of our facial vein experts to determine if they are suitable for treatment. During this consultation your faical vein expert will go through your medical history and examine the areas which you wish to be treated. If suitable for treatment you will need to have a patch test before booking a treatment appointment. We also advise that patients must not be tanned which includes fake tan and that they should avoid using any exfoliators, retinols or fruit acids 5-7 days before their treatment.

  • Facial Thread Veins General Procedure

  • What causes spider veins on the face?

    Spider veins or thread veins on the face are broken blood vessels that have become dilated and more noticeable. There are a number of different causes as to why facial spider / thread veins have developed which include; injury, sun damage, hormonal changes, pregnancy, topical irritants, genetics, ageing, pregnancy and excessive alcohol consumption.

  • How can I get rid of facial spider veins?

    Laser treatments are a great way to treat facial spider veins. The lasers target the blood vessels causing them to become smaller and gradually fade of the course of a week or two. The laser does not damage the surface of the skin meaning patients do not experience downtime or require time off work.  To find out more about facial spider vein treatment book a consultation to speak to one of our experts.

  • How do I prevent spider veins on my face?

    here are presentations you can take to try and avoid developing facial thread veins. These include; Regular Exercise – This helps to improve your circulation and vein strength. Avoid extreme heat – Washing your face with hot water, saunas and hot weather can increase your risk of broken blood vessels. Try to turn down the heat in your shower and limit your time in spas/saunas. Sun Protection – Protecting your skin from the sun is one of the best ways to avoid facial veins. Excess sun or heat exposure can cause broken blood vessels, be sure to use SPF protection and using a simple cold compress after heat exposure can reduce the appearance of burst blood vessels. Avoid Vasodilators – Vasodilaters encourage vessels to fill with blood which can make spider veins more noticeable. Common examples of vasodilaters are caffeine, spicy food and alcohol

  • How much does facial thread vein treatment cost?

    Facial thread vein treatment with IPL IPL Full Face – £200 IPL Course of 5 – £800 Facial thread vein treatment Cutera CoolGlide / ND YAG Small area – £200 Small area course of 3 – £500 Large area – £400 Large area course of 3 – £1,000 Prices for Facial thread vein treatment will vary if a longer or shorter session is needed. For a more accurate quote, visit us for a free consultation with one of our facial thread vein experts. Are there any risks or side effects to facial vein treatment? Facial Thread Vein treatment may leave skin looking red after the procedure, this is very normal and will not last long often resolving in 24 hours. Other rare side effects from facial vein treatment include swelling, bruising, temporary lightening or darkening of the skin and superficial blisters. These will all be temporary and tend to disappear after a few days. A full list of side effects and risk from treatments will be discussed at your initial consultation. Can sclerotherapy be used to treat large facial veins? At The Private Clinic, we do not recommend using sclerotherapy to treat facial thread veins. We instead use surface laser treatments such as IPL or the Cutera CoolGlide. We recommend seeking an expert who has experience in treating facial veins. Sclerotherapy can be used to treat thread veins on the legs and foam sclerotherapy is commonly used to treat Varicose veins. At The Private Clinic we have performed over 7,000 vein procedures. We have a team of facial thread vein experts who will be able to discuss treatment options with you in a free consultation.

  • Where can I have facial thread vein removal treatment?

    Facial thread vein removal treatment is available at our clinics located in;

    • London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ
    • Manchester – 25 St John Street, M3 4DT
    • Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands
    • Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire
    • Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton
    To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here.

  • Why do I have red veins on my face?

    Red veins on your face are usually thread or spider veins. Thread / Spider veins are broken blood vessels on the face that appear just under the surface of the skin. There are a number of reasons why these have appeared which includes; sun damage, rosacea, alcohol consumption, genetics, illness, injury, hormones and genetics. To find out more about red veins on the face visit us for a consultation with one of our facial vein experts.

  • What type of facial veins can be treated?

    Our facial vein treatments can effectively remove small facial veins such as thread veins, spider veins and telangiectasia. We use IPL or Cutera CoolGlide / ND YAG laser treatments to treat facial thread veins. To find out if you are suitable for thread vein treatment visit us for a free consultation.

  • Do spider veins on the face go away?

    Spider veins on the face are caused by broken blood vessels. Depending on what caused these broken blood vessels will determine if facial veins will go away without treatment. Usually if you notice facial veins after you have experienced an injury or have been unwell then they are likely to disappear over time. If you are prone to developing facial veins, they run in your family or you have had them for a long period of time then it is likely that you will need to seek treatment in order for them to go away. To find out if you need facial vein treatment why not book a consultation with one of our experts who will be able to give you advise on the best treatment for you.

  • Are facial thread veins dangerous?

    Generally, facial thread veins are not dangerous and in some cases they even disappear on their own. However, they can sometimes signify a more severe medical condition such as; Bloom Syndrome Ataxia Talengiectasia Spider Angioma Xeroderma Pigmentosum (XP) Osler-Weber-Rendu Syndrome / Hereditary Hemorrhagic telangiecastia (HHT) Port-wine Stain Sturge-Weber Syndrome (SWS) Liver Disease Roscaea In most cases, these conditions will have a variety of other symptoms and you should visit your GP should you believe that none of the common causes we have mentioned have resulted in the appearance of your facial thread veins. In the vast majority of cases, facial thread veins are not dangerous and patients only seek removal for cosmetic purposes. Thread vein treatment is not actively available on the NHS so you will need to seek private treatment instead.

  • How does IPL vein removal work?

    IPL Photorejuvenation uses an intense pulsed light which is passed over the skin heating the blood vessels beneath the skin. Heating the blood vessels in this way results in them reducing in size. The intense pulsed light targets the feeder part of the vein which works to constrict the capillaries and coagulate the blood inside the vessel. Some veins will disappear straight away but some may instead change colour before being gradually re-absorbed into the body.

    Book a free consultation to find out more about IPL treatment for facial thread veins.

  • Facial Thread Veins After Procedure

  • Can I wear make-up after facial vein treatment?

    At The Private Clinic we recommend wearing a good quality mineral makeup post treatment as the titanium dioxide and zinc oxide commonly found in many types of mineral make-up will help to soothe and calm the skin.

  • Facial Thread Veins Before Procedure

  • How do I prepare for facial vein treatment?

    Patients will need to attend a consultation with one of our facial vein experts to determine if they are suitable for treatment. During this consultation your faical vein expert will go through your medical history and examine the areas which you wish to be treated. If suitable for treatment you will need to have a patch test before booking a treatment appointment. We also advise that patients must not be tanned which includes fake tan and that they should avoid using any exfoliators, retinols or fruit acids 5-7 days before their treatment.

  • Emsella

  • What is the pelvic floor?

    The pelvic floor is a diamond-shaped sheet of 14 muscles that act like a sling or hammock from the tailbone (coccyx) to the pubic bone (front to back) and from one sitting bone to the other sitting bone (side to side). Pelvic floor muscles are normally firm and thick and are able to move down and up. The pelvic floor muscles provide support to our core and internal organs that lie on it. It also has the ability to provide us with conscious control over the bladder and bowel which enables us to delay emptying until it is convenient for us to do so. The pelvic floor muscles also help with posture, pregnancy and sexual function.

  • What problems can a weak pelvic floor cause?

    A weak pelvic floor can cause a variety of complications. Most common, is loss of bladder control. There are different strains of urinary incontinence that a weak pelvic floor muscles can cause. Leaking when coughing or sneezing for example is known as stress urinary incontinence. Having a sudden need to use the toilet which often results in leakage is known is urge urinary incontinence. You can also have a mix of the two which is called mixed Urinary Incontinence. A weak pelvic floor can also cause sexual difficulties such as reduced vaginal sensation and lower back pain due to poor posture and slumping. In more severe cases, there is also a risk of prolapse which is when the internal organs that are usually supported by the pelvic floor including the bladder and uterus can slide down into the vagina.

  • Is Emsella treatment painful?

    BTL Emsella treatment for urinary incontinence and pelvic floor tightening is not painful but it can feel uncomfortable at times. You will experience a tingling sensation as your pelvic floor muscles contract during the procedure. Our expert team will be on hand at all times to manage your comfort throughout the procedure.

  • How long does Emsella treatment take?

    BTL Emsella treatment for urinary incontinence and pelvic floor tightening takes around 30 minutes per session. A treatment plan will be provided to you following a consultation.

  • What research is there to support Emsella treatment?

    There has been various research papers and scientific studies published about the effectiveness of HIFEM technology and treating incontinence with Emsella treatment. You can access these papers below; HIFEM technology can improve quality of life of incontinent patients – (BERENHOLZ J., SIMS T., BOTROS G.) HIFEM technology non-invasive treatment for incontinence – (ALINSOD R., VASILEV V., ET. AL.) Hifem® Technology – A new perspective in treatment of stress urinary incontinence – (ALISOND R., VASILEV V., YANEV K., BUZHOV B., STOILOV M., GEORGIEV M.) The clinical evidence for the revolutionary BTL Emsella chair Safety and preliminary efficacy of magnetic stimulation of pelvic floor with Hifem Technology in urinary incontinence – (Delgado Cidranes E1* and Estrada Blanco)

  • Emsella General Procedure

  • What is the pelvic floor?

    The pelvic floor is a diamond-shaped sheet of 14 muscles that act like a sling or hammock from the tailbone (coccyx) to the pubic bone (front to back) and from one sitting bone to the other sitting bone (side to side). Pelvic floor muscles are normally firm and thick and are able to move down and up. The pelvic floor muscles provide support to our core and internal organs that lie on it. It also has the ability to provide us with conscious control over the bladder and bowel which enables us to delay emptying until it is convenient for us to do so. The pelvic floor muscles also help with posture, pregnancy and sexual function.

  • What problems can a weak pelvic floor cause?

    A weak pelvic floor can cause a variety of complications. Most common, is loss of bladder control. There are different strains of urinary incontinence that a weak pelvic floor muscles can cause. Leaking when coughing or sneezing for example is known as stress urinary incontinence. Having a sudden need to use the toilet which often results in leakage is known is urge urinary incontinence. You can also have a mix of the two which is called mixed Urinary Incontinence. A weak pelvic floor can also cause sexual difficulties such as reduced vaginal sensation and lower back pain due to poor posture and slumping. In more severe cases, there is also a risk of prolapse which is when the internal organs that are usually supported by the pelvic floor including the bladder and uterus can slide down into the vagina.

  • How long does Emsella treatment take?

    BTL Emsella treatment for urinary incontinence and pelvic floor tightening takes around 30 minutes per session. A treatment plan will be provided to you following a consultation.

  • What research is there to support Emsella treatment?

    There has been various research papers and scientific studies published about the effectiveness of HIFEM technology and treating incontinence with Emsella treatment. You can access these papers below; HIFEM technology can improve quality of life of incontinent patients – (BERENHOLZ J., SIMS T., BOTROS G.) HIFEM technology non-invasive treatment for incontinence – (ALINSOD R., VASILEV V., ET. AL.) Hifem® Technology – A new perspective in treatment of stress urinary incontinence – (ALISOND R., VASILEV V., YANEV K., BUZHOV B., STOILOV M., GEORGIEV M.) The clinical evidence for the revolutionary BTL Emsella chair Safety and preliminary efficacy of magnetic stimulation of pelvic floor with Hifem Technology in urinary incontinence – (Delgado Cidranes E1* and Estrada Blanco)

  • Emsella Before Procedure

  • Is Emsella treatment painful?

    BTL Emsella treatment for urinary incontinence and pelvic floor tightening is not painful but it can feel uncomfortable at times. You will experience a tingling sensation as your pelvic floor muscles contract during the procedure. Our expert team will be on hand at all times to manage your comfort throughout the procedure.

  • Breast Reduction

  • Am I suitable for breast reduction surgery?

    Breast reduction surgery is not commonly performed on anyone under the age of 18 this is because your breasts are still growing before this stage and it best to wait until they have stopped before having the procedure. If you are struggling with the size of your breasts then this procedure can reduce the size making things like buying clothing and playing sports a lot easier as well as helping with back pain issues that may be caused by the weight of your breasts.

  • What symptoms suggest that a breast reduction procedure may be necessary?

    Patients with large breasts may experience; • Pain in the back, neck and shoulders • Drooping of the breasts • Low self-confidence about having larger breasts • Difficulty getting clothing to fit • Poor posture • Bra straps digging in • Sweating underneath the breast • Difficulty participating in sport activities If any of the above symptoms relate then a breast reduction procedure may be able to help resolve it.

  • When will I be able to see the results of my breast reduction surgery?

    You should notice a change to the size and weight of your breasts immediately after surgery. There will be swelling for the first couple of weeks which will alter the appearance of your breasts. The best results can be seen after at least 6 weeks.

  • How much does Breast Reduction Surgery cost?

    The Private Clinic sees over 15,000 new patients every year and perform over 10,000 procedures, with one of the highest –patients’ satisfaction in the sector, Trustpilot 9.4, 5 star rating, 96% would recommend us to their friends and family. We are a multi award winning provider and have been voted the Aesthetic award for Best UK Clinic Group 2017. The Private Clinic prides itself on its commitment to Medical Expertise, Patient Care and Satisfaction, Honest advice and most importantly Results. We are above all committed to Quality. Please feel free to contact us for any advice or to book a consultation with one of our expert Breast surgeons. Breast Reduction Cost can be part of your decision to undergo a procedure but it should never be the deciding factor. For more information about The Private Clinic, our experience and medical expertise click here The cost of a bilateral breast reduction procedure starts from £8,820. We don’t follow a one-price-fits-all policy and prices are quoted on a case by case basis. You will be given an accurate quote for your requirements following your consultation. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Please note all consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon.

  • Is there a Breast Reduction clinic near me?

    The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an expert breast surgeon located near to you. Our clinics are in; • London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ • Manchester – 25 St John Street, M3 4DT • Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands • Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire • Buckinghamshire – Stokenchurch Medical Center Oxford Road, HP14 3SX – South East England • Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton • Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands We also have consulting rooms in Milton Keynes where you can have consultations with one of our patient coordinators. To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here.

  • What is breast reduction surgery?

    Breast Reduction surgery is a procedure that reduces the size of large breasts, also known as a mammoplasty.

  • What happens at a Breast Reduction consultation?

    A consultation is the best way to find out more about the breast reduction procedure. You will be able to discuss your goals and your surgeon will be able to go through what can realistically be achieved. Your surgeon will take a look at your breasts and may take some measurements before sitting down to go through what the procedure entails and the risks and complications associated with breast reduction procedures.

  • What anaesthetic is used for breast reduction surgery?

    A breast reduction is performed under general anaesthetic.

  • How long does a breast reduction procedure take?

    Breast reduction procedures usually take 2-3 hours.

  • Will I have to stay in hospital?

    You may be required to stay overnight in hospital for one night so your surgeon and the nursing team can make sure you are recovering well.

  • Breast Reduction General Procedure

  • Am I suitable for breast reduction surgery?

    Breast reduction surgery is not commonly performed on anyone under the age of 18 this is because your breasts are still growing before this stage and it best to wait until they have stopped before having the procedure. If you are struggling with the size of your breasts then this procedure can reduce the size making things like buying clothing and playing sports a lot easier as well as helping with back pain issues that may be caused by the weight of your breasts.

  • What symptoms suggest that a breast reduction procedure may be necessary?

    Patients with large breasts may experience; • Pain in the back, neck and shoulders • Drooping of the breasts • Low self-confidence about having larger breasts • Difficulty getting clothing to fit • Poor posture • Bra straps digging in • Sweating underneath the breast • Difficulty participating in sport activities If any of the above symptoms relate then a breast reduction procedure may be able to help resolve it.

  • When will I be able to see the results of my breast reduction surgery?

    You should notice a change to the size and weight of your breasts immediately after surgery. There will be swelling for the first couple of weeks which will alter the appearance of your breasts. The best results can be seen after at least 6 weeks.

  • How much does Breast Reduction Surgery cost?

    The Private Clinic sees over 15,000 new patients every year and perform over 10,000 procedures, with one of the highest –patients’ satisfaction in the sector, Trustpilot 9.4, 5 star rating, 96% would recommend us to their friends and family. We are a multi award winning provider and have been voted the Aesthetic award for Best UK Clinic Group 2017. The Private Clinic prides itself on its commitment to Medical Expertise, Patient Care and Satisfaction, Honest advice and most importantly Results. We are above all committed to Quality. Please feel free to contact us for any advice or to book a consultation with one of our expert Breast surgeons. Breast Reduction Cost can be part of your decision to undergo a procedure but it should never be the deciding factor. For more information about The Private Clinic, our experience and medical expertise click here The cost of a bilateral breast reduction procedure starts from £8,820. We don’t follow a one-price-fits-all policy and prices are quoted on a case by case basis. You will be given an accurate quote for your requirements following your consultation. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Please note all consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon.

  • Is there a Breast Reduction clinic near me?

    The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an expert breast surgeon located near to you. Our clinics are in; • London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ • Manchester – 25 St John Street, M3 4DT • Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands • Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire • Buckinghamshire – Stokenchurch Medical Center Oxford Road, HP14 3SX – South East England • Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton • Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands We also have consulting rooms in Milton Keynes where you can have consultations with one of our patient coordinators. To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here.

  • What is breast reduction surgery?

    Breast Reduction surgery is a procedure that reduces the size of large breasts, also known as a mammoplasty.

  • Is a breast reduction permanent?

    Although rare, it is possible for your breasts to become larger again after a breast reduction. If you gain wait after surgery then the fat in your breasts is likely to increase or if you were to become pregnant then hormonal changes can increase the size of your bust. It is possible to perform a second breast reduction, although, as previously stated this is rare.

  • What are the risks with Breast Reduction surgery?

    Breast reduction surgery carries risk just like any surgical procedure would do. The common risks are infection, excessive bleeding or reaction to the anaesthetic. Your surgeon will discuss all risks and complications in more detail at your consultation. For information on Breast Implant Safety and risk please see; https://www.theprivateclinic.co.uk/breast-implant-safety

  • Breast Reduction Before Procedure

  • What happens at a Breast Reduction consultation?

    A consultation is the best way to find out more about the breast reduction procedure. You will be able to discuss your goals and your surgeon will be able to go through what can realistically be achieved. Your surgeon will take a look at your breasts and may take some measurements before sitting down to go through what the procedure entails and the risks and complications associated with breast reduction procedures.

  • What does a free breast reduction consultation mean?

    We are able to offer a free breast reduction consultations eaither over the phone or via a video call with one of our experienced patient coordinators. Our knowledgeable team of coordinators will provide information on the procedure and the best breast reduction surgeons to suit your requirements. In order to secure your timed breast reduction phone or video consultation we will ask you to pay a £25 refundable deposit. This is refunded once the consultation takes place. You can change your appointment time up to 48 hours before. https://www.theprivateclinic.co.uk/breast-implant-safety

  • Breast Reduction Day of Procedure

  • What anaesthetic is used for breast reduction surgery?

    A breast reduction is performed under general anaesthetic.

  • How long does a breast reduction procedure take?

    Breast reduction procedures usually take 2-3 hours.

  • Will I have to stay in hospital?

    You may be required to stay overnight in hospital for one night so your surgeon and the nursing team can make sure you are recovering well.

  • What happens during a breast reduction procedure?

    The technique used during your breast reduction will vary depending on the size of your bust. An incision will be made usually around the areola and down the breast either ending at the inframammary fold or in some cases the incision may run along the inframammary fold too. During the procedure the nipple will usually remain attached to its original blood and nerve supply. Skin and/or tissue is then removed from the breast before it is then lifted and reshaped to a smaller size. The incisions are then closed before bandages and a surgical bra are put on.

  • Is breast reduction surgery painful?

    You will experience no pain during the procedure as you will be under general anaesthetic. After the procedure you should not feel a great amount of pain as local anaesthetic will have been administered during the procedure. As this starts to wear off in the hours following surgery you may start to feel some pain, but you will be prescribed a course of painkillers to help reduce this. Usually any pain will subside after a week.

  • Breast Reduction After Procedure

  • What will my scar look like after breast reduction surgery?

    There are two types of scars associated with breast reduction surgery, the lollipop scar and the anchor scar. The lollipop scar goes around the nipple and down the length of the breast; the anchor scar is the same as the lollipop scar but also continues down along the inframammary fold along the underside of the bust. If you take care of your scars these should eventually fade from being red to more a silvery colour. Scar care advice will be given to you by your surgeon post-procedure.

  • What should I expect after breast reduction surgery?

    It is common to have swelling and bruising after a breast reduction procedure but these usually subsides after 1-2 weeks. You may also feel a little numb or tingly in certain areas which are down to nerve irritation which again should stop after 1-2 weeks.

  • How long will I need to wear the surgical bra for?

    We usually recommend that you continue to wear the surgical bra for at least 6 weeks post-surgery. At 6 weeks your surgeon will see you and let you know if you are okay to go back to wearing underwired bras.

  • How long will I need to take off work after breast reduction surgery?

    We recommend that you take at least 1 week off work; some patients like to take 2 weeks off work so they are recovered fully. It does all depend on the nature of your job however, if your job involves manual labour and heavy lifting then we would suggest that you take more time off until you are fully healed to avoid any complications.

  • When can I exercise again after breast reduction surgery?

    We recommend that you wait 4 weeks before taking part in moderate or low body exercises. You should not participate in any strenuous activities until 6 weeks post-surgery, or until your surgeon gives you the all clear.

  • Will I be able to breast feed after breast reduction surgery?

    There is a chance that breast reduction surgery can reduce your ability to breast feed. We recommend that if you are planning for a family and want to breast feed then you should wait to have your procedure until after this time.

  • Breast Uplift

  • How do I know if I need a breast uplift?

    • Does one of my breasts droop lower than the other? • Do my breasts have a long shape? • Do my areolas or nipples point downwards? • Do my nipples drop lower than my breast crease? If you answer yes to any of the above questions then you may be suitable for a mastopexy but the best way to find out is to book a consultation with one of our expert surgeons.

  • Do I need to have breast implants with my uplift procedure?

    It is not essential that you have breast implants with a breast uplift procedure and the majority of procedures are performed without this combined procedure. A breast implant will make your bust larger so unless this is what you want to achieve from surgery then a breast implant would not be required.

  • What is the recovery process?

    Following the procedure, you will need to stay in the hospital overnight. Once you have returned home, depending on your age and general fitness, you will need to rest for two to six weeks. We recommend that you take at least 2 weeks off work and avoid strenuous exercise for at least 6 weeks. Swelling and localised discomfort will subside within a few weeks, but you will need to wear a support bra, with no under-wire, for at least 6 weeks. Scars are usually quite red for the first six weeks after surgery. They then change to a purple colour over the next three months before fading.

  • How much does Breast Uplift cost?

    The Private Clinic sees over 15,000 new patients every year and performs over 10,000 procedures, with one of the highest patients satisfaction in the sector, TrustPilot 9.4, 5-star rating and 96% would recommend us to their friends and family. We are a multi-award winning provider and have been voted the Aesthetic award for Best UK Clinic Group 2017. The Private Clinic prides itself on its commitment to Medical Expertise, Patient Care and Satisfaction, Honest advice and most importantly results. We are above all committed to quality. Please feel free to contact us for any advice or to book a consultation with one of our expert breast surgeons. The cost of a Breast Uplift can be part of your decision to undergo the procedure but it should not be the deciding factor. For more information about The Private Clinic, our experience and medical expertise click here. The cost of a Breast Uplift is approximately £7340. All prices are quoted on a case-by-case basis and you will be provided with a more accurate quote following your consultation. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Please note all consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon.

  • Is there a breast uplift clinic near me?

    The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an expert breast surgeon located near to you. Our clinics are in; London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ Manchester – 25 St John Street, M3 4DT Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire Buckinghamshire – Stokenchurch Medical Center Oxford Road, HP14 3SX – South East England Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands We also have consulting rooms in Milton Keynes where you can have consultations with one of our patient advisors. To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here.

  • Will I be able to go bra-less after a breast uplift?

    It will be possible to go bra-less after a breast uplift however we do advise that this is for short periods only. If breast droop was an issue before your surgery then you are often more prone to this happening again, the more you wear a bra the less risk you have of breast drooping or sagging occurring again prematurely.

  • What are the risks of Breast uplift surgery?

    There are risks associated with all surgical procedures and these will be fully discussed at your post-op appointments. Risks that are specific to breast uplift procedures can include; breast asymmetry, undesirable scarring, change in breast/nipple sensation and recurrence of breast droop.

  • What does a free breast uplift consultation mean?

    Free phone or video breast uplift consultations are available with our experienced patient coordinators who are able to provide information on the best breast uplift augmentation surgeons to suit your requirements. In order to secure the timed video or phone call appointment we ask that you pay a £25 deposit which is refunded back to you once the consultation takes place. You will be able change your appointment time up to 48 hours before. Book your free phone or video consultation.

  • What is a Mastopexy?

    A mastopexy is the surgical name for a breast uplift procedure. A breast lift is a cosmetic procedure, where excess skin is removed so that the remaining skin can be tightened and the nipple moved to a higher position, resulting in a firmer appearance.

  • What happens at a mastopexy consultation?

    At your breast uplift/mastopexy consultation you will meet with your surgeon and discuss the procedure. Your surgeon will then assess your suitability for the procedure by examining you. At this stage they will be able to go through the best procedure plans to ensure that you achieve the results that you are asking for. Your surgeon will also go through any concerns of surgery that you may have and cover all of the risks. You will then meet with a patient coordinator who will be able to provide you with a quote and information to take away about the procedure.

  • Breast Uplift General Procedure

  • How do I know if I need a breast uplift?

    • Does one of my breasts droop lower than the other? • Do my breasts have a long shape? • Do my areolas or nipples point downwards? • Do my nipples drop lower than my breast crease? If you answer yes to any of the above questions then you may be suitable for a mastopexy but the best way to find out is to book a consultation with one of our expert surgeons.

  • Do I need to have breast implants with my uplift procedure?

    It is not essential that you have breast implants with a breast uplift procedure and the majority of procedures are performed without this combined procedure. A breast implant will make your bust larger so unless this is what you want to achieve from surgery then a breast implant would not be required.

  • How much does Breast Uplift cost?

    The Private Clinic sees over 15,000 new patients every year and performs over 10,000 procedures, with one of the highest patients satisfaction in the sector, TrustPilot 9.4, 5-star rating and 96% would recommend us to their friends and family. We are a multi-award winning provider and have been voted the Aesthetic award for Best UK Clinic Group 2017. The Private Clinic prides itself on its commitment to Medical Expertise, Patient Care and Satisfaction, Honest advice and most importantly results. We are above all committed to quality. Please feel free to contact us for any advice or to book a consultation with one of our expert breast surgeons. The cost of a Breast Uplift can be part of your decision to undergo the procedure but it should not be the deciding factor. For more information about The Private Clinic, our experience and medical expertise click here. The cost of a Breast Uplift is approximately £7340. All prices are quoted on a case-by-case basis and you will be provided with a more accurate quote following your consultation. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Please note all consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon.

  • Is there a breast uplift clinic near me?

    The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an expert breast surgeon located near to you. Our clinics are in; London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ Manchester – 25 St John Street, M3 4DT Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire Buckinghamshire – Stokenchurch Medical Center Oxford Road, HP14 3SX – South East England Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands We also have consulting rooms in Milton Keynes where you can have consultations with one of our patient advisors. To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here.

  • Will I be able to go bra-less after a breast uplift?

    It will be possible to go bra-less after a breast uplift however we do advise that this is for short periods only. If breast droop was an issue before your surgery then you are often more prone to this happening again, the more you wear a bra the less risk you have of breast drooping or sagging occurring again prematurely.

  • What are the risks of Breast uplift surgery?

    There are risks associated with all surgical procedures and these will be fully discussed at your post-op appointments. Risks that are specific to breast uplift procedures can include; breast asymmetry, undesirable scarring, change in breast/nipple sensation and recurrence of breast droop.

  • What is a Mastopexy?

    A mastopexy is the surgical name for a breast uplift procedure. A breast lift is a cosmetic procedure, where excess skin is removed so that the remaining skin can be tightened and the nipple moved to a higher position, resulting in a firmer appearance.

  • Will my breasts be smaller after an uplift procedure?

    A breast lift procedure is designed to lift the breasts to higher position but in some cases it can involve removing a small amount of excess skin. When skin is removed, this can cause the breast to appear smaller. If you are looking to reduce the size of your breasts then a breast reduction would be more suited as the amount of size lost during an uplift procedure is minimal.

  • Can I have a breast enlargement at the same time as a breast lift?

    It is possible to have breast implants at the same time as a breast lift procedure however many surgeons have found performing the procedures in separate stages often provides better results. 2 Stage procedures are becoming increasingly popular and it allows the incisions of a breast uplift to heal without the added pressure of an implant stretching them. It also allows the patient to choose an implant more accurately based on the new appearance of their bust. In some cases the procedure is still performed at the same time but this decision will be down to your surgeon’s preferences.

  • Can a breast uplift correct asymmetry?

    Breast asymmetry is actually very common with the majority of women having one breast slightly larger than the other. In some cases however breast asymmetry can be a little more severe causing distress to the patient. A breast uplift procedure can help to correct asymmetry but it can’t be guaranteed. In some cases the breast asymmetry may be caused by asymmetry in the chest wall rather than the breast itself which unfortunately can’t be corrected with a breast uplift procedure. Breast asymmetry can be discussed with your surgeon at your consultation which will enable them to create a personalised treatment plan.

  • Breast Uplift Before Procedure

  • What does a free breast uplift consultation mean?

    Free phone or video breast uplift consultations are available with our experienced patient coordinators who are able to provide information on the best breast uplift augmentation surgeons to suit your requirements. In order to secure the timed video or phone call appointment we ask that you pay a £25 deposit which is refunded back to you once the consultation takes place. You will be able change your appointment time up to 48 hours before. Book your free phone or video consultation.

  • What happens at a mastopexy consultation?

    At your breast uplift/mastopexy consultation you will meet with your surgeon and discuss the procedure. Your surgeon will then assess your suitability for the procedure by examining you. At this stage they will be able to go through the best procedure plans to ensure that you achieve the results that you are asking for. Your surgeon will also go through any concerns of surgery that you may have and cover all of the risks. You will then meet with a patient coordinator who will be able to provide you with a quote and information to take away about the procedure.

  • Breast Uplift Day of Procedure

  • What anaesthesia is used during an uplift procedure?

    A breast reduction is performed under general anaesthetic.

  • What does a breast uplift procedure involve?

    An incision will be made on the breast and any excess skin will be removed. The skin and surrounding tissue will then be tightened and your nipple moved to a higher position. The incision is then closed and bandages applied.

  • Breast Uplift After Procedure

  • What is the recovery process?

    Following the procedure, you will need to stay in the hospital overnight. Once you have returned home, depending on your age and general fitness, you will need to rest for two to six weeks. We recommend that you take at least 2 weeks off work and avoid strenuous exercise for at least 6 weeks. Swelling and localised discomfort will subside within a few weeks, but you will need to wear a support bra, with no under-wire, for at least 6 weeks. Scars are usually quite red for the first six weeks after surgery. They then change to a purple colour over the next three months before fading.

  • How long does swelling last for after a breast lift procedure?

    Swelling after a breast uplift procedure usually starts to go down a week post-procedure. It may seem that the majority of the swelling is gone after a month, but it can actually take up to a year for all swelling to reduce but the effects of it as this stage are often not noticed.

  • Will I be bruised after a breast uplift?

    Every patient heals differently; bruising can appear but after around 10 days it tends to have all faded out.

  • Will I need to wear a special bra after a breast lift procedure?

    It is usually advised that your surgical bra is worn day and night for 6 weeks post-op however your surgeons’ advice may vary depending on their preferences and how you are healing. You will be able to return to wearing underwire bras after 6 weeks when given the go-ahead by your surgeon.

  • Will I be able to breastfeed after a breast uplift?

    Although great care is taken during the procedure, sometimes the milk ducts can be cut which will make breast feeding after breast uplift surgery a challenge. If you are concerned about breast feeding post-procedure then we recommend you speak to your surgeon.

  • Can I drive after a breast uplift?

    We advise that you avoid driving until the anaesthetic has cleared from your system and you are off any pain medication. You should also only drive if you feel comfortable to do so and have full movement without any restrictions. Generally we recommend waiting 1-2 weeks and then getting the go-ahead from your surgeon at your post-op appointment. Driving too soon after a surgical procedure could void your insurance so please check before getting behind the wheel again.

  • When can I fly after a breast uplift?

    Short-haul flights can be taken 2 weeks after your procedure but long-haul flights will need to be avoided for 4-6 weeks. We recommend speaking about any travel plans with your surgeon before booking your procedure to ensure you are healed in time.

  • When can I return to work after a breast uplift procedure?

    Everyone heals differently so the time you will need to stay off work varies between patients. Most patients return to work 1-2 weeks post-procedure as long as their job role does not involve heavy lifting or stretching.

  • When can I exercise again after a breast uplift?

    Exercise should ideally be avoided for 6 weeks however we recommend that you stay active by taking regular walks during the recovery process. Upper arm exercises and swimming can begin after four to six weeks. Always wear a good quality sports bra when exercising.

  • Can I pick up my child after breast lift surgery?

    We recommend that you organise help with childcare for at least the first week after your breast lift procedure. At your 2 week appointment, check with your surgeon to get their advice as they will be able to assess how you are healing. When you start to lift your child again, be sure to lift with your knees, ensure the child is not moving around excessively, do not hold for excessive periods of time and if it hurts or starts to hurt – stop immediately.

  • Tuberous Breast Correction

  • What is tuberous breast deformity?

    Tuberous or tubular breasts are when the breasts have not developed properly. Usually breast tissue is spread out across the chest but tuberous breasts often have a long and narrow appearance with a domed nipple area as the lower pole has failed to develop properly.

  • How can I tell if I have tuberous breasts?

    Tuberous breasts are characterised by a narrow base which tends to result in a high fold underneath the breasts, and a shorter distance between the nipple and the fold under the breast. You can check to see if your breasts are tuberous by measuring the distance between the breast fold and the nipple. This measurement is usually 7-8cm but if your measurements are in the region of 3-4cm then you may have a mild form of tuberous breasts. The symptoms of tuberous breasts vary greatly between individuals but can include;

    • Cylindrical or narrow breast tissue that usually stays same shape from the base of the breast to the end.
    • Breasts that have a saggy appearance due to an abnormally elevated lower breast fold.
    • Enlarged and/or puffy areolas (areola hypertrophy)
    • Constriction of tissue at the base of the breast.
    • Higher than normal breast fold.
    • Large space between the breasts.
    • Only one breast may be affected.
    The best way to see if you are suitable for tuberous breast correction surgery is to have a consultation with one of our expert breast surgeons who will be able to assess you in person and advise on the best procedure to get the results you are after.

  • Will I be able to breast feed after tuberous breast correction?

    It is common for women who have tuberous breasts to be unable to breast feed or have difficulty breast feeding. Tuberous breasts are undeveloped breasts and it often means that insufficient breast tissue have been produced causing a low milk supply, or none at all in some cases. Unfortunately surgery can only help to improve the appearance of the breasts and can’t help to assist with breast feeding.

  • Is there a tuberous breast correction clinic near me?

    The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an expert breast surgeon located near to you. Our clinics are in;

    • London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ
    • Manchester – 25 St John Street, M3 4DT
    • Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands
    • Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire
    • Buckinghamshire – Stokenchurch Medical Center Oxford Road, HP14 3SX – South East England
    • Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton
    • Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands
    We also have consulting rooms in Milton Keynes where you can have consultations with one of our patient coordinators. To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here.

  • How long do the results from tuberous breast correction last?

    The results of tuberous breast correction are permanent however ageing, pregnancy, breastfeeding and any significant weight loss or gain could alter the appearance of your results over time.

  • What does a free tuberous breast consultation mean?

    We are offering patients a free tuberous breast phone or video consultation with our experienced patient coordinators. A patient adviser will provide information on the procedures we offer and offer advice on the best breast surgeons to suit your requirements. In order to secure the timed appointment we ask that you to pay a £25 refundable deposit. This is refunded once the consultation takes place. You can change your appointment time up to 48 hours before. Contact us to book your free phone or video consultation.

  • Tuberous Breast Correction Before Procedure

  • What does a free tuberous breast consultation mean?

    We are offering patients a free tuberous breast phone or video consultation with our experienced patient coordinators. A patient adviser will provide information on the procedures we offer and offer advice on the best breast surgeons to suit your requirements. In order to secure the timed appointment we ask that you to pay a £25 refundable deposit. This is refunded once the consultation takes place. You can change your appointment time up to 48 hours before. Contact us to book your free phone or video consultation.

  • Breast Asymmetry Correction

  • What is breast asymmetry surgery?

    Breast Asymmetry Surgery is a surgical procedure designed to correct a difference in breast shape. The type of surgical technique used will vary between patients but it is usually breast augmentation, breast reduction, breast uplift or a combination of 1 or 2 techniques. To find out more about breast asymmetry surgery click here to book an appointment with one of our expert breast surgeons.

  • Am I suitable for breast asymmetry correction surgery?

    To be considered for breast asymmetry correction surgery you must be at least 18 years of age but ideally above 21 years of age to allow for any additional breast growth. You should also not be pregnant or breast feeding. Patients should also be at their ideal weight as any significant weight gain or loss post procedure could affect your results. If you feel your breasts are significantly different in size usually by one or 2 cup sizes then you would most likely be suitable for breast enlargement surgery. Everyone’s breasts are uneven to some degree but this is not visually noticeable for the majority of patients. The best way to find out if you are suitable for breast asymmetry correction surgery is to book a consultation with one of our specialist breast correction surgeons who will be able to assess you in person.

  • What results can I expect from breast asymmetry correction surgery?

    Your breasts should appear more evenly balanced after breast asymmetry correction surgery however they will not be 100% perfect as this is impossible to achieve. You should expect to look more equally proportioned and any differences that may still occur will not be as noticeable.

  • Is breast asymmetry correction surgery available on the NHS?

    Unfortunately cosmetic surgery is not routinely available on the NHS. In rare cases they may offer breast implant surgery for patients who are severely underdeveloped and causing a significant amount of psychological distress. In these cases you will need to be referred by your GP. The majority of patients who have uneven breasts will usually have to pay for this privately. It is important that you choose a surgeon who is experienced in correcting asymmetric breasts to perform your procedure as usually a variety of techniques will need to be used to give you the best results. You should always question your surgeon to find out their experience and ask to see examples of previous breast asymmetry patients. Click here to make an appointment with one of our breast correction specialists.

  • Is there a breast asymmetry clinic near me?

    The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an expert breast surgeon located near to you. Our clinics are in; • London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ • Manchester – 25 St John Street, M3 4DT • Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands • Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire • Buckinghamshire – Stokenchurch Medical Center Oxford Road, HP14 3SX – South East England • Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton • Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands We also have consulting rooms in Milton Keynes where you can have consultations with one of our patient coordinators. To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here.

  • What causes uneven breasts?

    Overall, no one really knows what causes breasts to develop unevenly. It is usually down to hormonal changes or trauma to the chest but it could also be an underlying medical condition such as Poland syndrome or juvenile hypertrophy. Juvenile hypertrophy is very rare but it does cause one breast to grow significantly larger than the other. Poland syndrome is again another rare condition that occurs at birth and one side of the chest wall is underdeveloped compared to the other.

  • Will I have scars after breast asymmetry correction surgery?

    The extent of your scarring post breast asymmetry correction surgery will vary depending on the technique used. There will always be scarring with any surgical procedure, breast enlargements will have a small scar within the inframammary fold, breast reduction and uplifts often have more visible scarring that may run from the nipple down to the inframammary fold of the breast. Your surgeon will give you scar care information which will help you to achieve a well healed scar that will gradually fade in appearance in the year following your surgery.

  • How long will my breast asymmetry correction surgery results last?

    The results from breast asymmetry correction surgery are usually permanent. Changes to the result may occur with ageing, pregnancy and any change in weight.

  • Breast Implant Safety and Risks

    For information on Breast Implant Safety and risk please see https://www.theprivateclinic.co.uk/breast-implant-safety

  • What does a free breast asymmetry consultation mean?

    We offer free breast asymmetry phone or video consultations with an experienced patient coordinator who will provide information on the procedures we offer and the best breast surgeons to suit your requirements. To secure a timed appointment we will ask to for a £25 refundable deposit. This is refunded once the consultation takes place. You can change your appointment time up to 48 hours before. Contact us to book your free phone or video consultation.

  • Breast Asymmetry Correction General Procedure

  • What is breast asymmetry surgery?

    Breast Asymmetry Surgery is a surgical procedure designed to correct a difference in breast shape. The type of surgical technique used will vary between patients but it is usually breast augmentation, breast reduction, breast uplift or a combination of 1 or 2 techniques. To find out more about breast asymmetry surgery click here to book an appointment with one of our expert breast surgeons.

  • Am I suitable for breast asymmetry correction surgery?

    To be considered for breast asymmetry correction surgery you must be at least 18 years of age but ideally above 21 years of age to allow for any additional breast growth. You should also not be pregnant or breast feeding. Patients should also be at their ideal weight as any significant weight gain or loss post procedure could affect your results. If you feel your breasts are significantly different in size usually by one or 2 cup sizes then you would most likely be suitable for breast enlargement surgery. Everyone’s breasts are uneven to some degree but this is not visually noticeable for the majority of patients. The best way to find out if you are suitable for breast asymmetry correction surgery is to book a consultation with one of our specialist breast correction surgeons who will be able to assess you in person.

  • What results can I expect from breast asymmetry correction surgery?

    Your breasts should appear more evenly balanced after breast asymmetry correction surgery however they will not be 100% perfect as this is impossible to achieve. You should expect to look more equally proportioned and any differences that may still occur will not be as noticeable.

  • Is breast asymmetry correction surgery available on the NHS?

    Unfortunately cosmetic surgery is not routinely available on the NHS. In rare cases they may offer breast implant surgery for patients who are severely underdeveloped and causing a significant amount of psychological distress. In these cases you will need to be referred by your GP. The majority of patients who have uneven breasts will usually have to pay for this privately. It is important that you choose a surgeon who is experienced in correcting asymmetric breasts to perform your procedure as usually a variety of techniques will need to be used to give you the best results. You should always question your surgeon to find out their experience and ask to see examples of previous breast asymmetry patients. Click here to make an appointment with one of our breast correction specialists.

  • Is there a breast asymmetry clinic near me?

    The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an expert breast surgeon located near to you. Our clinics are in; • London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ • Manchester – 25 St John Street, M3 4DT • Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands • Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire • Buckinghamshire – Stokenchurch Medical Center Oxford Road, HP14 3SX – South East England • Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton • Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands We also have consulting rooms in Milton Keynes where you can have consultations with one of our patient coordinators. To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here.

  • What causes uneven breasts?

    Overall, no one really knows what causes breasts to develop unevenly. It is usually down to hormonal changes or trauma to the chest but it could also be an underlying medical condition such as Poland syndrome or juvenile hypertrophy. Juvenile hypertrophy is very rare but it does cause one breast to grow significantly larger than the other. Poland syndrome is again another rare condition that occurs at birth and one side of the chest wall is underdeveloped compared to the other.

  • Will I have scars after breast asymmetry correction surgery?

    The extent of your scarring post breast asymmetry correction surgery will vary depending on the technique used. There will always be scarring with any surgical procedure, breast enlargements will have a small scar within the inframammary fold, breast reduction and uplifts often have more visible scarring that may run from the nipple down to the inframammary fold of the breast. Your surgeon will give you scar care information which will help you to achieve a well healed scar that will gradually fade in appearance in the year following your surgery.

  • How long will my breast asymmetry correction surgery results last?

    The results from breast asymmetry correction surgery are usually permanent. Changes to the result may occur with ageing, pregnancy and any change in weight.

  • Breast Implant Safety and Risks

    For information on Breast Implant Safety and risk please see https://www.theprivateclinic.co.uk/breast-implant-safety

  • What does a free breast asymmetry consultation mean?

    We offer free breast asymmetry phone or video consultations with an experienced patient coordinator who will provide information on the procedures we offer and the best breast surgeons to suit your requirements. To secure a timed appointment we will ask to for a £25 refundable deposit. This is refunded once the consultation takes place. You can change your appointment time up to 48 hours before. Contact us to book your free phone or video consultation.

  • Breast Auto-Augmentation

  • What is the difference between an uplift and a breast auto-augmentation?

    A breast uplift involves removing excess skin and relocating the areola to a higher position on the breast. A breast auto augmentation however is more of a breast reconstruction. The patient’s own natural breast tissue is reshaped and relocated to the upper portion of their breast. An auto augmentation is most commonly performed on patients who are having breast implants removed. To find out more about which procedure is most suitable for you book a consultation with one of our expert breast surgeons.

  • Can I have a breast auto-augmentation if I don’t have implants?

    A breast auto-augmentation can be performed on patients who do not have breast implants however it is more commonly performed on patients who are having their implants removed. This is because the auto augmentation procedure relies on the breast pocket which is created by the breast implant, the breast pocket gives the surgeon the ability to reconstruct the breast and separate out the breast tissue to relocate portions to the upper portion of the breast. If you have not had a breast implant, you will not have a breast pocket. A breast pocket can however be created but this does take extreme skill and should only be performed by a specialist breast surgeon. If you have not had an implant but are seeking an implant then a breast uplift is likely to give you the appearance that you are hoping to achieve. To discuss your breast surgery options in more detail we advise that you book a consultation with one of our expert surgeons who will be able to offer their advice on the best procedure for you.

  • When will I see the final results of a breast auto-augmentation?

    Most patients will notice a change in their breasts immediately following their breast auto-augmentation procedure. Shortly after surgery you are likely to experience swelling which usually takes a couple of weeks to initially settle but can take a few months for it to completely settle. At 6 weeks you will start to be able to see how your final results are going to look but full recovery can take 6-12 months. Your expert surgeon will provide you with aftercare advice following breast auto-augmentation surgery. It is very important that you follow this advice to ensure that you get the best results and reduce your risk of developing any complications.

  • How much does Breast Auto-Augmentation following breast implant removal cost?

    The Private Clinic sees over 15,000 new patients every year and performs over 10,000 procedures, with one of the highest patients satisfaction in the sector, TrustPilot 9.4, 5-star rating and 96% would recommend us to their friends and family. We are a multi award winning provider and have been voted the Aesthetic award for Best UK Clinic Group 2017. The Private Clinic prides itself on its commitment to Medical Expertise, Patient Care and Satisfaction, Honest advice and most importantly results. We are above all committed to quality. Please feel free to contact us for any advice or to book a consultation with one of our expert breast surgeons. The cost of a Breast Auto Augmentation can be part of your decision to undergo the procedure but it should not be the deciding factor. For more information about The Private Clinic, our experience and medical expertise click here. The cost of a Breast Auto Augmentation is approximately £13,250. All prices are quoted on a case-by-case basis and you will be provided with a more accurate quote following your consultation. Our Breast Auto Augmentation procedure is a highly specialised technique that is only performed by experienced breast surgeons. A Breast Auto Augmentation is a breast reconstruction procedure that uses the body’s own natural tissue to replicate the fullness of a breast implant. It is a great option for patients who wish to remove their implants but maintain the fullness of the breast. No additional volume or weight will be added to the breasts and instead, patients can expect to achieve a lifted breast with improved shape and position. This procedure is not the same as a standard breast uplift procedure which only changes the nipple position and tightens the skin. The patient’s own breast tissue is instead reshaped and relocated into the upper portion of the breast. Choosing Breast Auto Augmentation with The Private Clinic means;

    • As many post-operative care and appointments with your surgeon and nursing team as required.
    • Access to a 24-hour patient helpline for any questions or concerns.
    • Highly experienced Breast Surgeons who have decades of experience.
    • Outstanding hospital facilities.
    • A promise that our experience and medical expertise will make your journey a reassuring one.
    To find out more or to book a consultation click here. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Please note all consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon.

  • Do you have a breast auto augmentation clinic near me?

    Breast Auto Augmentation is a specalist procedure and you should seek out a qualified and experienced breast surgeon to discuss this technique with. Surgeons who offer Breast Auto Augmentation at The Private Clinic are located in;

    • London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ
    • Buckinghamshire – Stokenchurch Medical Center Oxford Road, HP14 3SX – South East England
    • Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands
    We also have consulting rooms in Milton Keynes where you can have consultations with one of our patient coordinators. To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here.

  • What is an auto-augmentation?

    An auto-augmentation is a breast uplift technique for patients who are choosing to remove their implants. The procedure not only works to lift the breast but reshapes it to give the appearance of a natural implant. Breast auto-augmentation are most commonly performed on patients who are choosing to remove their implants but wish to maintain upper fullness in their breasts. The procedure is performed in a similar way to standard breast uplift with the nipple and areola lift but instead the patients natural breast tissue is also moved to a higher position to reshape the breast giving it both a natural lift and upper fullness which only an implant was previously able to create. To find out more about our auto-augmentation procedure, use our online contact form to book a consultation with our surgeons. Please note that breast auto-augmentations are only currently available with Mr Adrian Richards and Mr Dario Rochira.

  • What is the difference between a breast augmentation and a breast auto-augmentation?

    A breast augmentation is a breast enlargement procedure. This surgical procedure uses breast implants to enhance the shape of the breasts. A breast auto-augmentation is a variation of a breast uplift procedure that instead uses the patient’s own natural breast tissue to increase volume in the upper portion of the breast without the need for an implant, effectively a natural breast enlargement. A breast auto-augmentation is not designed to increase the size of the breast, just to enhance the shape and is most commonly performed on patients after a breast implant removal procedure. The advantage is that following surgery your breast size should be similar in size or slightly smaller than if you still had the implant in place. To find out more about the breast auto-augmentation procedure book a consultation with one our expert surgeons.

  • What can a breast auto-augmentation achieve?

    A breast auto-augmentation is designed to enhance the shape of your breasts by reshaping the breast using your own natural breast tissue. The procedure can help to maintain fullness in the upper portion of the breasts following a breast implant removal. A breast auto-augmentation can;

    • Lift the breasts
    • Correct sagging
    • Improve the overall shape of the breasts
    • Increase fullness in the upper portion of the breast
    • Recreate the appearance of an implant
    To find out more about the breast auto-augmentation procedure book a consultation with one our expert surgeons.

  • What can a breast auto-augmentation not achieve?

    A breast auto-augmentation is unable to dramatically increase the size of your breasts like a breast implant would as the surgeon is only using your own breast tissue. In this instance, if a bigger size of breast is requested then you will instead be offered a removal and replacement procedure where implants of a bigger size can replace your current ones. An auto augmentation is a great option for patients who wish to maintain the majority of the volume of their chest after their implant has been removed. Although we are unable to guarantee that your breast size will stay the same as it was with the implant, you can be sure that you will achieve breasts that still have volume and are uplifted. To find out more about breast auto-augmentation procedures visit us for a consultation with one of our expert surgeons.

  • Am I suitable for a breast auto-augmentation?

    An auto-augmentation is best performed on patients who are having their breast implants removed. It is a great procedure for women who wish to maintain a certain fullness to the chest after their implants have been removed. You should ideally have a good amount of natural breast tissue, good quality skin that stretches well and realistic expectations of what can be achieved with auto-augmentation surgery. To find out if you are suitable for a breast auto-augmentation procedure we recommend visiting us for a consultation where our expert breast surgeons will be able to assess you and recommend the best treatment option to suit you.

  • Breast Auto-Augmentation General Procedure

  • What is the difference between an uplift and a breast auto-augmentation?

    A breast uplift involves removing excess skin and relocating the areola to a higher position on the breast. A breast auto augmentation however is more of a breast reconstruction. The patient’s own natural breast tissue is reshaped and relocated to the upper portion of their breast. An auto augmentation is most commonly performed on patients who are having breast implants removed. To find out more about which procedure is most suitable for you book a consultation with one of our expert breast surgeons.

  • Can I have a breast auto-augmentation if I don’t have implants?

    A breast auto-augmentation can be performed on patients who do not have breast implants however it is more commonly performed on patients who are having their implants removed. This is because the auto augmentation procedure relies on the breast pocket which is created by the breast implant, the breast pocket gives the surgeon the ability to reconstruct the breast and separate out the breast tissue to relocate portions to the upper portion of the breast. If you have not had a breast implant, you will not have a breast pocket. A breast pocket can however be created but this does take extreme skill and should only be performed by a specialist breast surgeon. If you have not had an implant but are seeking an implant then a breast uplift is likely to give you the appearance that you are hoping to achieve. To discuss your breast surgery options in more detail we advise that you book a consultation with one of our expert surgeons who will be able to offer their advice on the best procedure for you.

  • How much does Breast Auto-Augmentation following breast implant removal cost?

    The Private Clinic sees over 15,000 new patients every year and performs over 10,000 procedures, with one of the highest patients satisfaction in the sector, TrustPilot 9.4, 5-star rating and 96% would recommend us to their friends and family. We are a multi award winning provider and have been voted the Aesthetic award for Best UK Clinic Group 2017. The Private Clinic prides itself on its commitment to Medical Expertise, Patient Care and Satisfaction, Honest advice and most importantly results. We are above all committed to quality. Please feel free to contact us for any advice or to book a consultation with one of our expert breast surgeons. The cost of a Breast Auto Augmentation can be part of your decision to undergo the procedure but it should not be the deciding factor. For more information about The Private Clinic, our experience and medical expertise click here. The cost of a Breast Auto Augmentation is approximately £13,250. All prices are quoted on a case-by-case basis and you will be provided with a more accurate quote following your consultation. Our Breast Auto Augmentation procedure is a highly specialised technique that is only performed by experienced breast surgeons. A Breast Auto Augmentation is a breast reconstruction procedure that uses the body’s own natural tissue to replicate the fullness of a breast implant. It is a great option for patients who wish to remove their implants but maintain the fullness of the breast. No additional volume or weight will be added to the breasts and instead, patients can expect to achieve a lifted breast with improved shape and position. This procedure is not the same as a standard breast uplift procedure which only changes the nipple position and tightens the skin. The patient’s own breast tissue is instead reshaped and relocated into the upper portion of the breast. Choosing Breast Auto Augmentation with The Private Clinic means;

    • As many post-operative care and appointments with your surgeon and nursing team as required.
    • Access to a 24-hour patient helpline for any questions or concerns.
    • Highly experienced Breast Surgeons who have decades of experience.
    • Outstanding hospital facilities.
    • A promise that our experience and medical expertise will make your journey a reassuring one.
    To find out more or to book a consultation click here. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Please note all consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon.

  • Do you have a breast auto augmentation clinic near me?

    Breast Auto Augmentation is a specalist procedure and you should seek out a qualified and experienced breast surgeon to discuss this technique with. Surgeons who offer Breast Auto Augmentation at The Private Clinic are located in;

    • London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ
    • Buckinghamshire – Stokenchurch Medical Center Oxford Road, HP14 3SX – South East England
    • Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands
    We also have consulting rooms in Milton Keynes where you can have consultations with one of our patient coordinators. To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here.

  • What is an auto-augmentation?

    An auto-augmentation is a breast uplift technique for patients who are choosing to remove their implants. The procedure not only works to lift the breast but reshapes it to give the appearance of a natural implant. Breast auto-augmentation are most commonly performed on patients who are choosing to remove their implants but wish to maintain upper fullness in their breasts. The procedure is performed in a similar way to standard breast uplift with the nipple and areola lift but instead the patients natural breast tissue is also moved to a higher position to reshape the breast giving it both a natural lift and upper fullness which only an implant was previously able to create. To find out more about our auto-augmentation procedure, use our online contact form to book a consultation with our surgeons. Please note that breast auto-augmentations are only currently available with Mr Adrian Richards and Mr Dario Rochira.

  • What is the difference between a breast augmentation and a breast auto-augmentation?

    A breast augmentation is a breast enlargement procedure. This surgical procedure uses breast implants to enhance the shape of the breasts. A breast auto-augmentation is a variation of a breast uplift procedure that instead uses the patient’s own natural breast tissue to increase volume in the upper portion of the breast without the need for an implant, effectively a natural breast enlargement. A breast auto-augmentation is not designed to increase the size of the breast, just to enhance the shape and is most commonly performed on patients after a breast implant removal procedure. The advantage is that following surgery your breast size should be similar in size or slightly smaller than if you still had the implant in place. To find out more about the breast auto-augmentation procedure book a consultation with one our expert surgeons.

  • What can a breast auto-augmentation achieve?

    A breast auto-augmentation is designed to enhance the shape of your breasts by reshaping the breast using your own natural breast tissue. The procedure can help to maintain fullness in the upper portion of the breasts following a breast implant removal. A breast auto-augmentation can;

    • Lift the breasts
    • Correct sagging
    • Improve the overall shape of the breasts
    • Increase fullness in the upper portion of the breast
    • Recreate the appearance of an implant
    To find out more about the breast auto-augmentation procedure book a consultation with one our expert surgeons.

  • What can a breast auto-augmentation not achieve?

    A breast auto-augmentation is unable to dramatically increase the size of your breasts like a breast implant would as the surgeon is only using your own breast tissue. In this instance, if a bigger size of breast is requested then you will instead be offered a removal and replacement procedure where implants of a bigger size can replace your current ones. An auto augmentation is a great option for patients who wish to maintain the majority of the volume of their chest after their implant has been removed. Although we are unable to guarantee that your breast size will stay the same as it was with the implant, you can be sure that you will achieve breasts that still have volume and are uplifted. To find out more about breast auto-augmentation procedures visit us for a consultation with one of our expert surgeons.

  • Will weight change affect the results of breast auto-augmentation surgery?

    As no implants are used in a breast auto-augmentation procedure, the volume of your breasts after a breast auto-augmentation will tend to change in size naturally along with your own natural weight loss or gain. Overall, small changes in weight should not make a huge difference to your final results.

  • What are the risks of a breast auto augmentation procedure?

    All surgical procedures carry the potential for risks and complications to occur. Your surgeon will go through these with you at your consultation and make sure you are aware and leave feeling well informed about the breast auto-augmentation surgical procedure. Risks and complications will include; blood clots, risk of anaesthesia, nausea, vomiting, post-operative pain, bleeding, infection, scarring, seroma, tissue or skin necrosis, change in breast sensation, breast asymmetry, undesirable scarring and recurrence of breast droop. At The Private Clinic, we have a 24-hour patient helpline meaning you will be in expert hands at all time. You are also entitled to as many free post-op appointments as required.

  • Breast Auto-Augmentation Before Procedure

  • Am I suitable for a breast auto-augmentation?

    An auto-augmentation is best performed on patients who are having their breast implants removed. It is a great procedure for women who wish to maintain a certain fullness to the chest after their implants have been removed. You should ideally have a good amount of natural breast tissue, good quality skin that stretches well and realistic expectations of what can be achieved with auto-augmentation surgery. To find out if you are suitable for a breast auto-augmentation procedure we recommend visiting us for a consultation where our expert breast surgeons will be able to assess you and recommend the best treatment option to suit you.

  • Breast Auto-Augmentation Day of Procedure

  • How long does a breast auto-augmentation take?

    A breast auto-augmentation generally takes 2 to 4 hours in surgery to complete. This will however all depend on your surgeon and the process of your individual procedure. The procedure will be performed under general anaesthetic and may require an overnight stay at hospital. If staying overnight, you will be taken back to your room to rest and checked on regularly for 24 hours before being discharged by your surgeon. If you are not staying overnight you will still be given time to rest in one of our rooms following surgery and will be checked over by the nursing team.

  • Breast Auto-Augmentation After Procedure

  • When will I see the final results of a breast auto-augmentation?

    Most patients will notice a change in their breasts immediately following their breast auto-augmentation procedure. Shortly after surgery you are likely to experience swelling which usually takes a couple of weeks to initially settle but can take a few months for it to completely settle. At 6 weeks you will start to be able to see how your final results are going to look but full recovery can take 6-12 months. Your expert surgeon will provide you with aftercare advice following breast auto-augmentation surgery. It is very important that you follow this advice to ensure that you get the best results and reduce your risk of developing any complications.

  • What aftercare is involved following a breast auto-augmentation?

    Following breast auto-augmentation surgery you may experience some pain, tightness and discomfort around the treatment area. This should only last a few days and we advise patients to take painkillers such as paracetamol to help relive any discomfort as required. It is important that you take care to look after your incisions by keeping the area clean and dry. Healing wounds may feel itchy but try to avoid scratching the area. You will be required to wear a post-operative surgery bra for several weeks following the surgery. We also advise that patients sleep with their head and torsos elevated on several pillows.

  • When can I return to work after a breast auto-augmentation?

    We usually advise patients to take at least 1-2 weeks off work after a breast auto-augmentation. This will however depend on the type of job role that you do. If you have a job role that requires you being on your feet a lot then it would be best take a full 2 weeks, if you have an office job however you should be fine to take a week off work as long as you take it easy once you return. It is very important that you do not lift anything heavy for the first week. Information and advice on when you can return to exercise will be provided by your surgeon.

  • When can I exercise after a breast auto-augmentation?

    We recommend that patients should avoid taking part in any strenuous physical activity until their 6 week follow up appointment. This is because vigorous movements can increase swelling which will slow down your recovery. If you previously exercised regularly then we advise that after 2 weeks you should be okay to resume light cardio activity such as walking on a treadmill. It is important that you avoid lifting your arms above your head for at least the first week of your procedure and not to carry any heavy objects for 6 weeks.

  • Can I breastfeed after a breast auto-augmentation?

    A breast auto-augmentation procedure may affect your ability to breastfeed in the future. During the procedure both the breast tissue and nipples are moved which does carry a risk of damaging the tissue and glands that produce breast milk. Our surgeons are experts in what they do and will do everything they can to help preserve the ability to breast feed in the future by preserving the blood and nerve supply to your nipples and breast tissue which increases the chances of being able to breastfeed in the future. If you are planning on breastfeeding after your procedure you should discuss this with your surgeon in a consultation. It is always best to have breast surgery after completing your family as some surgical procedures do carry a risk of being unable to breastfeed. Pregnancy and breastfeeding can stretch your skin and in some cases, reverse the results of your surgery.

  • What does a free breast auto augmentation consultation mean?

    We can offer a free breast auto augmentation phone or video consultation with one of our knowledgeable patient coordinators who will be able to provide information on the procedure and recommend the best breast auto augmentation surgeon to suit your requirements. To secure your timed phone or video appointment we do require a £25 refundable deposit which will be refunded once the consultation takes place. You will be able to change your appointment time up to 48 hours before. Book your free phone or video consultation here.

  • Rhinoplasty

  • What is the difference between an Open and Closed Rhinoplasty?

    An open rhinoplasty is when the surgeon makes an incision at the base of the columella which is the soft fleshy bit in between your nostrils, before lifting the skin back away from the nose. Once the surgeon has good visibility of the structure of your nose, they will be able to sculpt the cartilage and tissue according to your desired results. The benefits of an open rhinoplasty is that is allows the surgeons better visibility of the nose allowing for more precision, allows surgeons to better stabilise the nose post-surgery and it is more commonly performed making it easier to find a surgeon with experience. Although an open rhinoplasty may extend your recovery time slightly, any scarring will be carefully concealed on the outer rim of your nose meaning it can still be easily covered. A closed rhinoplasty involves the surgeon making small incisions inside the nostril and the surgery is then carried out via the nostrils leaving the outside skin and tissue untouched. The benefits of a closed rhinoplasty include a quicker recovery time, no visible scarring and reduced swelling. However it is important that you pick a surgeon who is highly experienced in the closed rhinoplasty technique as it does not allow as much visibility compared to the open rhinoplasty so results will depend on the skill of the surgeon. At The Private Clinic we have surgeons who offer both close and open rhinoplasty procedures. Both techniques can be equally as effective and the best method will come down to your anatomy and your surgeon’s expertise. At your consultation, your surgeon will discuss with you which method they believe is best to help you achieve your desired results and why. Open and closed rhinoplasty are different techniques, but overall, they both have the same outcomes. There are pros and cons to both techniques and these will be discussed in more detail during your consultation or see our blog on Open vs Closed Rhinoplasty.

  • How soon will I be able to see results?

    You should start noticing results two weeks following your surgery. As your swelling lessens over the next few months, your results will gradually become more apparent. Please be aware that it can take anywhere between 6-12 months before you can see your final results.

  • Are there before and after photos of Rhinoplasty procedures?

    All surgeons will have a portfolio of images to be able to show you at your consultation of former patients. We also have an online gallery of those patients who have consented to have their images displayed online – click here to view.

  • How much does Rhinoplasty (Nose Surgery) cost?

    The Private Clinic sees over 15,000 new patients every year and perform over 10,000 procedures, with one of the highest patients’ satisfaction in the sector, Trustpilot 9.4, 5 star rating, 96% would recommend us to their friends and family. We are a multi award winning provider and have been voted the Aesthetic award for Best UK Clinic Group 2017. The Private Clinic prides itself on its commitment to Medical Expertise, Patient Care and Satisfaction, Honest advice and most importantly Results. We are above all committed to Quality. Please feel free to contact us for any Rhinoplasty advice or to book a consultation with one of our expert surgeons. Rhinoplasty Cost can be part of your decision to undergo a procedure but it should never be the deciding factor. For more information about The Private Clinic, our experience and medical expertise click here We don’t follow a one-price-fits-all policy and prices are quoted on a case by case basis. The cost of a rhinoplasty procedure starts at £6,900. You will be given an accurate quote for your requirements following your consultation. Consultations with our plastic surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our plastic surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Please note all consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon.

  • Is there a rhinoplasty clinic near me?

    The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an expert rhinoplasty surgeon located near to you. Our clinics are in; London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ Manchester – 25 St John Street, M3 4DT Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands We also offer Free Consultations with patient coordinators at our consulting rooms in Milton Keynes To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here.

  • What is a Rhinoplasty?

    • A rhinoplasty is a surgical procedure designed to alter the shape of look of the nose and in some cases improve its function due to either trauma or birth defects.
    • A rhinoplasty is also more commonly referred to as a nose job.
    • A Rhinoplasty procedure can;
    • Narrow the bridge of the nose.
    • Reshape the tip of the nose.
    • Widen or narrow the nostrils.
    • Reshape the bridge of the nose.Reshape the whole profile of the nose.
    • Remove bone and cartridge off the nose to reduce the size
    • Help with breathing difficulties.
    • Correct a nose that was previously broken (commonly called a nasal fracture) from a sporting incident.
    • Correct a deviated septum (a deviated septum can be caused by a nose fracture)
    We are proud to have some of the UK’s best and most experienced Consultant Plastic and Reconstructive Surgeons performing our Rhinoplasty (Nose Reshaping) procedures. We are experts in all types of nose reshaping including Caucasian and ethnic nose reshaping. Our patients include men and women of all ethnicities including Arabic, Mediterranean and Asian. To find out more about rhinoplasty procedures offered here at The Private Clinic, use our online contact form to book a consultation with one of our expert surgeons.

  • What is a preservation rhinoplasty?

    In the case of most Caucasian Rhinoplasty’s the dorsal hump tends to be the focus of concern regardless of sex or age. Dorsal hump reduction is therefore an essential surgical step during a Rhinoplasty in order to resect portions of both the bone and cartilage.  Following the dorsal height reduction, the vault of the nose is destroyed and must then be reconstructed in order to be functional again. For the last 50 years, this technique was the standard procedure used by surgeons to remove a hump and change the shape of the nose. The unfortunate complications of this technique included: bone irregularities, dorsal deformities, saddle noses and breathing issues. Rhinoplasty surgery carries the highest rate of revision and secondary surgery out of all cosmetic procedures. Complex reconstruction surgery on the nose usually involves the use of grafts taken from the patients rib or ear. If you could imagine the nose as a tall building with the top floor being the hump. In the past surgeons would remove the top floor or hump in order to reduce the size of the building. This approach leaves the roof open, which would then need to be reconstructed in order to restore the coverage. By using the Preservation Rhinoplasty technique surgeons no longer need to destroy or reconstruct the dorsum or roof during surgery. The height or first floor is reduced internally, the nose then becomes smaller and the hump disappears. This new technique is less invasive and less traumatic for the patient. Dorsal preservation also achieves a more natural result, avoiding many of the secondary deformities that lead to patients requiring revision surgery. Patients who undergo Preservation Rhinoplasty have a faster recovery and are discharged home only a few hours following their surgery. Thanks to this less invasive technique, the risk of bleeding post-operatively reduces, meaning that the soft packs inserted inside the nose allow the patient to breathe straight away. To find out more about our Preservation Rhinoplasty procedure, use our rhinoplasty online contact form to book a consultation with our expert rhinoplasty surgeon.

  • Am I suitable for a Rhinoplasty?

    Nose reshaping surgery or a rhinoplasty is a great procedure that can help you in you are feeling unhappy with the shape, position or size of your nose. You would only really be unsuitable for surgery if your surgeon felt your expectations were unrealistic or if you had anything that causes concern on your medical history. Before going ahead with your procedure, you will be able to discuss your desired goals, lifestyle and medical history to allow the surgeon to determine your suitability for nose reshaping surgery.

  • Am I suitable for a Preservation Rhinoplasty?

    A preservation rhinoplasty is most beneficial for patients who require the bridge of the nose to be modified. The vast majority of patients are suitable for the preservation technique. However, 20% of patients will still require traditional Rhinoplasty surgery.  A thorough consultation is required in order to assess the best technique for each patient. To find out more about our Preservation Rhinoplasty technique and your suitability, book a consultation with one of your expert surgeons.

  • Can a Rhinoplasty help with my breathing difficulties?

    A rhinoplasty is often a great solution to help treat breathing difficulties caused by a previous injury to the nose or issues related to the natural position or shape of your nose. The most common cause of breathing difficulties is a deviated nasal septum. This is the internal partition between the right and left nasal passage and it is not uncommon for it actually to be crooked on both sides which can really affect the airflow within the nose. In many cases, patients often do not even know they have this as they have never experienced what ‘normal’ breathing is. This procedure is known as a septo-rhinoplasty. Other nasal issues that may affect breathing include previous injuries or a previous rhinoplasty that has resulted in breathing problems. Immediately after rhinoplasty surgery, you may not necessarily have perfect breathing right away so it may feel like the procedure has not worked, or in some cases made your breathing difficulties worse. The inside of the nose has to undergo the same healing processes. Once the swelling has resolved after 1 or 2 weeks, you can expect to notice more of a change in your previous breathing difficulties and hopefully a positive improvement.

  • Rhinoplasty General Procedure

  • What is the difference between an Open and Closed Rhinoplasty?

    An open rhinoplasty is when the surgeon makes an incision at the base of the columella which is the soft fleshy bit in between your nostrils, before lifting the skin back away from the nose. Once the surgeon has good visibility of the structure of your nose, they will be able to sculpt the cartilage and tissue according to your desired results. The benefits of an open rhinoplasty is that is allows the surgeons better visibility of the nose allowing for more precision, allows surgeons to better stabilise the nose post-surgery and it is more commonly performed making it easier to find a surgeon with experience. Although an open rhinoplasty may extend your recovery time slightly, any scarring will be carefully concealed on the outer rim of your nose meaning it can still be easily covered. A closed rhinoplasty involves the surgeon making small incisions inside the nostril and the surgery is then carried out via the nostrils leaving the outside skin and tissue untouched. The benefits of a closed rhinoplasty include a quicker recovery time, no visible scarring and reduced swelling. However it is important that you pick a surgeon who is highly experienced in the closed rhinoplasty technique as it does not allow as much visibility compared to the open rhinoplasty so results will depend on the skill of the surgeon. At The Private Clinic we have surgeons who offer both close and open rhinoplasty procedures. Both techniques can be equally as effective and the best method will come down to your anatomy and your surgeon’s expertise. At your consultation, your surgeon will discuss with you which method they believe is best to help you achieve your desired results and why. Open and closed rhinoplasty are different techniques, but overall, they both have the same outcomes. There are pros and cons to both techniques and these will be discussed in more detail during your consultation or see our blog on Open vs Closed Rhinoplasty.

  • What is a Rhinoplasty?

    • A rhinoplasty is a surgical procedure designed to alter the shape of look of the nose and in some cases improve its function due to either trauma or birth defects.
    • A rhinoplasty is also more commonly referred to as a nose job.
    • A Rhinoplasty procedure can;
    • Narrow the bridge of the nose.
    • Reshape the tip of the nose.
    • Widen or narrow the nostrils.
    • Reshape the bridge of the nose.Reshape the whole profile of the nose.
    • Remove bone and cartridge off the nose to reduce the size
    • Help with breathing difficulties.
    • Correct a nose that was previously broken (commonly called a nasal fracture) from a sporting incident.
    • Correct a deviated septum (a deviated septum can be caused by a nose fracture)
    We are proud to have some of the UK’s best and most experienced Consultant Plastic and Reconstructive Surgeons performing our Rhinoplasty (Nose Reshaping) procedures. We are experts in all types of nose reshaping including Caucasian and ethnic nose reshaping. Our patients include men and women of all ethnicities including Arabic, Mediterranean and Asian. To find out more about rhinoplasty procedures offered here at The Private Clinic, use our online contact form to book a consultation with one of our expert surgeons.

  • What is a preservation rhinoplasty?

    In the case of most Caucasian Rhinoplasty’s the dorsal hump tends to be the focus of concern regardless of sex or age. Dorsal hump reduction is therefore an essential surgical step during a Rhinoplasty in order to resect portions of both the bone and cartilage.  Following the dorsal height reduction, the vault of the nose is destroyed and must then be reconstructed in order to be functional again. For the last 50 years, this technique was the standard procedure used by surgeons to remove a hump and change the shape of the nose. The unfortunate complications of this technique included: bone irregularities, dorsal deformities, saddle noses and breathing issues. Rhinoplasty surgery carries the highest rate of revision and secondary surgery out of all cosmetic procedures. Complex reconstruction surgery on the nose usually involves the use of grafts taken from the patients rib or ear. If you could imagine the nose as a tall building with the top floor being the hump. In the past surgeons would remove the top floor or hump in order to reduce the size of the building. This approach leaves the roof open, which would then need to be reconstructed in order to restore the coverage. By using the Preservation Rhinoplasty technique surgeons no longer need to destroy or reconstruct the dorsum or roof during surgery. The height or first floor is reduced internally, the nose then becomes smaller and the hump disappears. This new technique is less invasive and less traumatic for the patient. Dorsal preservation also achieves a more natural result, avoiding many of the secondary deformities that lead to patients requiring revision surgery. Patients who undergo Preservation Rhinoplasty have a faster recovery and are discharged home only a few hours following their surgery. Thanks to this less invasive technique, the risk of bleeding post-operatively reduces, meaning that the soft packs inserted inside the nose allow the patient to breathe straight away. To find out more about our Preservation Rhinoplasty procedure, use our rhinoplasty online contact form to book a consultation with our expert rhinoplasty surgeon.

  • I damaged my nose through sports; can a rhinoplasty help with this?

    A rhinoplasty is suitable for anyone who has sustained a nose injury from sports such as rugby, cricket, hockey, boxing and other contact sports. However; if you play hard contact sports on a regular basis then it may be best to have surgery when you are not playing as often to avoid the need for a revision at a later date.

  • Do you offer Ethnic Rhinoplasties?

    An Ethnic rhinoplasty or nose job is a specialist rhinoplasty technique offered to patients who are not Caucasian (i.e. Non-white), Asian, Middle Eastern, Afro-Caribbean or Mediterranean. The aim of an ethnic rhinoplasty is to give the patient a result that looks natural suiting the patient’s face without diminishing their natural ethnic characteristics.

  • Rhinoplasty Before Procedure

  • Are there before and after photos of Rhinoplasty procedures?

    All surgeons will have a portfolio of images to be able to show you at your consultation of former patients. We also have an online gallery of those patients who have consented to have their images displayed online – click here to view.

  • How much does Rhinoplasty (Nose Surgery) cost?

    The Private Clinic sees over 15,000 new patients every year and perform over 10,000 procedures, with one of the highest patients’ satisfaction in the sector, Trustpilot 9.4, 5 star rating, 96% would recommend us to their friends and family. We are a multi award winning provider and have been voted the Aesthetic award for Best UK Clinic Group 2017. The Private Clinic prides itself on its commitment to Medical Expertise, Patient Care and Satisfaction, Honest advice and most importantly Results. We are above all committed to Quality. Please feel free to contact us for any Rhinoplasty advice or to book a consultation with one of our expert surgeons. Rhinoplasty Cost can be part of your decision to undergo a procedure but it should never be the deciding factor. For more information about The Private Clinic, our experience and medical expertise click here We don’t follow a one-price-fits-all policy and prices are quoted on a case by case basis. The cost of a rhinoplasty procedure starts at £6,900. You will be given an accurate quote for your requirements following your consultation. Consultations with our plastic surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our plastic surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Please note all consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon.

  • Is there a rhinoplasty clinic near me?

    The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an expert rhinoplasty surgeon located near to you. Our clinics are in; London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ Manchester – 25 St John Street, M3 4DT Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands We also offer Free Consultations with patient coordinators at our consulting rooms in Milton Keynes To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here.

  • Am I suitable for a Rhinoplasty?

    Nose reshaping surgery or a rhinoplasty is a great procedure that can help you in you are feeling unhappy with the shape, position or size of your nose. You would only really be unsuitable for surgery if your surgeon felt your expectations were unrealistic or if you had anything that causes concern on your medical history. Before going ahead with your procedure, you will be able to discuss your desired goals, lifestyle and medical history to allow the surgeon to determine your suitability for nose reshaping surgery.

  • Am I suitable for a Preservation Rhinoplasty?

    A preservation rhinoplasty is most beneficial for patients who require the bridge of the nose to be modified. The vast majority of patients are suitable for the preservation technique. However, 20% of patients will still require traditional Rhinoplasty surgery.  A thorough consultation is required in order to assess the best technique for each patient. To find out more about our Preservation Rhinoplasty technique and your suitability, book a consultation with one of your expert surgeons.

  • Can a Rhinoplasty help with my breathing difficulties?

    A rhinoplasty is often a great solution to help treat breathing difficulties caused by a previous injury to the nose or issues related to the natural position or shape of your nose. The most common cause of breathing difficulties is a deviated nasal septum. This is the internal partition between the right and left nasal passage and it is not uncommon for it actually to be crooked on both sides which can really affect the airflow within the nose. In many cases, patients often do not even know they have this as they have never experienced what ‘normal’ breathing is. This procedure is known as a septo-rhinoplasty. Other nasal issues that may affect breathing include previous injuries or a previous rhinoplasty that has resulted in breathing problems. Immediately after rhinoplasty surgery, you may not necessarily have perfect breathing right away so it may feel like the procedure has not worked, or in some cases made your breathing difficulties worse. The inside of the nose has to undergo the same healing processes. Once the swelling has resolved after 1 or 2 weeks, you can expect to notice more of a change in your previous breathing difficulties and hopefully a positive improvement.

  • Can a Rhinoplasty improve the appearance of the tip of my nose?

    A Rhino-tip is the correction of just the tip and alar bases of your nose. Although some patients may need additional work to the rest of their nose, some patients who are just unhappy with the tip of their nose can get a successful result without the need for a full rhinoplasty procedure.

  • What happens at a Rhinoplasty consultation?

    At your consultation your surgeon will give a comprehensive assessment which includes an evaluation of the inside and outside of your nose. This will allow your surgeon to assess which techniques would be suitable for your nose. It is also your chance to discuss what you wish to achieve from surgery as well as going through any questions you may have about the procedure and talk through any concerns. Your plastic surgeon will also go through what rhinoplasty surgery involves, the risks associated with rhinoplasty surgery and what aftercare and downtime you would require post-surgery. You will also be provided with a Rhinoplasty Patient Guide which will have all the information you need to know about the procedure. You will leave your consultation feeling well informed about the procedure to be able to make a decision about if to go ahead with surgery or not. To book a consultation, use our online contact form.

  • What type of anaesthesia is used for a rhinoplasty?

    Rhinoplasty procedures are most commonly performed under general anaesthetic. Research has suggested that this is the best and safest way to perform rhinoplasty procedures. A Rhinotip correction alone may be carried out under local anaesthetic with sedation at the surgeon’s preference. Patients will be discharged on the same day as their rhinoplasty procedure to recover at home once assessed by the surgeon. Your surgeon will be able to discuss the rhinoplasty procedure with you in more detail at your consultation.

  • Is there an age limit on Rhinoplasties?

    We only perform rhinoplasties on patients who are over 18 years old and only on patients whose nose’s has completed their growth. There is no upper age limit for a rhinoplasty as long as the patient is in good health.

  • Rhinoplasty Day of Procedure

  • What happens during a rhinoplasty procedure?

    A Rhinoplasty procedure is performed either using an open procedure, where the incision is made across the columella or a closed procedure where the incisions are hidden inside the nose. Once the incisions have been made, the skin is separated from the bone and cartilage layers of the nose. The bone and cartilage is then sculptured to the desired result of the patient before the skin is placed back over the new framework and small absorbable stitches are used to close the incisions. Nasal packs are put in place which will be usually be removed after 48 hours and a nasal cast will need to stay in place for 7 days. Your surgeon will explain the full rhinoplasty process with you at your consultation. Due to the nature of the procedure, everyone’s procedure will differ slightly depending on what is performed.

  • How long does the procedure take?

    The length of time that a rhinoplasty takes will depend on what is being done during the procedure. Overall, most Rhinoplasty procedures last 2-3 hours but it could take longer depending on the complexity of your case. Revision rhinoplasty procedures do tend to take longer than standard rhinoplasties because they are far more complex. To find out more about rhinoplasty procedures, book a consultation with one of our expert surgeons. Rhinoplasty procedures can last up to two hours, it all depends on the complexity of your case. They are performed under general anaesthetic, so you will have to stay in hospital overnight for monitoring. On the other hand, Rhino-tip Correction can be performed under local anaesthetic, in which case you can go home on the day of your operation. Your surgeon will advise you on whether this is a suitable option for you.

  • Rhinoplasty After Procedure

  • How soon will I be able to see results?

    You should start noticing results two weeks following your surgery. As your swelling lessens over the next few months, your results will gradually become more apparent. Please be aware that it can take anywhere between 6-12 months before you can see your final results.

  • What can I expect during the recovery process?

    Patients may experience slight discomfort for the first couple of days after their procedure but you will be given a prescription for pain medication to help you with this. You may also have been given antibiotics and saline nose spray that should be used to your surgeons instructions too. Your nose will feel swollen and you may find nasal breathing a little difficult until the initial swelling goes down. Some patients can experience bruising on their face which will fade over time and can be covered with make-up a few days after the procedure. The splint will be removed between the 7th and 10th day post procedure and at this stage, you may feel comfortable to return to the majority of your everyday. At The Private Clinic, we provide our patients with a comprehensive post-operative care service as part of your aftercare package. It is essential that you attend the scheduled post-operative appointments with the clinic nurses and surgeons.

  • How long does the swelling last?

    The amount of time your nose will be swollen depends on your individual case, however, you can expect a reasonable amount of swelling in the first two weeks following your treatment. It will gradually lessen and become unnoticeable over the next 3-4 months. Residual swelling may persist up to a year, but it would only be noticeable to the patient. The amount of time your nose will be swollen depends on your individual case, however you can expect a reasonable amount of swelling in the first two weeks following your treatment. It will gradually lessen and become unnoticeable over the next 3-4 months. Residual swelling may persist up to a year, but it would only be noticeable to the patient.

  • Will I have scars after a rhinoplasty procedure?

    Most patients are pleasantly surprised at how little the scarring is after a rhinoplasty procedure. The procedure itself can be a little invasive but due to the small area and the natural shape of the nose, only small incisions are required to access the nose. The majority of rhinoplasty incisions are made inside the nose however depending on the technique used the incisions may vary slightly. An open rhinoplasty involves incisions being made at the base of the columella which is the soft fleshy tissue separating the two nostrils. The scar left is very minimal and usually only visible to anyone looking at your nose from below. A closed rhinoplasty has incisions made within the nostrils. This means that there will be no visible scarring. You will be told what technique your surgeon is going to use prior to your procedure and scar placement will also be discussed during your consultation so you can make a fully informed decision before going ahead with rhinoplasty surgery.

  • How long will I need to take off work?

    The time you will need to take off work will depend on your own personal healing rate, your job role and also if you are happy for your colleagues to know about your procedure or not. We usually recommend between 10-14 days off work. Once your splint has been removed which happens 7 – 10 days after your procedure, you should be fine to return to work however at this stage it is likely that you will still have some bruising and swelling which is why we suggest the additional week to let this settle. A preservation rhinoplasty can dramatically reduce the amount of bruising and swelling that occurs, usually after the pack is removed at 7 days, you would be fine to return to work if comfortable to do so.

  • How long until I can exercise again after a rhinoplasty?

    We recommend that you wait 3-4 weeks until returning to exercise and other strenuous activities but you should avoid any close contact sports and activities that could lead to your nose getting hit such as netball for at least 6 weeks.

  • How soon can I fly after a rhinoplasty?

    We recommend that patients avoid flying for at least 3 weeks after a rhinoplasty as the changes in cabin pressure during the flight may be very painful whilst you are still healing. You may also experience additional swelling after the flight which can take 1-2 days to go down. Another reason is that we prefer our patients to be close to one of our clinics to ensure that they are able to get help quickly should they require it.

  • Can I wear glasses after a rhinoplasty?

    Patients should avoid wearing glasses across the bridge of the nose whilst the nose is still healing to avoid altering the results. This can take up to 6 weeks so if you require your glasses to see, alternative arrangements should be organised before going ahead with your procedure.

  • When can I drive after a rhinoplasty?

    You should not be driving straight after your rhinoplasty procedure and we do not recommend that you drive until your surgeon has said you can which is usually once you have finished your course of post-surgery medication. If you are driving quite quickly post-surgery, check that you are still covered by your insurance and do not operate the car unless you feel you are able to safely and comfortably manoeuvre the car.

  • Will a rhinoplasty change the way I smile?

    The swelling caused by a rhinoplasty can affect your upper lip which can result in your natural smile being affected for at least a few days. This will soon subside and you should not notice any differences to your smile.

  • Tummy Tuck

  • What is the difference between a tummy tuck and liposuction?

    Abdominoplasty involves the removal of excess, sagging skin and some of the connective tissue surrounding it and will not result in demonstrable fat removal. People who have lost a lot of weight quickly or had babies and have excess skin are typically ideal candidates for the procedure. Instead people looking for fat removal will be suitable for liposuction. As the skin may struggle to tighten, a tummy tuck can be used to help improve the result of the fat removal. A consultation will help you to understand what procedure or procedures your body may need.

  • What is the difference between a full, mini and extended tummy tuck?

    A full tummy tuck removes loose skin above and below your belly button, a mini tummy tuck will only remove skin below your belly button and an extended tummy tuck removes loose skin from above and below the belly button as well as from your sides / flanks or love handles. To get an accurate idea on which procedure is best for you, make an appointment to see one of your specialist abdominoplasty surgeons.

  • When will I see the results from a tummy tuck procedure?

    You should notice an initial difference straight after your procedure however the best results are not seen until after the swelling has subsided which can take up to 6 weeks.

  • How much does Tummy Tuck (Abdominoplasty) cost?

    The Private Clinic sees over 15,000 new patients every year and perform over 10,000 procedures, with one of the highest patients’ satisfaction in the sector, Trustpilot 9.4, 5 star rating, 96% would recommend us to their friends and family. We are a multi award winning provider and have been voted the Aesthetic award for Best UK Clinic Group 2017. The Private Clinic prides itself on its commitment to Medical Expertise, Patient Care and Satisfaction, Honest advice and most importantly Results. We are above all committed to Quality. Please feel free to contact us for any Tummy Tuck advice or to book a consultation with one of our expert surgeons. Tummy Tuck Cost can be part of your decision to undergo a procedure but it should never be the deciding factor. For more information about The Private Clinic, our experience and medical expertise click here The average price for a mini-tummy tuck starts from £5,670. If you require a full tummy tuck the price starts from £8,295. You will be given an accurate quote for your procedure following your consultation. Consultations with our plastic surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our plastic surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Please note all consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon.

  • Do you have a Tummy Tuck clinic near me?

    The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an expert tummy tuck surgeon located near to you. Our clinics are in; London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ Manchester – 25 St John Street, M3 4DT Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire Buckinghamshire – Stokenchurch Medical Center Oxford Road, HP14 3SX – South East England Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands We also have consulting rooms in Milton Keynes where you can have consultations with one of our patient coordinators. To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here.

  • Am I suitable for a tummy tuck procedure?

    A tummy tuck / abdominoplasty procedure is best performed on patients who have excess skin from pregnancy or weight loss and need it to be removed and tightened. Although fat can be removed during a tummy tuck procedure, it is not a quick fix for losing weight.

  • Am I too old for a tummy tuck?

    We only perform cosmetic procedures on patients over the age of 18. As long as you are fit and well then there is no upper age limit on tummy tuck surgery.

  • Can men have tummy tucks?

    Tummy tucks are not gender specific so men can definitely get tummy tucks. The abdomen is a problem area for men and women alike, with different factors affecting the area. The ageing process affects the elasticity and integrity of the skin, whilst weight loss leaves the body unable to naturally tighten the skin effectively – both problems that affect men.

  • When is the best time to have a tummy tuck procedure?

    We recommend that you are at your ideal weight before having tummy tuck surgery. If you lose or gain a significant amount of weight after having the procedure you may find yourself having to have additional surgery to correct the results. Although it is not a medical requirement, we do also recommend that you do not have a tummy tuck procedure if you are planning on getting pregnant in the future. Pregnancy causes your skin to stretch which again, may result in revision surgery being required at a later date.

  • What happens at a tummy tuck consultation?

    A tummy tuck consultation with your surgeon is a great way to firstly get to know the surgeon that is potentially going to be carrying out the procedure, discuss your desired outcome, ask any questions that you may have and talk through any concerns that you have about the procedure. The surgeon will ask to see your stomach so they can assess which procedure would be best for you. You will also be able to go through before and after photographs to get a realistic idea of what to expect post-surgery.

  • Tummy Tuck General Procedure

  • Am I too old for a tummy tuck?

    We only perform cosmetic procedures on patients over the age of 18. As long as you are fit and well then there is no upper age limit on tummy tuck surgery.

  • Can men have tummy tucks?

    Tummy tucks are not gender specific so men can definitely get tummy tucks. The abdomen is a problem area for men and women alike, with different factors affecting the area. The ageing process affects the elasticity and integrity of the skin, whilst weight loss leaves the body unable to naturally tighten the skin effectively – both problems that affect men.

  • Will a tummy tuck get rid of my stretch marks?

    A tummy tuck procedure is not designed to remove stretch marks so this is not guaranteed, however due to the technique of the skin being tightened – some patients find the appearance of their stretchmarks has reduced after their procedure.

  • Tummy Tuck Before Procedure

  • What is the difference between a tummy tuck and liposuction?

    Abdominoplasty involves the removal of excess, sagging skin and some of the connective tissue surrounding it and will not result in demonstrable fat removal. People who have lost a lot of weight quickly or had babies and have excess skin are typically ideal candidates for the procedure. Instead people looking for fat removal will be suitable for liposuction. As the skin may struggle to tighten, a tummy tuck can be used to help improve the result of the fat removal. A consultation will help you to understand what procedure or procedures your body may need.

  • What is the difference between a full, mini and extended tummy tuck?

    A full tummy tuck removes loose skin above and below your belly button, a mini tummy tuck will only remove skin below your belly button and an extended tummy tuck removes loose skin from above and below the belly button as well as from your sides / flanks or love handles. To get an accurate idea on which procedure is best for you, make an appointment to see one of your specialist abdominoplasty surgeons.

  • How much does Tummy Tuck (Abdominoplasty) cost?

    The Private Clinic sees over 15,000 new patients every year and perform over 10,000 procedures, with one of the highest patients’ satisfaction in the sector, Trustpilot 9.4, 5 star rating, 96% would recommend us to their friends and family. We are a multi award winning provider and have been voted the Aesthetic award for Best UK Clinic Group 2017. The Private Clinic prides itself on its commitment to Medical Expertise, Patient Care and Satisfaction, Honest advice and most importantly Results. We are above all committed to Quality. Please feel free to contact us for any Tummy Tuck advice or to book a consultation with one of our expert surgeons. Tummy Tuck Cost can be part of your decision to undergo a procedure but it should never be the deciding factor. For more information about The Private Clinic, our experience and medical expertise click here The average price for a mini-tummy tuck starts from £5,670. If you require a full tummy tuck the price starts from £8,295. You will be given an accurate quote for your procedure following your consultation. Consultations with our plastic surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our plastic surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Please note all consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon.

  • Do you have a Tummy Tuck clinic near me?

    The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an expert tummy tuck surgeon located near to you. Our clinics are in; London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ Manchester – 25 St John Street, M3 4DT Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire Buckinghamshire – Stokenchurch Medical Center Oxford Road, HP14 3SX – South East England Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands We also have consulting rooms in Milton Keynes where you can have consultations with one of our patient coordinators. To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here.

  • Am I suitable for a tummy tuck procedure?

    A tummy tuck / abdominoplasty procedure is best performed on patients who have excess skin from pregnancy or weight loss and need it to be removed and tightened. Although fat can be removed during a tummy tuck procedure, it is not a quick fix for losing weight.

  • When is the best time to have a tummy tuck procedure?

    We recommend that you are at your ideal weight before having tummy tuck surgery. If you lose or gain a significant amount of weight after having the procedure you may find yourself having to have additional surgery to correct the results. Although it is not a medical requirement, we do also recommend that you do not have a tummy tuck procedure if you are planning on getting pregnant in the future. Pregnancy causes your skin to stretch which again, may result in revision surgery being required at a later date.

  • What happens at a tummy tuck consultation?

    A tummy tuck consultation with your surgeon is a great way to firstly get to know the surgeon that is potentially going to be carrying out the procedure, discuss your desired outcome, ask any questions that you may have and talk through any concerns that you have about the procedure. The surgeon will ask to see your stomach so they can assess which procedure would be best for you. You will also be able to go through before and after photographs to get a realistic idea of what to expect post-surgery.

  • Will a tummy tuck remove fat?

    A tummy tuck procedure is intended to remove excess skin rather than fat although some fat removal can be carried out during the procedure. If you are looking for a procedure to help with stubborn fat removal see our Vaser Liposuction page.

  • Will a tummy tuck remove my love handles?

    A standard tummy tuck will not target your love handles/sides/flanks but an extended tummy tuck does target this area otherwise a vaser liposuction procedure may be best suited.

  • What does a free tummy tuck consultation mean?

    We are offering free tummy tuck phone or video consultations with an experienced patient coordinator. Our coordinators are able to provide information on tummy tuck procedures and advise on which tummy tuck surgeon is going to suit your requirements best. In order to secure the timed appointment we do require a £25 refundable deposit. This is refunded once the consultation takes place. You can change your appointment time up to 48 hours before. Contact us to book your free phone or video consultation.

  • Tummy Tuck Day of Procedure

  • How long does the procedure take?

    A tummy tuck procedure can take up to 2 hours to perform and you will be required to stay overnight in hospital so that your surgeon and the nursing team can ensure you are recovering well.

  • Does the procedure require general anaesthetic?

    Depending on each patient, some procedures require general anaesthetic but others can be performed under local anaesthetic with sedation.

  • What happens during the procedure?

    The procedure involves an incision being made along the lower abdomen (further incisions may be needed). Then skin is carefully separated, allowing the excess tissue and skin to be removed and the remaining skin and tissue to be repositioned or reshaped. Finally the skin is firmly pulled across the abdomen area and sutured up. If you are having liposuction as part of the process, excess fat will be extracted along with the removal of excess skin and tissue.

  • Tummy Tuck After Procedure

  • When will I see the results from a tummy tuck procedure?

    You should notice an initial difference straight after your procedure however the best results are not seen until after the swelling has subsided which can take up to 6 weeks.

  • What should I expect after a tummy tuck procedure?

    Temporary drainage tubes can sometimes be used for fluid drainage, if required. Surgical gauze and compression garments will be used to wrap around the treated area to aid the body’s recovery process. Your pain should be effectively managed with the prescribed pain relief and although you are told to rest, you are also advised to get up and take regular short walks throughout the day. Initially you may feel tightness in the abdomen and find standing up straight difficult for the first 4-5 days post-surgery. You will have an aftercare plan set up which will require you to visit your nearest clinic regularly to ensure you are healing well. You will be required to wear a compression garment during your healing for 6-8 weeks or until any swelling has gone.

  • Will I feel any pain?

    You will not feel any discomfort before or during the procedure but after the procedure you are likely to experience moderate discomfort. Painkillers and sedatives are prescribed for patients and a full resting period is necessary in order to help your body adjust. Considering the results, most patients report the procedure’s downtime was worth it.

  • How much time off work will I need?

    You will need to take between 1-3 weeks off work, depending on your job. After a surgical procedure you need to care for your body and grant it the full rest it deserves. Naturally, the recovery process varies considerably between patients so you may find you will be able to do some very light work from home sooner than you thought. Following the aftercare schedule we provide will help you heal quickly and effectively so make sure you adhere to the care plan.

  • Where will my scar be after a tummy tuck procedure?

    At your consultation your surgeon will discuss your scar placement with you. It may be beneficial for you to bring or wear specific underwear or bikini bottoms that you know you want the scar to sit beneath to give your surgeon a clear idea of where the scar should sit. Ideally the scar will sit as low on the abdomen as possible, for the first few weeks it will be very visible and it will go through a red phase before eventually fading to a silvery colour. Over the years your scar will continue to fade and should sit flat against your skin. Your surgeon will give you guidance on how to care for your scar post-surgery. Invasive surgery of any kind will leave some form of scarring but our surgeons are specialised and able to minimise scarring as much as possible, as well as hiding the scars below the underwear/bikini line. Fortunately the scarring will be in a place that isn’t commonly visible most of the time. Advice will be given to treat scarring post-procedure and further treatments are available at The Private Clinic if you need further help with treating your scarring.

  • Can I get pregnant after a tummy tuck?

    A tummy tuck procedure will not prevent you from getting pregnant however it is not something that we recommend. Pregnancy can cause your stomach muscles to separate and skin laxity to occur which often results in patients needing a second tummy tuck procedure to correct the changes to their previous results.

  • When will I be able to exercise after tummy tuck surgery?

    We recommend that you allow 6-8 weeks before returning to exercise and any other strenuous activities.

  • When can I travel abroad after tummy tuck surgery?

    We advise that you wait for at least 6 weeks after surgery to fly.

  • Liposuction

  • What is the best type of liposuction?

    There are a wide range of different liposuction treatments including traditional liposuction, vaser liposuction, laser liposuction, MPX laser, body jet liposuction and many more. There is no clinical evidence to suggest that any of these are better or even safer than the other. The best type of liposuction is liposuction that has been performed by an expert surgeon or doctor on suitable patients. The best results come from the skill and experience of the surgeon and from the aftercare provided too. Book a consultation to find out more about our experienced surgeons/doctors.

  • When can I see results after liposuction?

    You are likely to see results immediately after surgery however you will be required to wear a compression garment after surgery so you may not be able to see straight away. Bruising and swelling may occur which can alter the appearance of your results slightly. The majority of patients are able to see great results after 6 weeks but the final results of your procedure are best seen 6-12 months afterwards once all swelling has resolved. The results after vaser liposuction are instant although patients will be required to wear a compression garment immediately following surgery. Standard vaser results are very subtle and natural. If you prefer a more athletic, defined or sculpted appearance, VASER Hi-Def or VASER Mid-Def may be better options for you. To see vaser liposuction results click here to see our before and after photo gallery.

  • How much does Liposuction cost?

    How much does liposuction cost in the UK? The Private Clinic sees over 15,000 new patients every year and perform over 10,000 procedures, with one of the highest patients’ satisfaction in the sector, Trustpilot 9.4, 5 star rating, 96% would recommend us to their friends and family. We are a multi award winning provider and have been voted the Aesthetic award for Best UK Clinic Group 2017. The Private Clinic prides itself on its commitment to Medical Expertise, Patient Care and Satisfaction, Honest advice and most importantly Results. We are above all committed to Quality. Please feel free to contact us for any Liposuction advice or to book a consultation with one of our expert Lipo surgeons. Liposuction Cost can be part of your decision to undergo a procedure but it should never be the deciding factor. For more information about The Private Clinic, our experience and medical expertise click here Surgical Liposuction cost Surgical liposuction costs start from £3,690 (1 area) – but this will vary depending on the number of areas being treated and the length of your procedure. Vaser Lipo cost VASER Liposuction costs start from £3,100 (1 area) depending on the number of areas being treated. Vaser liposuction can be performed under local anaesthetic with sedation and is a lot less invasive than Surgical liposuction resulting in a shorter recovery period and less bruising. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Consultations with our liposuction plastic surgeons are £100 or consultations with our liposuction doctors are £50 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our liposuction doctors or liposuction plastic surgeons are £50 at our clinics in Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton.

  • What are the different types of liposuction?

    We offer a range of different liposuction procedures here at The Private Clinic. Liposuction This is known as traditional or surgical liposuction. It is usually recommended for patients who are having a larger amount of fat taken out or are having a number of different body areas being treated. It is usually performed under general anaesthetic for patient comfort but you will normally be able to go home the same day. Vaser Liposuction Vaser liposuction uses ultrasound energy to help liquefy the fat before it is removed. It is usually performed under local anaesthetic or sedation. Vaser liposuction is not as invasive as traditional liposuction and involves minimal downtime with less risk of bruising and swelling. Most patients are able to return to work and their daily routines a lot quicker post-procedure. The Private Clinic is the UK’s leading provider of VASER Liposuction performing more vaser liposuction procedures than any other clinic in the UK. Micro Lipo Micro Lipo is similar to Vaser Liposuction however it uses a much smaller cannula making it ideal for treating small areas of stubborn fat such as the neck, chin, knees and arms. Vaser Hi-Def Vaser hi-def is a specialised technique of vaser liposuction which works to sculpt and define muscles for a more athletic result. The Private Clinic are one of very few groups in the UK to be certified to perform the revolutionary treatment as it requires extensive experience and well-practised skill in VASER treatments which our liposuction surgeons excel in. Vaser Mid-Def Vaser Mid-Def is The Private Clinic’s own, unique Vaser lipo technique that offers results in-between Vaser Lipo and Vaser Hi-Def. It is designed to offer a more defined and athletic appearance but not as extreme as the results of Vaser Hi-Def. Vaser 4D Vaser 4D is a specialised form of Vaser Lipo that is similar to Vaser Hi-Def which works to highlight your muscles. Vaser 4D instead is designed to sculpt your muscles following their natural movements and to create a 4D effect. Vaser 360 Vaser 360 is a fat removal and body contouring vaser technique that specifically treats the upper leg circumferentially targeting the thighs, knees and buttock crease. Your initial consultation with our expert surgeons will allow them to assess you and offer advice on which liposuction procedure is going to be right for you giving you the results that you desire to achieve.

  • Is there a liposuction clinic near me?

    Where to get lipo in London? Our London clinic in located on 98 Harley Street, W1G 7HZ. The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an expert liposuction surgeon located near to you. Where to get lipo in Manchester? Manchester – 25 St John Street, M3 4DT Where to get lipo in Birmingham? Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands Where to get liposuction in Leeds? Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire Where to get lipo in Bucks? Buckinghamshire – Stokenchurch Medical Center Oxford Road, HP14 3SX – South East England Where to get lipo in Bristol? Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton Where to get lipo in Northampton? Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands We also have consulting rooms in Milton Keynes where you can have consultations with one of our patient coordinators. To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here.

  • What areas can be treated with traditional liposuction?

    Liposuction is suitable for fat removal of any area of the body including;

    • Buttocks
    • Hips
    • Thighs
    • Abdomen/ stomach
    • Chin
    • Upper Arms
    • Knees
    Usually surgical liposuction is advised for larger areas of fat removal but in most cases, Vaser Lipo is also a suitable method of fat removal for all of the locations listed above. Vaser lipo is a lot less invasive than traditional liposuction and is known for having a shorter recovery time with minimal bruising. For smaller areas like bingo wings/ arm fat and double chin fat removal; CoolSculpting may be suggested as an alternative. Your surgeon will advise on the best liposuction method for you at your consultation.

  • What is liposuction?

    Liposuction or traditional liposuction is a surgical procedure used to remove excess fat through the use of a device called a cannula which is then attached to a liposuction machine. The cannula is inserted into the fat layer the skin where it removes the unwanted fatty deposits creating a smoother, slimmer and more contoured appearance to the areas being treated. We also offer a range of different liposuction techniques at The Private Clinic including: Vaser Liposuction Vaser lipo is a procedure performed under local anaesthetic with sedation. A small probe is used to transmit the ultrasound energy and liquefy fat cells prior to removal through a gentle suction process. Vaser Hi-Def Vaser Hi-Def liposuction is an advanced body sculpting technique that creates a more athletic and sculpted appearance. The procedure involves the removal of both superficial and deep fat that surrounds the muscle groups to enhance the visibility of underlying toning and musculature. Vaser Mid-Def Vaser Mid-Def liposuction is a specific technique that is halfway between Vaser Hi-Def and standard Vaser Lipo. The results are a slight increase in definition and shadowing but with a much softer appearance. Vaser 4D Vaser 4D liposuction is a more advanced form of vaser liposuction that works to improve the overall proportion of your body by removing fat and defining your underlying muscles. Vaser 360 Vaser 360 liposuction is a specific technique used on paitents seeking fat reduction in the lower body. The treatment targets the buttock crease, thighs, upper legs and knees for a full circumferential toned and firmer appearance to the legs. Find out more about our wide range of fat reduction treatments here.

  • What does surgical liposuction involve?

    Liposuction is usually carried out under general anaesthetic although other types of anaesthesia could be requested if appropriate. Your cosmetic surgeon will mark the areas on your body where fat is going to be removed and these areas are then injected with a solution containing anaesthetic and medication, to reduce blood loss, bruising and swelling. The fat cells are then broken up using high-frequency vibrations, a weak laser pulse or a high pressure water jet. Each surgeon has different liposuction techniques and preferences but this will be discussed with you at your consultation. Small incisions are then made in the areas being treated and a suction tube attached to a vacuum machine is inserted. The surgeon will move the suction tube back and forth to help loosen fat in the areas being treated and suck it out. The areas are then bandaged up and a drain may be inserted to help with excess fluid in the initial couple of days post-procedure. You will then be fitted into a support garment to help reduce swelling and returned to a recovery room to recover from the anaesthetic. Vaser Liposuction is a great alternative for patients who are worried about the general anaesthetic involved in surgical liposuction. Vaser lipo procedures are performed under local anaesthetic with sedation. The procedure involves using a small probe to transmit ultrasound energy and liquefy fat cells prior to removal through a gentle suction process. The procedure is a lot less invasive meaning the downtime is minimal and the risk of bruising is reduced.

  • What type of anaesthesia is used in traditional liposuction?

    In most instances, surgical liposuction takes place under general anaesthetic. You will be gently put to sleep to ensure comfort throughout the procedure. In some cases liposuction can be carried out under local anaesthetic but this is usually for smaller cases. The type of anaesthesia used can be discussed with your surgeon at your consultation.

  • Am I suitable for surgical liposuction?

    Patients who have stubborn areas of fat that cannot be reduced with diet or exercise are the best candidates for surgical liposuction. Liposuction is not a method of weight loss and you should be as close to your ideal weight as possible before the procedure. If you are unsure give us a call to discuss the areas you are interested in treating. To find out if you are suitable for liposuction you will need to come in for a consultation with one of our surgeons who will be able to assess you and go through your medical history.

  • Liposuction After Procedure

  • When can I see results after liposuction?

    You are likely to see results immediately after surgery however you will be required to wear a compression garment after surgery so you may not be able to see straight away. Bruising and swelling may occur which can alter the appearance of your results slightly. The majority of patients are able to see great results after 6 weeks but the final results of your procedure are best seen 6-12 months afterwards once all swelling has resolved. The results after vaser liposuction are instant although patients will be required to wear a compression garment immediately following surgery. Standard vaser results are very subtle and natural. If you prefer a more athletic, defined or sculpted appearance, VASER Hi-Def or VASER Mid-Def may be better options for you. To see vaser liposuction results click here to see our before and after photo gallery.

  • Is liposuction safe?

    Surgical liposuction is a safe procedure but, as with any surgical procedures there are always risks and potential complications that may arise such as; Bleeding, bruising, infection, swelling, scarring, asymmetry, contour irregularities and seromas. During your consultation your cosmetic surgeon will go through the procedure and all of the risks and complication to ensure you fully understand them before going ahead with the procedure. We offer a comprehensive and extensive post-operative care programme, which includes detailed post-operative instructions and follow-up appointments with nurses and surgeons at our clinics.

  • What is recovery like after liposuction?

    We usually recommend that you spend the first 10 days after your procedure taking it easy and relaxing. Bruising is common during this time so you may be feeling tender and uncomfortable. It is best to listen to your body and do not push yourself too soon as this will affect your recovery time. Exercise or any strenuous activities should be avoided for at least 4 weeks. Vigorous lifting and extreme sports should be avoided for 6 weeks after surgery. This is all to help reduce swelling and improve your healing rate. After 3 weeks, you can expect to be feeling like yourself again. Vaser Liposuction Recovery time The recovery time after Vaser Liposuction is shorter with many patients feeling able to return to their daily routines quite quickly following the procedure. We recommend 2-5 days off work depending on the areas being treated. Our 24-hour patient helpline is there to ensure you are always in the best of hands should you have any concerns or questions post-surgery.

  • Will I need to wear a garment after liposuction?

    Liposuction patients will be required to wear a surgical compression garment at all times apart from when showering for the initial 3-4 weeks after your procedure and then you may only need to wear it during the day for an additional 3 weeks but this will depend on how your own healing times and you will be advised on this at your post-op appointment. The garment will only need to be worn in the areas that have been treated and you will be measured for these at your post-op examination so that they will fit you correctly and comfortably. The purpose of post-surgical garments is too aid your healing process. The garment adds external pressure to the areas helping to reduce swelling and bruising from occurring and aids your body circulation.

  • Will I be able to wash my liposuction garment?

    You will be able to wash your garment and they would usually have washing instructions attached. We advise not removing your garment for at least 2-3 days post procedure. You may find it useful to purchase a second compression garment to wear whilst one is in the wash as we don’t advise that you go for too long without wearing a garment in the early stages of your recovery.

  • Will I have scars after liposuction?

    Liposuction incisions are very small and usually less than 5mm. The incisions are made close to areas where fat is being removed. Due to their small size, stitches are not usually required. They may initially appear red but should gradually fade over time. Your surgeon will be able to discuss where your scars are likely to be at your consultation and will offer scar care advice post-surgery.

  • How soon can I exercise after liposuction?

    Overall, exercise and sports should be avoided until 6 weeks post procedure and at this point you should receive advice from your surgeon as to whether they feel you are able to continue or not. Some patients start to get back into gentle exercise at 4 weeks but listen to your body, it will tell you if you are not ready. You can also phone into clinic for any additional aftercare advice if you are unsure or concerned.

  • How long do I need to stay off work after liposuction?

    The amount of time you stay off work after liposuction will depend on the job role that you are in. Usually we recommend for patients to take at least 1 week off for office based jobs. If you are involved in heavy lifting or other strenuous physical activity during your job role then you may need to take a little longer. Your surgeon will be able to discuss this in your aftercare plan with you.

  • Will I need drains after a liposuction?

    Liposuction patients usually require drains to help aid recovery and reduce swelling. Surgical drains are used to remove blood, pus and other fluids from the incision sites. The drains are normally in place for up to 5 days before being removed by the surgeon or a nurse in clinic. Drains after vaser lipo Drains are also used after vaser lipo when a significant amount of fat has been removed. Your surgeon will be able to discuss surgical drains in more detail at your consultation.

  • When can I drive again after liposuction?

    You will not be able to drive yourself home after your procedure. We advise that you bring someone with you that can transport you home and stay with you for at least 24 hours post-procedure. Once you are able to move about without any discomfort, have stopped taking any medications and are generally feeling fit and well you will be able to start driving again. Please ensure that you are able to move comfortably within the vehicle and perform an emergency stop with ease. This is usually between 7-10 days. If you are unsure then don’t hesitate to use our 24-hour patient helpline to ask for advice. You should also check the details within your insurance to ensure that you are appropriately covered for driving post-procedure.

  • Liposuction before Procedure

  • What is the best type of liposuction?

    There are a wide range of different liposuction treatments including traditional liposuction, vaser liposuction, laser liposuction, MPX laser, body jet liposuction and many more. There is no clinical evidence to suggest that any of these are better or even safer than the other. The best type of liposuction is liposuction that has been performed by an expert surgeon or doctor on suitable patients. The best results come from the skill and experience of the surgeon and from the aftercare provided too. Book a consultation to find out more about our experienced surgeons/doctors.

  • How much does Liposuction cost?

    How much does liposuction cost in the UK? The Private Clinic sees over 15,000 new patients every year and perform over 10,000 procedures, with one of the highest patients’ satisfaction in the sector, Trustpilot 9.4, 5 star rating, 96% would recommend us to their friends and family. We are a multi award winning provider and have been voted the Aesthetic award for Best UK Clinic Group 2017. The Private Clinic prides itself on its commitment to Medical Expertise, Patient Care and Satisfaction, Honest advice and most importantly Results. We are above all committed to Quality. Please feel free to contact us for any Liposuction advice or to book a consultation with one of our expert Lipo surgeons. Liposuction Cost can be part of your decision to undergo a procedure but it should never be the deciding factor. For more information about The Private Clinic, our experience and medical expertise click here Surgical Liposuction cost Surgical liposuction costs start from £3,690 (1 area) – but this will vary depending on the number of areas being treated and the length of your procedure. Vaser Lipo cost VASER Liposuction costs start from £3,100 (1 area) depending on the number of areas being treated. Vaser liposuction can be performed under local anaesthetic with sedation and is a lot less invasive than Surgical liposuction resulting in a shorter recovery period and less bruising. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Consultations with our liposuction plastic surgeons are £100 or consultations with our liposuction doctors are £50 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our liposuction doctors or liposuction plastic surgeons are £50 at our clinics in Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton.

  • What are the different types of liposuction?

    We offer a range of different liposuction procedures here at The Private Clinic. Liposuction This is known as traditional or surgical liposuction. It is usually recommended for patients who are having a larger amount of fat taken out or are having a number of different body areas being treated. It is usually performed under general anaesthetic for patient comfort but you will normally be able to go home the same day. Vaser Liposuction Vaser liposuction uses ultrasound energy to help liquefy the fat before it is removed. It is usually performed under local anaesthetic or sedation. Vaser liposuction is not as invasive as traditional liposuction and involves minimal downtime with less risk of bruising and swelling. Most patients are able to return to work and their daily routines a lot quicker post-procedure. The Private Clinic is the UK’s leading provider of VASER Liposuction performing more vaser liposuction procedures than any other clinic in the UK. Micro Lipo Micro Lipo is similar to Vaser Liposuction however it uses a much smaller cannula making it ideal for treating small areas of stubborn fat such as the neck, chin, knees and arms. Vaser Hi-Def Vaser hi-def is a specialised technique of vaser liposuction which works to sculpt and define muscles for a more athletic result. The Private Clinic are one of very few groups in the UK to be certified to perform the revolutionary treatment as it requires extensive experience and well-practised skill in VASER treatments which our liposuction surgeons excel in. Vaser Mid-Def Vaser Mid-Def is The Private Clinic’s own, unique Vaser lipo technique that offers results in-between Vaser Lipo and Vaser Hi-Def. It is designed to offer a more defined and athletic appearance but not as extreme as the results of Vaser Hi-Def. Vaser 4D Vaser 4D is a specialised form of Vaser Lipo that is similar to Vaser Hi-Def which works to highlight your muscles. Vaser 4D instead is designed to sculpt your muscles following their natural movements and to create a 4D effect. Vaser 360 Vaser 360 is a fat removal and body contouring vaser technique that specifically treats the upper leg circumferentially targeting the thighs, knees and buttock crease. Your initial consultation with our expert surgeons will allow them to assess you and offer advice on which liposuction procedure is going to be right for you giving you the results that you desire to achieve.

  • Is there a liposuction clinic near me?

    Where to get lipo in London? Our London clinic in located on 98 Harley Street, W1G 7HZ. The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an expert liposuction surgeon located near to you. Where to get lipo in Manchester? Manchester – 25 St John Street, M3 4DT Where to get lipo in Birmingham? Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands Where to get liposuction in Leeds? Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire Where to get lipo in Bucks? Buckinghamshire – Stokenchurch Medical Center Oxford Road, HP14 3SX – South East England Where to get lipo in Bristol? Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton Where to get lipo in Northampton? Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands We also have consulting rooms in Milton Keynes where you can have consultations with one of our patient coordinators. To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here.

  • What areas can be treated with traditional liposuction?

    Liposuction is suitable for fat removal of any area of the body including;

    • Buttocks
    • Hips
    • Thighs
    • Abdomen/ stomach
    • Chin
    • Upper Arms
    • Knees
    Usually surgical liposuction is advised for larger areas of fat removal but in most cases, Vaser Lipo is also a suitable method of fat removal for all of the locations listed above. Vaser lipo is a lot less invasive than traditional liposuction and is known for having a shorter recovery time with minimal bruising. For smaller areas like bingo wings/ arm fat and double chin fat removal; CoolSculpting may be suggested as an alternative. Your surgeon will advise on the best liposuction method for you at your consultation.

  • What does surgical liposuction involve?

    Liposuction is usually carried out under general anaesthetic although other types of anaesthesia could be requested if appropriate. Your cosmetic surgeon will mark the areas on your body where fat is going to be removed and these areas are then injected with a solution containing anaesthetic and medication, to reduce blood loss, bruising and swelling. The fat cells are then broken up using high-frequency vibrations, a weak laser pulse or a high pressure water jet. Each surgeon has different liposuction techniques and preferences but this will be discussed with you at your consultation. Small incisions are then made in the areas being treated and a suction tube attached to a vacuum machine is inserted. The surgeon will move the suction tube back and forth to help loosen fat in the areas being treated and suck it out. The areas are then bandaged up and a drain may be inserted to help with excess fluid in the initial couple of days post-procedure. You will then be fitted into a support garment to help reduce swelling and returned to a recovery room to recover from the anaesthetic. Vaser Liposuction is a great alternative for patients who are worried about the general anaesthetic involved in surgical liposuction. Vaser lipo procedures are performed under local anaesthetic with sedation. The procedure involves using a small probe to transmit ultrasound energy and liquefy fat cells prior to removal through a gentle suction process. The procedure is a lot less invasive meaning the downtime is minimal and the risk of bruising is reduced.

  • What type of anaesthesia is used in traditional liposuction?

    In most instances, surgical liposuction takes place under general anaesthetic. You will be gently put to sleep to ensure comfort throughout the procedure. In some cases liposuction can be carried out under local anaesthetic but this is usually for smaller cases. The type of anaesthesia used can be discussed with your surgeon at your consultation.

  • Am I suitable for surgical liposuction?

    Patients who have stubborn areas of fat that cannot be reduced with diet or exercise are the best candidates for surgical liposuction. Liposuction is not a method of weight loss and you should be as close to your ideal weight as possible before the procedure. If you are unsure give us a call to discuss the areas you are interested in treating. To find out if you are suitable for liposuction you will need to come in for a consultation with one of our surgeons who will be able to assess you and go through your medical history.

  • Does liposuction work?

    Liposuction is a safe and effective way to permanently remove unwanted excess fat deposits from the body. As you begin to lose weight through diet and exercise, your fat cells shrink in size but they do not disappear. When you have liposuction, the fat cells are removed from the body which means it is very unlikely that they will be able to develop and increase in size again. Our surgeons will be able to explain how liposuction works in your consultation.

  • Why do I need to stop smoking before liposuction?

    Our surgeons prefer patients to quit smoking before going ahead with any procedure at The Private Clinic. This is because smoking often causes the skin to heal poorly and cause unnecessary complications post-procedure and delayed recovery. To allow your body to heal properly, we recommend that patients quit smoking as soon as you make the choice to undergo liposuction or we recommend that you at least stop 2 weeks before and do not smoke for at least 2 weeks after surgery. Resuming smoking during recovery before your incision sites have healed puts you at risk of poor healing, infection, and other dangerous complications. It is important to be honest in your medical questionnaire and make your surgeon aware if you smoke, take any medication or have any medical issues that may affect your recovery time.

  • Liposuction General Procedure

  • What is liposuction?

    Liposuction or traditional liposuction is a surgical procedure used to remove excess fat through the use of a device called a cannula which is then attached to a liposuction machine. The cannula is inserted into the fat layer the skin where it removes the unwanted fatty deposits creating a smoother, slimmer and more contoured appearance to the areas being treated. We also offer a range of different liposuction techniques at The Private Clinic including: Vaser Liposuction Vaser lipo is a procedure performed under local anaesthetic with sedation. A small probe is used to transmit the ultrasound energy and liquefy fat cells prior to removal through a gentle suction process. Vaser Hi-Def Vaser Hi-Def liposuction is an advanced body sculpting technique that creates a more athletic and sculpted appearance. The procedure involves the removal of both superficial and deep fat that surrounds the muscle groups to enhance the visibility of underlying toning and musculature. Vaser Mid-Def Vaser Mid-Def liposuction is a specific technique that is halfway between Vaser Hi-Def and standard Vaser Lipo. The results are a slight increase in definition and shadowing but with a much softer appearance. Vaser 4D Vaser 4D liposuction is a more advanced form of vaser liposuction that works to improve the overall proportion of your body by removing fat and defining your underlying muscles. Vaser 360 Vaser 360 liposuction is a specific technique used on paitents seeking fat reduction in the lower body. The treatment targets the buttock crease, thighs, upper legs and knees for a full circumferential toned and firmer appearance to the legs. Find out more about our wide range of fat reduction treatments here.

  • What are the alternatives to surgical liposuction?

    Liposuction may not be the best surgical procedure for every patient. If you have loose or sagging skin then liposuction would not be suitable for you. You will be better suited to an abdominoplasty/tummy tuck, thigh or arm lift depending on which area you are looking to target. Liposuction is designed to target areas of unwanted fat but it will not be able to improve the appearance of loose skin. Surgical liposuction is usually reserved for multiple or slightly larger amounts of fat. If you are just looking to improve a small area such as neck or arm fat then micro lipo or vaser lipo may be a more suitable alternative to help you achieve the best results. To find out which treatment is best for you, we recommend coming in for a consultation with one of our expert surgeons who can offer their advice to help you. The Private Clinic are specialists in Micro, Traditional and Vaser liposuction procedures.

  • Is it possible to combine liposuction with another procedure?

    Liposuction is commonly performed alongside other cosmetic surgery procedures such as tummy tucks, male chest reductions and arm lifts for example. Your surgeon will let you know what they believe will give you the best results. Pairing the two procedures together allows patients to obtain the benefits of both, while reducing the pain and recovery time needed if both procedures were performed separately. Your surgeon will be able to advise if a combined procedure would be suitable for you at a consultation.

  • Liposuction Day of Procedure

  • How long does traditional liposuction take?

    The time it takes to complete liposuction surgery will depend on the amount of fat being removed and the amount of areas being treated but usually surgeries tend to last between 1 – 3 hours. To find out more information about liposuction surgery give us a call or use our online contact form to book a consultation.

  • Is liposuction painful?

    Patients are usually under general anaesthetic during liposuction but some may be suitable for local anaesthetic. You should not be in pain during the surgical procedure but if you do only have local anaesthetic then you may feel a little uncomfortable at times. Your surgeon will be able to discuss what anaesthetic is going to be used at your consultation. After the procedure you will have some local anaesthetic remaining in the areas so the pain will be minimal. You may begin to feel sore and this may become very tender 2-4 days after surgery but this should be easily managed with painkillers. Tenderness in the areas treated may continue for up to 4 weeks but should begin to subside after this. Our 24-hour patient helpline is there to ensure you are always in the best of hands should you have any concerns post-surgery.

  • Will I need to stay overnight after liposuction?

    In the majority of cases we aim to get patients home to recover on the same day. In some circumstances it may be essential for the patient to stay overnight but this will be discussed at your consultation with your surgeon. You will be required to stay after your surgical procedure for a couple of hours to ensure that you are medically well. You will then be released by your surgeon with an aftercare plan detailing your recovery.

  • Breast Implant Removal & Replacement

  • Should I have my implants removed or replaced?

    The answer to this question depends on the reasons why you are removing your original implants and also what look you are trying to achieve. If you like the appearance of your breast implants but want them removed because they are faulty or have come to the end of their lifetime then a replacement of implants would be the best option. However if you feel your implants are too large, and just want a more natural appearance to your bust then it is best to have the implants removed. If you are feeling unsure then we recommend visiting one of our expert breast surgeons who will be able to listen to your thoughts and concerns about surgery and help you make a more informed decision. They will also be able to assess you in person and give their advice on what you can expect to achieve from surgery.

  • Is breast implant replacement the same as a breast augmentation?

    In most instances, a breast implant replacement or exchange is very similar to breast augmentation. It does depend on the reason for the revision however if the patient is choosing similar sized implants and there are no other issues then it will be just like a breast augmentation. If the patient needs to have the pocket adjusted to fit a larger implant, scar tissue or capsules removed or if they require a breast lift then this will be a more complex procedure. The procedure will be explained in full detail by your surgeon at your consultation so you will be fully informed ahead of making your decision. Aftercare advice will also be provided to you following surgery and you will be able to contact us 24/7 using our patient helpline if you have any questions or concerns.

  • Breast implant exchange, how much bigger or smaller can I go?

    One of the most common reasons that patients decide to have a breast implant exchange is because they are not happy with the size of their current implants and want to go bigger or smaller. At The Private Clinic, we give our patients the chance to go through the different sizes of implants during their consultation or at a second sizing appointment. When you decide to exchange your implants, this process will happen again although it can be difficult to work out the best size when you already have implants in place. Using the sizer bra and any 3D imaging device can give you inaccurate results to base your decision off of. In these instances, your surgeon will take measurements of your breast base and shape to help decide on an implant that is going to be suitable for your body as well as give you the results that you are hoping for. If you did not have your original implants with us, then it is useful to bring along information about what size, type, profile and placement of your current implants. The amount that you can look to increase or decrease the size of your implant depends on your tissue and chest size. In some people who have very tight tissue and a small chest it is not advisable to increase the size of the implant too much as it will distort the natural tissue and be too wide for your chest. When it comes to choosing smaller implants, in some cases you may require a breast uplift procedure as the tissue around the implant may have been stretched to fit the previous implant and changing to a smaller implant could cause the skin to sag. In these cases, it will depend on the size of your current implant in comparison to the size that you are changing too. Your options for breast implant exchange/replacement surgery will all be discussed in consultation with one of our expert breast surgeons.

  • How much does Breast Implant Removal and Replacement cost?

    The Private Clinic sees over 15,000 new patients every year and perform over 10,000 procedures, with one of the highest –patients’ satisfaction in the sector, Trustpilot 9.4, 5 star rating, 96% would recommend us to their friends and family. We are a multi award winning provider and have been voted the Aesthetic award for Best UK Clinic Group 2017. The Private Clinic prides itself on its commitment to Medical Expertise, Patient Care and Satisfaction, Honest advice and most importantly Results. We are above all committed to Quality. Please feel free to contact us for any advice or to book a consultation with one of our expert Breast surgeons. Breast Implants removal and replacement cost can be part of your decision to undergo a procedure but it should never be the deciding factor. For more information about The Private Clinic, our experience and medical expertise click here. The cost of removal of breast implants is approximately £4,650. The cost of removal and replacement of breast implants is approximately £5,830. We don’t follow a one-price-fits-all policy and prices are quoted on a case by case basis. You will be given an accurate quote for your requirements following your consultation. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Please note all consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon.

  • Do you have an breast implant removal or replacement clinic near me?

    The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an expert breast surgeon located near to you where you can discuss impant removal or replacement procedures. Our clinics are in; • London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ • Manchester – 25 St John Street, M3 4DT • Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands • Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire • Buckinghamshire – Stokenchurch Medical Center Oxford Road, HP14 3SX – South East England • Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton • Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands We also have consulting rooms in Milton Keynes where you can have consultations with one of our patient coordinators. To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here.

  • Is Breast Implant removal right for me?

    Breast implant removal is a personal choice but many patients who do decide to have their implants removed are; • Not happy with the way their breast implants look. • Have experienced shifting, sagging, or changes due to age, weight fluctuations, or pregnancy. • Have developed a capsular contracture which means the scar tissue around the implants is getting harder or tighter. • One or both implants have leaked or ruptured. • Simply want to return to their original breast size. Deciding if to go ahead with breast implant removal is generally only a decision that you can make, but to help you feel more informed about the procedure and what to expect we recommend booking a consultation with one of our expert breast surgeons who will be able to explain the procedure in more detail and answer any questions that you may have.

  • Are your breast implants too big?

    If you feel your breasts implants are too big following a breast augmentation it is best to wait at least 6-12 months to ensure that all swelling has subsided and that your implants have settled fully. If you are still unhappy with the size of your implants after this time then we would encourage you to return to your original surgeon to discuss this however we appreciate that this is not always possible. We are happy to see patients who have had surgery elsewhere to discuss implant removal or replacement. Our surgeons will work with you to help you achieve your desired goals. See patient Toula Rose’s story to hear how she underwent a breast re-augmentation to correct implants that were too large.

  • Can my implants only be removed by the surgeon who did my original procedure?

    You do not need to see your original surgeon but we suggest that you try and get hold of details such as the size and type of your current implants and any other relevant information as this will help your new surgeon create an appropriate treatment plan for you. If you want your implants removed because you feel they have ruptured or you have developed a capsular contracture then we would advise that you see your original plastic surgeon as they will have all the information about your implants to enable them to decide on the best course of action.

  • What should I expect during breast implant removal surgery?

    Breast implant removal surgery will take place in hospital. After your pre-op checks have been carried out your surgeon will meet with you again to go over what is going to happen and answer any questions. You will then be taken to the theatre and general anaesthetic will be administered. Whilst under general anaesthetic, the surgical procedure will take place. Your surgeon will aim to remove your implants through your original incision. The implant will be removed and the area cleaned. If requested, a full enbloc procedure will be carried out at this stage. Your incision will then be closed and taped and you will be taken to recovery to recover from the anaesthetic. After the procedure, you will be returned to your room where you will be under observation until your doctor has cleared you to go. Usually, breast implant removal procedures are performed as a day case procedure so you will be able to return home the same day as your procedure.

  • What is an Enbloc?

    An enbloc is when the implant and capsule are removed in one piece with the implant still within the balloon of the capsule. At The Private Clinic, we have surgeons who will remove the old capsule via en bloc capsulectomy when it is safe and appropriate for the patient. There are some instances where an enbloc is not possible. This is when the capsule is too thin or delicate to be removed in one piece or if the capsule is adhering to vital tissues. In these instances, surgeons can work to remove as much as the capsule as possible with the implant and then carefully remove any remaining scar tissue from the breast pocket. In some cases, however, removal of the capsule could cause damage to vital tissues; for example, if scar tissue is tightly attached to the rib cage, removing the tissue could risk injuring the lungs. In these cases, portions of the capsule will remain in place but we will take precautions to allow proper healing including sterilising the remaining capsules. For more information about enbloc procedures, please state this ahead of booking your procedure to ensure that you are given a consultation with a breast surgeon who specialises in offering this service.

  • Breast Implant Removal & Replacement General

  • Should I have my implants removed or replaced?

    The answer to this question depends on the reasons why you are removing your original implants and also what look you are trying to achieve. If you like the appearance of your breast implants but want them removed because they are faulty or have come to the end of their lifetime then a replacement of implants would be the best option. However if you feel your implants are too large, and just want a more natural appearance to your bust then it is best to have the implants removed. If you are feeling unsure then we recommend visiting one of our expert breast surgeons who will be able to listen to your thoughts and concerns about surgery and help you make a more informed decision. They will also be able to assess you in person and give their advice on what you can expect to achieve from surgery.

  • Is breast implant replacement the same as a breast augmentation?

    In most instances, a breast implant replacement or exchange is very similar to breast augmentation. It does depend on the reason for the revision however if the patient is choosing similar sized implants and there are no other issues then it will be just like a breast augmentation. If the patient needs to have the pocket adjusted to fit a larger implant, scar tissue or capsules removed or if they require a breast lift then this will be a more complex procedure. The procedure will be explained in full detail by your surgeon at your consultation so you will be fully informed ahead of making your decision. Aftercare advice will also be provided to you following surgery and you will be able to contact us 24/7 using our patient helpline if you have any questions or concerns.

  • Breast implant exchange, how much bigger or smaller can I go?

    One of the most common reasons that patients decide to have a breast implant exchange is because they are not happy with the size of their current implants and want to go bigger or smaller. At The Private Clinic, we give our patients the chance to go through the different sizes of implants during their consultation or at a second sizing appointment. When you decide to exchange your implants, this process will happen again although it can be difficult to work out the best size when you already have implants in place. Using the sizer bra and any 3D imaging device can give you inaccurate results to base your decision off of. In these instances, your surgeon will take measurements of your breast base and shape to help decide on an implant that is going to be suitable for your body as well as give you the results that you are hoping for. If you did not have your original implants with us, then it is useful to bring along information about what size, type, profile and placement of your current implants. The amount that you can look to increase or decrease the size of your implant depends on your tissue and chest size. In some people who have very tight tissue and a small chest it is not advisable to increase the size of the implant too much as it will distort the natural tissue and be too wide for your chest. When it comes to choosing smaller implants, in some cases you may require a breast uplift procedure as the tissue around the implant may have been stretched to fit the previous implant and changing to a smaller implant could cause the skin to sag. In these cases, it will depend on the size of your current implant in comparison to the size that you are changing too. Your options for breast implant exchange/replacement surgery will all be discussed in consultation with one of our expert breast surgeons.

  • How much does Breast Implant Removal and Replacement cost?

    The Private Clinic sees over 15,000 new patients every year and perform over 10,000 procedures, with one of the highest –patients’ satisfaction in the sector, Trustpilot 9.4, 5 star rating, 96% would recommend us to their friends and family. We are a multi award winning provider and have been voted the Aesthetic award for Best UK Clinic Group 2017. The Private Clinic prides itself on its commitment to Medical Expertise, Patient Care and Satisfaction, Honest advice and most importantly Results. We are above all committed to Quality. Please feel free to contact us for any advice or to book a consultation with one of our expert Breast surgeons. Breast Implants removal and replacement cost can be part of your decision to undergo a procedure but it should never be the deciding factor. For more information about The Private Clinic, our experience and medical expertise click here. The cost of removal of breast implants is approximately £4,650. The cost of removal and replacement of breast implants is approximately £5,830. We don’t follow a one-price-fits-all policy and prices are quoted on a case by case basis. You will be given an accurate quote for your requirements following your consultation. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Please note all consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon.

  • Do you have an breast implant removal or replacement clinic near me?

    The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an expert breast surgeon located near to you where you can discuss impant removal or replacement procedures. Our clinics are in; • London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ • Manchester – 25 St John Street, M3 4DT • Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands • Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire • Buckinghamshire – Stokenchurch Medical Center Oxford Road, HP14 3SX – South East England • Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton • Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands We also have consulting rooms in Milton Keynes where you can have consultations with one of our patient coordinators. To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here.

  • What is capsular contracture?

    Capsular Contracture is when the tissue that naturally forms around your breast implant becomes tighter and it squeezes the implant. This can cause your breast to feel hard, look misshapen and come sometimes be painful. Capsular contracture is more common for those who have experienced it before and this will be discussed in more detail with your surgeon at your consultation. Capsular contracture is one of the most common reasons for breast augmentation revision surgery. There is a grading system for capsular contracture called The Baker System. Baker I and Baker II are normal and do not require treatment. • Baker I / Grade 1 – Formation of scar tissue around the implant is not causing firmness or a change to the size, shape or texture of the breasts. Breasts are soft and look natural. • Baker II / Grade 2 – Patient has some firmness around the implant, but there is no distortion in the appearance of the breast. • Baker III / Grade 3 – Breasts are firm and may appear abnormal in shape such as round, high, and bulgy on top. • Baker IV / Grade 4 – Very similar to Grade 3 but patients will also experience breast soreness and may find their breasts tender and painful to touch. Capsular contracture is often diagnosed on physical examination and doesn’t usually require any other special tests. It can occur on one or both implants and generally occurs during the healing process. It is not unusual however to have capsular contracture occur within the first 2 years of the implants being placed. Capsular contracture that occurs beyond this point may need to be checked for ruptures. Ruptured implants are a common cause of late-onset capsular contraction. Revision surgery for capsular contracture will involve removing the entire capsule which is the lining around your implant and then you can either have the original implant removed or replaced.

  • Breast Implant Removal & Replacement Before

  • Is Breast Implant removal right for me?

    Breast implant removal is a personal choice but many patients who do decide to have their implants removed are; • Not happy with the way their breast implants look. • Have experienced shifting, sagging, or changes due to age, weight fluctuations, or pregnancy. • Have developed a capsular contracture which means the scar tissue around the implants is getting harder or tighter. • One or both implants have leaked or ruptured. • Simply want to return to their original breast size. Deciding if to go ahead with breast implant removal is generally only a decision that you can make, but to help you feel more informed about the procedure and what to expect we recommend booking a consultation with one of our expert breast surgeons who will be able to explain the procedure in more detail and answer any questions that you may have.

  • What is capsular contracture?

    Capsular Contracture is when the tissue that naturally forms around your breast implant becomes tighter and it squeezes the implant. This can cause your breast to feel hard, look misshapen and come sometimes be painful. Capsular contracture is more common for those who have experienced it before and this will be discussed in more detail with your surgeon at your consultation. Capsular contracture is one of the most common reasons for breast augmentation revision surgery. There is a grading system for capsular contracture called The Baker System. Baker I and Baker II are normal and do not require treatment. • Baker I / Grade 1 – Formation of scar tissue around the implant is not causing firmness or a change to the size, shape or texture of the breasts. Breasts are soft and look natural. • Baker II / Grade 2 – Patient has some firmness around the implant, but there is no distortion in the appearance of the breast. • Baker III / Grade 3 – Breasts are firm and may appear abnormal in shape such as round, high, and bulgy on top. • Baker IV / Grade 4 – Very similar to Grade 3 but patients will also experience breast soreness and may find their breasts tender and painful to touch. Capsular contracture is often diagnosed on physical examination and doesn’t usually require any other special tests. It can occur on one or both implants and generally occurs during the healing process. It is not unusual however to have capsular contracture occur within the first 2 years of the implants being placed. Capsular contracture that occurs beyond this point may need to be checked for ruptures. Ruptured implants are a common cause of late-onset capsular contraction. Revision surgery for capsular contracture will involve removing the entire capsule which is the lining around your implant and then you can either have the original implant removed or replaced.

  • Can my implants only be removed by the surgeon who did my original procedure?

    You do not need to see your original surgeon but we suggest that you try and get hold of details such as the size and type of your current implants and any other relevant information as this will help your new surgeon create an appropriate treatment plan for you. If you want your implants removed because you feel they have ruptured or you have developed a capsular contracture then we would advise that you see your original plastic surgeon as they will have all the information about your implants to enable them to decide on the best course of action.

  • What is an Enbloc?

    An enbloc is when the implant and capsule are removed in one piece with the implant still within the balloon of the capsule. At The Private Clinic, we have surgeons who will remove the old capsule via en bloc capsulectomy when it is safe and appropriate for the patient. There are some instances where an enbloc is not possible. This is when the capsule is too thin or delicate to be removed in one piece or if the capsule is adhering to vital tissues. In these instances, surgeons can work to remove as much as the capsule as possible with the implant and then carefully remove any remaining scar tissue from the breast pocket. In some cases, however, removal of the capsule could cause damage to vital tissues; for example, if scar tissue is tightly attached to the rib cage, removing the tissue could risk injuring the lungs. In these cases, portions of the capsule will remain in place but we will take precautions to allow proper healing including sterilising the remaining capsules. For more information about enbloc procedures, please state this ahead of booking your procedure to ensure that you are given a consultation with a breast surgeon who specialises in offering this service.

  • Breast Implant Removal & Replacement Day of

  • What should I expect during breast implant removal surgery?

    Breast implant removal surgery will take place in hospital. After your pre-op checks have been carried out your surgeon will meet with you again to go over what is going to happen and answer any questions. You will then be taken to the theatre and general anaesthetic will be administered. Whilst under general anaesthetic, the surgical procedure will take place. Your surgeon will aim to remove your implants through your original incision. The implant will be removed and the area cleaned. If requested, a full enbloc procedure will be carried out at this stage. Your incision will then be closed and taped and you will be taken to recovery to recover from the anaesthetic. After the procedure, you will be returned to your room where you will be under observation until your doctor has cleared you to go. Usually, breast implant removal procedures are performed as a day case procedure so you will be able to return home the same day as your procedure.

  • Can I have my implants removed and then replaced in one procedure?

    If you are having your implants replaced then this is most commonly done as one procedure. However, if you are having the implants removed due to a medical reason then your surgeon may remove the implants and perform the replacement as a separate surgical procedure once any infection has cleared which can take up to 3 months. The details of how your procedure will be performed will be discussed at your consultation where you will be able to ask any additional questions to ensure that you are fully informed before deciding to go ahead with your procedure.

  • Breast Implant Removal & Replacement After

  • Are your breast implants too big?

    If you feel your breasts implants are too big following a breast augmentation it is best to wait at least 6-12 months to ensure that all swelling has subsided and that your implants have settled fully. If you are still unhappy with the size of your implants after this time then we would encourage you to return to your original surgeon to discuss this however we appreciate that this is not always possible. We are happy to see patients who have had surgery elsewhere to discuss implant removal or replacement. Our surgeons will work with you to help you achieve your desired goals. See patient Toula Rose’s story to hear how she underwent a breast re-augmentation to correct implants that were too large.

  • How long should I wait before removing or changing my breast implants?

    The length of time you should wait before undergoing removal or replacement surgery will depend on your reasons for surgery. If you are experiencing complications or issues such as a ruptured implant or capsular contraction then this can be performed as soon as possible to relieve you of any pain or discomfort. If you are not experiencing any complications but are just not happy with the appearance of your implants then we do remind patients that it can take longer than a few weeks to see the true results from breast enlargement surgery. Swelling will start to subside over 4-6 weeks and after this stage, implants will begin to settle. The final results from a breast augmentation may take up to 6 months to evolve. Overall, we do recommend that patients wait 6 months before making a decision on revision surgery.

  • How many times can I have revision surgery?

    Revisional surgery should not be overused, the fewer the better. Patients who come across complications will have to have necessary medical revision surgery but when it comes to changing the size of the implant, these cosmetic revisions should be performed as infrequently as possible. When patients wish to change the size of their implants, we offer a range of sizing consultations to help them make an informed decision about implant sizes, shapes, profiles and placement to ensure that they are choosing the best-sized implants to suit their body and also their lifestyle and long-term goals too.

  • What are the risks associated with breast implant removal or replacement?

    As a potential breast implant removal and/or replacement patient, you need to consider the potential risks and consequences that sometimes can occur with the surgery you are seeking. Breast implant and/or replacement surgery will carry risks just like any surgical procedure would do. Common risks include infection, seromas, excessive bleeding or reaction to the anaesthetic. Your plastic surgeon will explain in detail all the risks associated with surgery to ensure that you fully understand the procedures you will undergo and any risks or potential complications. Risks that are more specific to breast implant replacement surgery are similar to those that you would have been told about ahead of your original breast enlargement surgery such as change in breast sensation, scarring, breast deformity or sagging of the breast area. Other risks include; Capsular Contracture is when the tissue that naturally forms around your breast implant becomes tighter and it squeezes the implant. This can cause your breast to feel hard, look misshapen and come sometimes be painful. Capsular contracture is more common for those who have experienced it before and this will be discussed in more detail with your surgeon at your consultation. Implant Rupture is when a tear or hole occurs in the breast implant shell. When this happens in a silicone gel-filled implant, the gel may remain in the shell, leak into the tissue/capsule that forms around the implant or spread beyond the capsule. Implant ruptures can be caused by a variety of traumas including extreme capsular contracture, excessive trauma to the chest or damage by surgical instruments. Symptoms of implant rupture include change in breast shape, swelling of the breast and pain or tenderness. In some cases a silent rupture may occur which will often not cause any changes to the way that the implant looks or feels. In these cases the rupture if often only diagnosed by an MRI scan which is often recommended as part of your post-surgery medical examinations. Implant rupture is treated by either removing or replacing the implant. At The Private Clinic we offer cover for 3 years following your original breast augmentation procedure. Your cover period can be extended with our unique extended aftercare scheme to give you that additional peace of mind, ask your co-ordinator for more details about this. Breast Implant Associated Anaplastuc Large Cell Lymphona (BIA-ALCL) BIA-ACLCL stands for Breast Implant Associated Anaplastuc Large Cell Lymphona and it is a rare T-cell lymphoma that can occur around breast implants. The cause of BIA-ALCL is not clearly understood and no specific risk factors have been identified by health bodies around the world that are studying the disease. However, factors such as breast implant texture, genetics and bacteria have been implicated and are presently undergoing further study. For cases reported to date, BIA-ALCL has been seen most in patients who have textured implants. Your plastic surgeon will be able to provide you with more detailed information at your consultation and we encourage patients to ask us any questions that they may have. When diagnosed early, BIA-ALCL can often be treated successfully by removing the breast implant and surrounding scar capsule however, additional treatment may be required depending on the individual and whether the disease has spread throughout the body. As with any type of cancer, it is important to be diagnosed and treated as early as possible. At The Private Clinic we advise that it is good health practice to self-examine breasts and we encourage patients with breast implants to do this regularly. Should anything such as pain, unevenness between the breast and lumps be detected then you should make an appointment to see your surgeon or GP as soon as possible. At your consultation During your consultation, your surgeon will go through all the risks and complications associated with breast implant removal and/or replacement surgery as appropriate in more detail. You will also be provided with a copy of our patient guide which will provide comprehensive information about the procedure that you are considering undergoing. At your consultation, your surgeon will also discuss the range of implant shapes, sizes and brands to help you feel informed and offer their advice on which are going to be most suited for you to achieve your desired result and which will suit your body type.

  • Inverted Nipples

  • What do the grades of inverted nipples mean?

    Grade is a term used to classify how severe your inverted nipples are. Your surgeon will assess your nipples and use the grading system to determine the best course of treatment. Grade 1 – The mildest form of inverted nipples. The nipples will have a flat appearance but often still respond to touch or temperature changes and become everted for a short amount of time. Grade 2 – A mild grade of inverted nipples that have a more inverted appearance. Grade 2 inverted nipples will often still become everted when stimulated however they will usually immediately return to their inverted position. Grade 3 – The most severe grade of inverted nipples. Grade 3 inverted nipples will often not evert at all and remain in an inverted position at all times.

  • Do inverted nipples need to be treated?

    There are no significant health issues associated with long-standing nipple inversion. It is often the aesthetic concern that causes patients to seek treatment.

  • Is there a non-surgical option to treat inverted nipples?

    We would recommend that you try the Niplette suction device which can be purchased from any high street chemist to help correct the inversion before going ahead with surgery. The device is applied nightly and works to ‘pull out’ the ducts. The Niplette device has a good success rate on Grade 1 and sometimes Grade 2 inverted nipples but Grade 3 Inverted nipples may require surgery however.

  • How much does Inverted Nipples Correction cost?

    The Private Clinic sees over 15,000 new patients every year and perform over 10,000 procedures, with one of the highest –patients’ satisfaction in the sector, Trustpilot 9.4, 5 star rating, 96% would recommend us to their friends and family. We are a multi award winning provider and have been voted the Aesthetic award for Best UK Clinic Group 2017. The Private Clinic prides itself on its commitment to Medical Expertise, Patient Care and Satisfaction, Honest advice and most importantly Results. We are above all committed to Quality. Please feel free to contact us for any advice or to book a consultation with one of our expert Breast surgeons. Inverted Nipple Correction Cost can be part of your decision to undergo a procedure but it should never be the deciding factor. For more information about The Private Clinic, our experience and medical expertise click here. The cost of Bilateral Inverted Nipple Correction starts at £2,500. We don’t follow a one-price-fits-all policy and prices are quoted on a case by case basis. You will be given an accurate quote for your requirements following your consultation. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Please note all consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon.

  • Are the results permanent after inverted nipple correction surgery?

    The results of surgical procedures are permanent however factors such as weight gain and pregnancy can alter the results.

  • Are the results permanent after inverted nipple correction surgery?

    The results of surgical procedures are permanent however factors such as weight gain and pregnancy can alter the results.

  • What surgery is available for the nipples?

    There are 2 types of surgery that are performed on the nipple. Inverted Nipple Surgery is for those who have an inversion of the nipple. Inverted nipple surgery is performed to release the inwards pull of the nipple. Nipple Reduction is a procedure to reduce the width and / or height of the nipple for those who are unhappy with the size of their nipples.

  • What is the cause of Inverted Nipples?

    Nipple inversion is often a congenital disorder that is present at birth. It is a common condition that is caused when tight bands (often shortened milk ducts) that run from the surface of the breast tissue, under the areola and outwards to the nipple pull the nipple inwards.

  • Can inverted nipples be a sign of cancer?

    A newly inverted nipple can be a symptom of breast cancer as nipple retraction can occur when the tumor attacks the duct behind the nipple, pulling it in. If you have noticed a sudden change in your nipples then we recommend that you visit your GP surgery before seeking surgery to rule out any underlying health conditions. If you have had nipple inversions for a long time then it is unlikely that it is a sign of breast cancer.

  • Is it possible to breastfeed before inverted nipple correction surgery?

    It is possible to breastfeed if your nipples are inverted but it will depend on the grade of them. Those who have Grade 1 or 2 inverted nipples then it if often possible to breastfeed but those with Grade 3 may find it very difficult or impossible to breastfeed.

  • Inverted Nipples Correction General Procedure

  • What do the grades of inverted nipples mean?

    Grade is a term used to classify how severe your inverted nipples are. Your surgeon will assess your nipples and use the grading system to determine the best course of treatment. Grade 1 – The mildest form of inverted nipples. The nipples will have a flat appearance but often still respond to touch or temperature changes and become everted for a short amount of time. Grade 2 – A mild grade of inverted nipples that have a more inverted appearance. Grade 2 inverted nipples will often still become everted when stimulated however they will usually immediately return to their inverted position. Grade 3 – The most severe grade of inverted nipples. Grade 3 inverted nipples will often not evert at all and remain in an inverted position at all times.

  • Do inverted nipples need to be treated?

    There are no significant health issues associated with long-standing nipple inversion. It is often the aesthetic concern that causes patients to seek treatment.

  • Is there a non-surgical option to treat inverted nipples?

    We would recommend that you try the Niplette suction device which can be purchased from any high street chemist to help correct the inversion before going ahead with surgery. The device is applied nightly and works to ‘pull out’ the ducts. The Niplette device has a good success rate on Grade 1 and sometimes Grade 2 inverted nipples but Grade 3 Inverted nipples may require surgery however.

  • How much does Inverted Nipples Correction cost?

    The Private Clinic sees over 15,000 new patients every year and perform over 10,000 procedures, with one of the highest –patients’ satisfaction in the sector, Trustpilot 9.4, 5 star rating, 96% would recommend us to their friends and family. We are a multi award winning provider and have been voted the Aesthetic award for Best UK Clinic Group 2017. The Private Clinic prides itself on its commitment to Medical Expertise, Patient Care and Satisfaction, Honest advice and most importantly Results. We are above all committed to Quality. Please feel free to contact us for any advice or to book a consultation with one of our expert Breast surgeons. Inverted Nipple Correction Cost can be part of your decision to undergo a procedure but it should never be the deciding factor. For more information about The Private Clinic, our experience and medical expertise click here. The cost of Bilateral Inverted Nipple Correction starts at £2,500. We don’t follow a one-price-fits-all policy and prices are quoted on a case by case basis. You will be given an accurate quote for your requirements following your consultation. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Please note all consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon.

  • Are the results permanent after inverted nipple correction surgery?

    The results of surgical procedures are permanent however factors such as weight gain and pregnancy can alter the results.

  • Are the results permanent after inverted nipple correction surgery?

    The results of surgical procedures are permanent however factors such as weight gain and pregnancy can alter the results.

  • What surgery is available for the nipples?

    There are 2 types of surgery that are performed on the nipple. Inverted Nipple Surgery is for those who have an inversion of the nipple. Inverted nipple surgery is performed to release the inwards pull of the nipple. Nipple Reduction is a procedure to reduce the width and / or height of the nipple for those who are unhappy with the size of their nipples.

  • What is the cause of Inverted Nipples?

    Nipple inversion is often a congenital disorder that is present at birth. It is a common condition that is caused when tight bands (often shortened milk ducts) that run from the surface of the breast tissue, under the areola and outwards to the nipple pull the nipple inwards.

  • Can inverted nipples be a sign of cancer?

    A newly inverted nipple can be a symptom of breast cancer as nipple retraction can occur when the tumor attacks the duct behind the nipple, pulling it in. If you have noticed a sudden change in your nipples then we recommend that you visit your GP surgery before seeking surgery to rule out any underlying health conditions. If you have had nipple inversions for a long time then it is unlikely that it is a sign of breast cancer.

  • Is it possible to breastfeed before inverted nipple correction surgery?

    It is possible to breastfeed if your nipples are inverted but it will depend on the grade of them. Those who have Grade 1 or 2 inverted nipples then it if often possible to breastfeed but those with Grade 3 may find it very difficult or impossible to breastfeed.

  • Inverted Nipples Correction Before Procedure

  • What happens at an inverted nipple correction consultation?

    A consultation with your surgeon is a great way to get an idea of what the best treatment plan is going to be for you. Your surgeon will be able to assess you and discuss what to realistically expect from surgery. It is also your chance to ask them questions about the procedure and what to expect post-op.

  • Is it possible for the consultation and procedure to be carried out on the same day?

    In the majority of cases it is possible to be treated on a ‘see and treat’ purpose. This would often require you to send a photo to the surgeon for assessment prior to your appointment. You will then be given an appointment date where your procedure will be carried out on the same day.

  • What does a free inverted nipple consultation mean?

    Free inverted nipple phone or video consultations are available with one of our experienced patient coordinators who will able to provide information about the inverted nipple procedure and offer advice on the best surgeon to perform your inverted nipple procedure based on your requirements. To secure your timed appointment we will ask you to pay a £25 refundable deposit. This is refunded once the consultation takes place. You are welcome to change your appointment time up to 48 hours before. Book your free phone or video consultation here.

  • Inverted Nipples Correction Day of Procedure

  • How long does inverted nipple correction take?

    Nipple correction surgery usually takes 1 hour or less under local anaesthetic.

  • Will I need to stay overnight after an inverted nipple correction procedure?

    Inverted nipple corrected is performed as day case procedure and you will be able to return home shortly after.

  • What type of anaesthetic is required for inverted nipple correction surgery?

    Inverted nipple procedures are performed under local anaesthetic but if being performed in combination with another procedure such as a breast augmentation then general anaesthetic will be used.

  • What happens during inverted nipple correction surgery?

    There are different techniques to inverted nipple correction depending on the severity of the inversion. The most common way is that the surgeon will make an incision at the base of the nipple and the ducts are then separated leaving the nipple to be able to sit back in its new position.

  • Inverted Nipples Correction After Procedure

  • What is the recovery period following inverted nipple correction surgery?

    You will have some mild discomfort for the initial 24-48 hours after your procedure but this can be controlled by pain medication. You will need to avoid strenuous activities for the first couple of weeks to avoid chafing. You will be fully recovered after 6 weeks where your swelling should have settled and your nipple will be in its new position.

  • When can I return to work after inverted nipple correction surgery?

    The majority of patients are able to return to work after 2-3 days.

  • Is it possible to breastfeed after inverted nipple correction surgery?

    If you are still yet to complete your family then we recommend waiting until after this time as the milk ducts which often pull the nipples inwards are divided during surgery which can make breast feeding difficult. It is a good idea to discuss breastfeeding with your surgeon at your consultation to find out more.

  • Will I lose sensation after inverted nipple correction surgery?

    Your nipple sensation may change slightly in the initial stages after surgery, but everything should return to normal once healed and the nipple will respond to touch and cold as normal.

  • When can I exercise again after my inverted nipple correction procedure?

    We generally advise waiting 2-3 weeks before exercising again especially activities that involve friction to the nipple areas such as running.

  • Can I drive after inverted nipple correction surgery?

    We recommend waiting a day or two to drive after surgery to allow the side effects from the local anaesthetic to pass. If you have had a general anaesthetic then we usually advise that you wait a week before driving again as it can take more time for general anaesthetic to be out of your system.

  • What is the scarring like after inverted nipple correction?

    A very small incision is made at the base of the nipple which means any scar will be well concealed and hidden.

  • Nipple Reduction

  • How can you fix a protruding nipple?

    Nipple reduction surgery at The Private Clinic can successful fix a protruding nipple or a puffy nipple by reducing the height and/or width. The procedure is carried out under local anaesthetic and great care is taken throughout the procedure to preserve nipple sensation. There is very little downtime associated with protruding nipple correction surgery and you will be able to get back to your usual routine quickly. To find out more about nipple reduction surgery click here to book a consultation with one of our expert surgeons.

  • Am I suitable for nipple reduction surgery?

    Nipple reduction surgery is suitable for anyone who feels that their nipples are too wide or too long as long as you are over 18 years old. The best way to find out if you are a suitable for nipple reduction surgery is to visit one of our expert surgeons for a consultation where they will be able to assess you and go through any medical history. Nipple reduction procedure can be performed on both men and women and the process is pretty much the same for both.

  • What happens during nipple Reduction surgery?

    Nipple Reduction surgery involves removing a strip of skin about the base of the nipple which is then closed and sutured which reduces the height of the nipple by pushing it back into the breast tissue. This is a very straightforward procedure and is most commonly performed under local anaesthetic as a day-case treatment. To find out more about what is involved in nipple reduction surgery click here to make an appointment with one of our industry leading plastic surgeons.

  • What is the recovery period following nipple reduction surgery?

    You may feel mild discomfort in the area treated for 24-48 hours but this can easily be managed with painkillers. We recommend that you avoid strenuous activities for the first 2 weeks to avoid chafing. Patients are normally fully recovered 6 weeks after their procedure and any swelling should have settled at this point with your nipple sitting in its new position. To find out more about the recovery period associated with nipple reduction procedure click here to book an appointment to meet with one of our expert plastic surgeons.

  • How much does Nipple Reduction cost?

    The Private Clinic sees over 15,000 new patients every year and perform over 10,000 procedures, with one of the highest –patients’ satisfaction in the sector, Trustpilot 9.4, 5 star rating, 96% would recommend us to their friends and family. We are a multi award winning provider and have been voted the Aesthetic award for Best UK Clinic Group 2017. The Private Clinic prides itself on its commitment to Medical Expertise, Patient Care and Satisfaction, Honest advice and most importantly Results. We are above all committed to Quality. Please feel free to contact us for any advice or to book a consultation with one of our expert Breast surgeons. Cost can be part of your decision to undergo a procedure but it should never be the deciding factor. For more information about The Private Clinic, our experience and medical expertise click here. The cost of a Bilateral Nipple Reduction starts at £2,100. We don’t follow a one-price-fits-all policy and prices are quoted on a case by case basis. You will be given an accurate quote for your requirements following your consultation. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Please note all consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon.

  • What causes enlarged nipples?

    There is no real cause for enlarged nipples and they generally start to appear as your breast develops although in some cases it can be caused by breast feeding. Other causes for enlarged, protruding or puffy nipples can be weight loss, weight gain or gynaecomastia.

  • What is the ideal nipple size?

    The average nipple size is a projection of 6 to 10 mm however to work out your ideal shape or size it will be based on your unique breast or chest measurements. Your surgeon will determine nipple size that is proportionate to you.

  • Do enlarged nipples need to be treated?

    There are no real health concerns associated with large nipples unless they have suddenly changed in appearance without any other obvious causes. Patients mainly seek correction purely down to the aesthetic concern that it causes them. A consultation with one of our expert surgeons will be able to tell you more about the treatment before you make a decision to go ahead or not. Click here to book a consultation.

  • What happens at a nipple reduction consultation?

    A consultation with your surgeon is a great way to get an idea of what the best treatment plan is going to be for you. Your surgeon will be able to assess you and discuss what to realistically expect from surgery. It is also your chance to ask them questions about the procedure and what to expect post-op. Click here to book a consultation.

  • Is it possible for the consultation and procedure to be carried out on the same day?

    In the majority of cases it is possible to be treated on a ‘see and treat’ purpose. This would often require you to send a photo to the surgeon for assessment prior to your appointment. You will then be given an appointment date where your procedure will be carried out on the same day.

  • Nipple Reduction General Procedure

  • How can you fix a protruding nipple?

    Nipple reduction surgery at The Private Clinic can successful fix a protruding nipple or a puffy nipple by reducing the height and/or width. The procedure is carried out under local anaesthetic and great care is taken throughout the procedure to preserve nipple sensation. There is very little downtime associated with protruding nipple correction surgery and you will be able to get back to your usual routine quickly. To find out more about nipple reduction surgery click here to book a consultation with one of our expert surgeons.

  • How much does Nipple Reduction cost?

    The Private Clinic sees over 15,000 new patients every year and perform over 10,000 procedures, with one of the highest –patients’ satisfaction in the sector, Trustpilot 9.4, 5 star rating, 96% would recommend us to their friends and family. We are a multi award winning provider and have been voted the Aesthetic award for Best UK Clinic Group 2017. The Private Clinic prides itself on its commitment to Medical Expertise, Patient Care and Satisfaction, Honest advice and most importantly Results. We are above all committed to Quality. Please feel free to contact us for any advice or to book a consultation with one of our expert Breast surgeons. Cost can be part of your decision to undergo a procedure but it should never be the deciding factor. For more information about The Private Clinic, our experience and medical expertise click here. The cost of a Bilateral Nipple Reduction starts at £2,100. We don’t follow a one-price-fits-all policy and prices are quoted on a case by case basis. You will be given an accurate quote for your requirements following your consultation. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our breast surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Please note all consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon.

  • What causes enlarged nipples?

    There is no real cause for enlarged nipples and they generally start to appear as your breast develops although in some cases it can be caused by breast feeding. Other causes for enlarged, protruding or puffy nipples can be weight loss, weight gain or gynaecomastia.

  • What is the ideal nipple size?

    The average nipple size is a projection of 6 to 10 mm however to work out your ideal shape or size it will be based on your unique breast or chest measurements. Your surgeon will determine nipple size that is proportionate to you.

  • Do enlarged nipples need to be treated?

    There are no real health concerns associated with large nipples unless they have suddenly changed in appearance without any other obvious causes. Patients mainly seek correction purely down to the aesthetic concern that it causes them. A consultation with one of our expert surgeons will be able to tell you more about the treatment before you make a decision to go ahead or not. Click here to book a consultation.

  • Can nipple reduction surgery be combined with another procedure?

  • Are the results permanent after nipple reduction surgery?

    The results from surgical procedures are permanent however it is important to remember that factors such as weight gain, weight loss, pregnancy and breast feeding can alter the results.

  • What are the risks involved with nipple surgery?

    All surgical procedures come with risks although they are usually very rare and unlikely to occur. Nipple reduction procedure does carry a risk that you may be unable to breastfeed after surgery. As with any type of surgery there are risks associated with nipple correction, although these are very rare and unlikely to occur. Inverted nipple surgery in particular does carry the risk of inability to breastfeed. Other risks include; adverse scarring, bleeding, haematoma formation, infection, numbness, alteration in sensation and asymmetry in the healing and in the final result. But these will all be discussed in more detail at your consultation with a surgeon. Click here to book a consultation with an industry leading plastic surgeons near you.

  • Nipple Reduction Before Procedure

  • Am I suitable for nipple reduction surgery?

    Nipple reduction surgery is suitable for anyone who feels that their nipples are too wide or too long as long as you are over 18 years old. The best way to find out if you are a suitable for nipple reduction surgery is to visit one of our expert surgeons for a consultation where they will be able to assess you and go through any medical history. Nipple reduction procedure can be performed on both men and women and the process is pretty much the same for both.

  • What happens at a nipple reduction consultation?

    A consultation with your surgeon is a great way to get an idea of what the best treatment plan is going to be for you. Your surgeon will be able to assess you and discuss what to realistically expect from surgery. It is also your chance to ask them questions about the procedure and what to expect post-op. Click here to book a consultation.

  • Is it possible for the consultation and procedure to be carried out on the same day?

    In the majority of cases it is possible to be treated on a ‘see and treat’ purpose. This would often require you to send a photo to the surgeon for assessment prior to your appointment. You will then be given an appointment date where your procedure will be carried out on the same day.

  • What does a free nipple reduction consultation mean?

    We are able to offer patients a free nipple reduction phone or video consultation with a member of our experienced patient coordinator team. During this consultation you will be able to find out more about the procedure and find out which of our expert surgeons will be best suited to meet your requirements. To secure a timed appointment slot we do require you to pay a £25 deposit. This is deposit will be refunded to you once the consultation takes place. Should you find yourself unable to make your appointment slot, you will be able to change your appointment time up to 48 hours before. Contact us to book your free phone or video consultation.

  • Nipple Reduction Day of Procedure

  • What happens during nipple Reduction surgery?

    Nipple Reduction surgery involves removing a strip of skin about the base of the nipple which is then closed and sutured which reduces the height of the nipple by pushing it back into the breast tissue. This is a very straightforward procedure and is most commonly performed under local anaesthetic as a day-case treatment. To find out more about what is involved in nipple reduction surgery click here to make an appointment with one of our industry leading plastic surgeons.

  • How long does nipple seduction surgery take?

    Nipple reduction surgery can take up to 60 minutes. We usually advise at least 20 minutes per nipple but this will vary on a case-by-case basis. If your nipple reduction surgery is taking place alongside a breast augmentation then this will be longer.

  • Will I need to stay overnight after a nipple reduction procedure?

    If performed as a stand-alone procedure then a nipple reduction is performed under local anaesthetic as a day case procedure. Once you have been discharged by your surgeon you will be able to return home shortly after the procedure.

  • What type of anaesthetic is required for nipple reduction surgery?

    Nipple reduction procedures are performed under local anaesthetic if nothing else is being operated on at the same time. If you are having a combined breast augmentation for example then you will require general anaesthetic but your surgeon will inform you of this ahead of your procedure.

  • Nipple Reduction After Procedure

  • What is the recovery period following nipple reduction surgery?

    You may feel mild discomfort in the area treated for 24-48 hours but this can easily be managed with painkillers. We recommend that you avoid strenuous activities for the first 2 weeks to avoid chafing. Patients are normally fully recovered 6 weeks after their procedure and any swelling should have settled at this point with your nipple sitting in its new position. To find out more about the recovery period associated with nipple reduction procedure click here to book an appointment to meet with one of our expert plastic surgeons.

  • Is nipple reduction surgery painful?

    Nipple reduction surgery should not be painful. The local anaesthetic injection may sting a little bit for a few seconds but the surgery will not take place until you are completely numb. Once you have had the anaesthetic you should not feel any pain but may feel a little discomfort with pressure and movement as the procedure takes place.

  • When can I return to work after a nipple reduction surgery?

    Many patients return to work the day after their nipple reduction surgery. We generally advise to take 1-3 days to allow any discomfort to settle but unless you are very active in your job role then you will be fine to return to work shortly after your procedure.

  • Can I breastfeed after nipple reduction surgery?

    Nipple reduction surgery is likely to leave you unable to breastfeed. Many of our nipple reduction patients visit us after they have finished breast feeding as this can be a cause of enlarged nipples where they have been stretched. If you are concerned about being able to breastfeed after nipple reduction surgery then you should consider waiting until after you have finished breastfeeding.

  • Will I lose sensation after nipple reduction surgery?

    Changes to nipple sensation are likely to change slightly initially after surgery. This is usually only temporary and everything should return to normal within 6 weeks with the nipple responding to touch and cold as it did previously. Your plastic surgeon will advise you on what to expect after surgery at your consultation ahead of your procedure.

  • When can I exercise again after my nipple reduction procedure?

    We recommend that you wait 2-3 weeks before you start strenuous exercise again, especially those that involve friction against the nipple such as running or contact sports. Your surgeon will be able to supply you with full aftercare advice after your procedure and our nurses are always on hand to answer any questions that you may have after your procedure.

  • When will I be able to shower after a nipple reduction procedure?

    Patients should be fine to shower the day after a nipple reduction procedure but we advise that you try and avoid getting the dressing excessively wet. You will be able to have a bath two weeks after your procedure once your dressing has been removed. Full aftercare advice will be provided to you after your procedure. If you have any questions then don’t hesitate to contact your local clinic or our on-call number for additional advice.

  • Can I drive after nipple reduction surgery?

    We recommend that patients wait at least 24 hours before driving just to allow any side effects from local anaesthetic to pass. If you have had general anaesthetic then you must wait a week as it does take longer for general anaesthetic to be out of your system. Driving too soon after a surgical procedure could void your insurance policy so be sure to check with your provider before getting behind the wheel.

  • What is the scar like after nipple reduction surgery?

    Nipple reduction surgery leaves patients with a very small scar that is often virtually undetectable. The scar often runs along the underside of the nipple where it meets the areola. If you are concerned about scarring after nipple reduction surgery we recommend visiting us for a consultation with a surgeon who will be able to explain in more detail what to expect from nipple reduction surgery.

  • Upper and Lower Blepharoplasty

  • What is a blepharoplasty?

    A blepharoplasty is the medical term for eyelid or eyebag surgery to improve the appearance of drooping eyelids or large eyebags that also may be affecting the sight of the patient. The procedure involves reshaping the upper or lower eyelid by removing or repositioning of excess tissue, as well as reinforcing surrounding soft tissues. There are 3 types of blepharoplasty procedures; Upper Blepharoplasty which targets the eyelid and upper portion of the eye but not including the brows. Lower Blepharoplasty which targets the lower portion of the eye and a combined blepharoplasty which is when an upper and lower blepharoplasty are performed at the same time.

  • Can a blepharoplasty treat eye bags?

    Eye bags or sagging around the eyes can be corrected with blepharoplasty surgery. The procedure removes excess skin underneath the eye resulting in a fresher look.

  • What happens during a blepharoplasty procedure?

    During an upper blepharoplasty an incision is made within the natural eyelid crease. Excess skin and fatty pockets are then removed before the incision is then closed. A lower blepharoplasty procedure involves an incision usually below the lash line or inside of the bottom eyelid. Excess fatty tissue is then removed from the area and the incision is closed.

    Procedure Length

    Incisions

    Anaesthesia Used

    Downtime

    Upper Blepharoplasty (Upper Eyelid)

    A short procedure which can take only 30 minutes

    Incisions are made in the eyelid crease

    Typically performed using local anaesthetic

    Minimal downtime and you can return home shortly after

    Lower Blepharoplasty* (Lower Eyelid)

    Slightly more complex, the procedure can take between 1-2 hours

    Incisions will be disguised under the eyelashes or inside the eye

    Often requires general anaesthetic

    More downtime than upper blepharoplasty, the exact amount depending on the individual patient**

    Combined Blepharoplasty* (Upper and lower eyelid)

    Approximately 2 hours

    As above for each eyelid

    Usually requires general anaesthetic

    ** Same as above

    *Eye Bag Removal can also be performed in a lower or combined procedure, helping to reduce any puffiness, without creating a hollowed out appearance

  • How much does Upper and Lower Blepharoplasty (Eye Bag Removal and Eyelid Surgery) cost?

    The average price for blepharoplasty surgery for an upper eyelid procedure starts at £2,900 (under local anaesthetic) or £3,570 (under general anaesthetic) and the cost for a lower eyelid procedure starts at £4,360 (under general anaesthetic). If you require a full blepharoplasty (both upper and lower eyelids), prices start from £5,630. We don’t follow a one-price-fits-all policy and prices are quoted on a case by case basis. You will be given an accurate quote for your requirements following your consultation. Consultations with our plastic surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our plastic surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Please note all consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon.

  • When will I see the results?

    Results are instant however everyone heals at a different rate. Most visual swelling should go down after a month and the majority see results within 2-3 months of their procedure.

  • Am I suitable?

    An experienced surgeon will need to assess you prior to any procedure, but blepharoplasty is suitable for most people who are suffering with hooded, drooping or puffy eyelids. The procedure will not be suitable for those looking to rid of crow’s feet or some fine wrinkles. Your surgeon will be able to advise on other options like wrinkle injections or fillers. A blepharoplasty is suitable for both male and female patients.

  • How long will the procedure take?

    Most of our patients are day cases, with simple procedures taking as little as 30 minutes and longer cases taking up to 2 hours. The majority of patients return home after the procedure with no need for a hospital stay.

  • Where are the blepharoplasty incisions made?

    Incisions for an upper blepharoplasty or eyelid surgery are made in the natural crease of the upper eyelid.  Incisions for a lower blepharoplasty or eyebag surgery are made underneath the eyelashes or alternatively inside the eye. Incisions for blepharoplasty procedures heal well.

  • Is a blepharoplasty painful?

    Eyelid/Eyebag surgery is performed under local or general anaesthetic so you will not feel anything during the procedure. A few hours after the procedure your eyes may feel a little uncomfortable but you will be given painkillers to help with this and any discomfort usually settles after 48 hours.

  • Will a blepharoplasty improve the wrinkles around my eyes?

    Eyelid/Eyebag surgery is not designed to treat wrinkles around the eyes. Wrinkles around the eyes are best treated with wrinkle relaxing injects or laser rejuvenation treatments such as the Regenlite.

  • Upper and Lower Blepharoplasty General Procedure

  • What is a blepharoplasty?

    A blepharoplasty is the medical term for eyelid or eyebag surgery to improve the appearance of drooping eyelids or large eyebags that also may be affecting the sight of the patient. The procedure involves reshaping the upper or lower eyelid by removing or repositioning of excess tissue, as well as reinforcing surrounding soft tissues. There are 3 types of blepharoplasty procedures; Upper Blepharoplasty which targets the eyelid and upper portion of the eye but not including the brows. Lower Blepharoplasty which targets the lower portion of the eye and a combined blepharoplasty which is when an upper and lower blepharoplasty are performed at the same time.

  • Can a blepharoplasty treat eye bags?

    Eye bags or sagging around the eyes can be corrected with blepharoplasty surgery. The procedure removes excess skin underneath the eye resulting in a fresher look.

  • How much does Upper and Lower Blepharoplasty (Eye Bag Removal and Eyelid Surgery) cost?

    The average price for blepharoplasty surgery for an upper eyelid procedure starts at £2,900 (under local anaesthetic) or £3,570 (under general anaesthetic) and the cost for a lower eyelid procedure starts at £4,360 (under general anaesthetic). If you require a full blepharoplasty (both upper and lower eyelids), prices start from £5,630. We don’t follow a one-price-fits-all policy and prices are quoted on a case by case basis. You will be given an accurate quote for your requirements following your consultation. Consultations with our plastic surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our plastic surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Please note all consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon.

  • When will I see the results?

    Results are instant however everyone heals at a different rate. Most visual swelling should go down after a month and the majority see results within 2-3 months of their procedure.

  • Will a blepharoplasty improve the wrinkles around my eyes?

    Eyelid/Eyebag surgery is not designed to treat wrinkles around the eyes. Wrinkles around the eyes are best treated with wrinkle relaxing injects or laser rejuvenation treatments such as the Regenlite.

  • Can a drooping brow be corrected with eyelid surgery?

    A blepharoplasty only targets the upper and lower eye lid areas. In order to improve the appearance of your brow you will need to have a brow lift.

  • Can a blepharoplasty be combined with another procedure?

    Blepharoplasties are commonly performed alongside facelifts, brow lifts and also fat transfer. Dermal fillers can also be used post-procedure to help retain the results of the procedure by improving the tear trough area.

  • What is the downtime?

    You will experience some swelling and bruising for up to two weeks, but may return to your social activities within one week post-procedure. Your stitches will be removed 4-5 days post-procedure, and make-up can be used 7 days after the surgery. You may need pain relief to help with any discomfort while the eyelids heal, though your surgeon will discuss this fully with you. It can take up to a few months for your eyelids to settle completely, but our medical team will offer you all the necessary advice and support for your healing process.

  • When will I be able to return to work after blepharoplasty surgery?

    Depending on your case and procedure your surgeon may advise between 7-14 days off work, particularly for more complicated surgeries. You will need someone to take you home and we recommend that someone stays with you for the first 24 hours post-surgery.

  • Will there be any scarring?

    Blepharoplasty is one of the safest plastic surgery procedures you can have. Our experienced surgeons will only make incisions along the natural folds and creases of your eyes, making the risk of scarring minimal.

  • Upper and Lower Blepharoplasty Before Procedure

  • Am I suitable?

    An experienced surgeon will need to assess you prior to any procedure, but blepharoplasty is suitable for most people who are suffering with hooded, drooping or puffy eyelids. The procedure will not be suitable for those looking to rid of crow’s feet or some fine wrinkles. Your surgeon will be able to advise on other options like wrinkle injections or fillers. A blepharoplasty is suitable for both male and female patients.

  • What does a free blepharoplasty consultation mean?

    We can offer patients a free blepharoplasty phone or video consultation with one of our experienced patient coordinators to discuss eyelid or eyebag surgery. Our patient coordinators can provide you with information about the procedure and the best blepharoplasty surgeon to suit your needs. To secure your timed phone or video appointment we will ask you to pay a £25 refundable deposit. This is refunded once the consultation takes place. You can change your appointment time up to 48 hours before. Contact us to book a free phone or video consultation.

  • Upper and Lower Blepharoplasty Day of Procedure

  • What happens during a blepharoplasty procedure?

    During an upper blepharoplasty an incision is made within the natural eyelid crease. Excess skin and fatty pockets are then removed before the incision is then closed. A lower blepharoplasty procedure involves an incision usually below the lash line or inside of the bottom eyelid. Excess fatty tissue is then removed from the area and the incision is closed.

    Procedure Length

    Incisions

    Anaesthesia Used

    Downtime

    Upper Blepharoplasty (Upper Eyelid)

    A short procedure which can take only 30 minutes

    Incisions are made in the eyelid crease

    Typically performed using local anaesthetic

    Minimal downtime and you can return home shortly after

    Lower Blepharoplasty* (Lower Eyelid)

    Slightly more complex, the procedure can take between 1-2 hours

    Incisions will be disguised under the eyelashes or inside the eye

    Often requires general anaesthetic

    More downtime than upper blepharoplasty, the exact amount depending on the individual patient**

    Combined Blepharoplasty* (Upper and lower eyelid)

    Approximately 2 hours

    As above for each eyelid

    Usually requires general anaesthetic

    ** Same as above

    *Eye Bag Removal can also be performed in a lower or combined procedure, helping to reduce any puffiness, without creating a hollowed out appearance

  • How long will the procedure take?

    Most of our patients are day cases, with simple procedures taking as little as 30 minutes and longer cases taking up to 2 hours. The majority of patients return home after the procedure with no need for a hospital stay.

  • Where are the blepharoplasty incisions made?

    Incisions for an upper blepharoplasty or eyelid surgery are made in the natural crease of the upper eyelid.  Incisions for a lower blepharoplasty or eyebag surgery are made underneath the eyelashes or alternatively inside the eye. Incisions for blepharoplasty procedures heal well.

  • Is a blepharoplasty painful?

    Eyelid/Eyebag surgery is performed under local or general anaesthetic so you will not feel anything during the procedure. A few hours after the procedure your eyes may feel a little uncomfortable but you will be given painkillers to help with this and any discomfort usually settles after 48 hours.

  • Upper and Lower Blepharoplasty After Procedure

  • Can I drive after a blepharoplasty?

    You will not be able to drive immediately after a blepharoplasty this is due the after effects of the anaesthetic that may still be in your system and your vision may be temporarily impaired immediately after surgery. We would recommend that you avoid driving for a week or at least until you are off pain medication and feel comfortable to do so. We would advise against driving for long distances in the initial stages of healing too. If in doubt – do check with your surgeon.

  • When can I exercise after a blepharoplasty?

    Light to moderate exercise may be resumed at 2-3 weeks but it may take at least 3-4 weeks before you can get back to higher impact activities. Swimming / diving should be avoided during the first 3-6 weeks after surgery.

  • Can I wear glasses or contact lenses after a blepharoplasty?

    You will be able to wear glasses as normal after eyelid or eyebag surgery. We advise waiting 2-3 weeks before wearing contact lenses again.

  • When can I wear make-up after blepharoplasty surgery?

    We recommend waiting at least 10 days before applying any type of eye make-up including eyeshadow, fake lashes, mascara and eyeliner.

  • Facelift

  • What is the difference between a full and mini facelift?

    A full facelift targets the area from your eye area to the jaw and a mini facelift is more focused to the lower half of your face. The incisions used with a mini facelift are also smaller so the recovery time is often reduced slightly.

  • Would I be suitable for a mini facelift?

    A Mini Face lift is bested suited for patients who have moderate skin laxity with the appearance of some jowls. If you have significant skin laxity with cheek sagging then your surgeon will most likely suggest you have a full Face Lift procedure.

  • How long will the results of a facelift last?

    You can expect the results to last for many years. The ageing process is continuous and the facelift aims to tackle the hardest signs of visible ageing. A healthy lifestyle and good skincare routine will help you maintain the effects of the facelift for as long as possible. It is difficult to establish just how long the results will last as each patient present a unique situation. There are a range of aesthetic and cosmetic treatments to assist in maintaining results.

  • How much does Facelift cost?

    During your consultation with one of our Consultant Plastic & Reconstructive Surgeons, you will always be offered the most suitable procedure for your facial structure and desired results. We have a range of face and neck lifting procedures. The average prices paid by our Facelift patients start from £6,900 for a mini-facelift (SMAS) and £9,185 for a full facelift. We don’t follow a one-price-fits-all policy and prices are quoted on a case by case basis. You will be given an accurate quote for your requirements following your consultation. Consultations with our plastic surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our plastic surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Please note all consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon.

  • Is there a facelift clinic near me?

    The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an expert facelift surgeon located near to you. Our clinics are in; London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ Manchester – 25 St John Street, M3 4DT Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands We also have consulting rooms in Milton Keynes where you can have consultations with one of our patient coordinators.

  • Am I suitable for a facelift?

    A facelift is best suited to patients who have sagging skin around their face and find that they are looking tired or upset when they are not.

  • Are there any medical contradictions to having a Facelift?

    Contradictions may include high blood pressure, diabetes, lung or heart disease and bleeding disorders as these can increase your risk for complications. A full medical history will be taken at your consultation and your full suitability will be discussed with your surgeon.

  • Will there be visible scarring after a facelift?

    Scarring is all dependant on the Surgeon’s skills and experience, and with the most advanced facelift techniques available today, scarring is kept to a minimum. Incision sites will be carefully considered to reduce visibility during recovery and in the long-term. They are also very well concealed for both women and men.

  • Am I too old to have a facelift?

    The majority of patients undergoing a facelift procedure are between the ages of 40-60. Ideally the best results are seen on patients who still have elasticity left in their skin, have good bone structure and most importantly are fit and well.

  • What will happen at my consultation?

    Your consultation is your time with the surgeon to discuss your desired outcome of surgery, ask any questions you may have prepared and go through the surgical procedure talking through any concerns that you might have. We also suggest bringing along some photographs of your younger-self as many of our patients do not want to look different, just younger and this is the best way for your surgeon to physically see how you face has changed as you have got older and work out the best way to give you the results that you want.

  • Facelift General Procedure

  • What is the difference between a full and mini facelift?

    A full facelift targets the area from your eye area to the jaw and a mini facelift is more focused to the lower half of your face. The incisions used with a mini facelift are also smaller so the recovery time is often reduced slightly.

  • Are there any medical contradictions to having a Facelift?

    Contradictions may include high blood pressure, diabetes, lung or heart disease and bleeding disorders as these can increase your risk for complications. A full medical history will be taken at your consultation and your full suitability will be discussed with your surgeon.

  • What will happen at my consultation?

    Your consultation is your time with the surgeon to discuss your desired outcome of surgery, ask any questions you may have prepared and go through the surgical procedure talking through any concerns that you might have. We also suggest bringing along some photographs of your younger-self as many of our patients do not want to look different, just younger and this is the best way for your surgeon to physically see how you face has changed as you have got older and work out the best way to give you the results that you want.

  • Facelift Before Procedure

  • Would I be suitable for a mini facelift?

    A Mini Face lift is bested suited for patients who have moderate skin laxity with the appearance of some jowls. If you have significant skin laxity with cheek sagging then your surgeon will most likely suggest you have a full Face Lift procedure.

  • How much does Facelift cost?

    During your consultation with one of our Consultant Plastic & Reconstructive Surgeons, you will always be offered the most suitable procedure for your facial structure and desired results. We have a range of face and neck lifting procedures. The average prices paid by our Facelift patients start from £6,900 for a mini-facelift (SMAS) and £9,185 for a full facelift. We don’t follow a one-price-fits-all policy and prices are quoted on a case by case basis. You will be given an accurate quote for your requirements following your consultation. Consultations with our plastic surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our plastic surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Please note all consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon.

  • Is there a facelift clinic near me?

    The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an expert facelift surgeon located near to you. Our clinics are in; London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ Manchester – 25 St John Street, M3 4DT Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands We also have consulting rooms in Milton Keynes where you can have consultations with one of our patient coordinators.

  • Am I suitable for a facelift?

    A facelift is best suited to patients who have sagging skin around their face and find that they are looking tired or upset when they are not.

  • Am I too old to have a facelift?

    The majority of patients undergoing a facelift procedure are between the ages of 40-60. Ideally the best results are seen on patients who still have elasticity left in their skin, have good bone structure and most importantly are fit and well.

  • Will a facelift get rid of my wrinkles?

    A facelift procedure is more targeting at lifting sagging skin especially around the neck and jowls. Although you will see some improvement to lines and wrinkles through facelift surgery, if this is your main concern then a non-surgical treatment such as wrinkle relaxing injections or laser rejuvenation may be better suited. See our wrinkle condition page for more information.

  • What other options do I have?

    You can have non-surgical facelifts, fat transfer procedures and facial rejuvenation treatments, which will tackle effects of ageing such as uneven skin tone, age spots, wrinkles and loss of fat volume to the face. Treatments that we offer include:

    • One Stitch Facelift
    • Organic Facelift (Fat Transfer)
    • 8 Point Lift
    • Wrinkle Relaxing Injections
    • Dermal Fillers
    • Laser Treatments
    To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here.

  • What does a free facelift consultation mean?

    We offer a free facelift phone or video consultations with an experienced patient coordinator who will provide information on the procedure and the best facelift surgeons to suit your requirements. In order to secure the timed appointment we ask that you pay a £25 refundable deposit. This is refunded once the consultation takes place. You can change your appointment time up to 48 hours before. Contact us to book your free facelift phone or video consultation.

  • Facelift Day of Procedure

  • How long does a facelift procedure take?

  • Will I need general anaesthetic for a facelift procedure?

    A full facelift will require general anaesthetic but some smaller cases and mini facelifts may only require a local anaesthetic with added sedation if requested.

  • What happens during a facelift procedure?

    For a full facelift an incision is usually made at the temple which then runs along and around the hairline round the back of the ears. The facial skin and tissue is then lifted upwards before being repositioned and any excess is then removed. The incisions will then be closed with absorbable stitches.

  • Will I need to stay in hospital?

    We do recommend that patients stay overnight in hospital for both the surgeon and the nursing team to ensure that you are healing well post-surgery.

  • Is facelift surgery painful?

    The feeling after a facelift is not usually pain but just a discomfort as your face may feel tight and full for the first 7-10 days but this can be managed by pain medication provided to you.

  • Facelift After Procedure

  • How long will the results of a facelift last?

    You can expect the results to last for many years. The ageing process is continuous and the facelift aims to tackle the hardest signs of visible ageing. A healthy lifestyle and good skincare routine will help you maintain the effects of the facelift for as long as possible. It is difficult to establish just how long the results will last as each patient present a unique situation. There are a range of aesthetic and cosmetic treatments to assist in maintaining results.

  • Will there be visible scarring after a facelift?

    Scarring is all dependant on the Surgeon’s skills and experience, and with the most advanced facelift techniques available today, scarring is kept to a minimum. Incision sites will be carefully considered to reduce visibility during recovery and in the long-term. They are also very well concealed for both women and men.

  • Will there be visible scarring after a facelift?

    Scarring is all dependent on the Surgeon’s skills and experience, and with the most advanced facelift techniques available today, scarring is kept to a minimum. Incision sites will be carefully considered to reduce visibility during recovery and in the long-term. They are also very well concealed for both women and men. The scars following a facelift are usually found along the hairline and around the ears. This means that the scars are able to be hidden by your hair. Overtime, with proper care your scars will fade and become flat making them almost unnoticeable.

  • Will there be swelling and bruising after a facelift?

    All surgical procedures will cause swelling which includes facelift procedures. Bruising after surgery varies between patients and their natural healing responses. Any bruising and swelling should reduce and eventually clear after 2-3 weeks.

  • How long will I need to take off work?

    We recommend that you book 2 weeks off work but this will depend on depend on the nature of your employment and the type of facelift that you are having.

  • When can I exercise after a facelift?

    After 4-6 weeks you will be able to return to exercise and other strenuous activities, we do recommend that you confirm this with your surgeon first however as everyone’s recovery times are different.

  • When can I wear make-up after facelift surgery?

    We recommend that you avoid wearing make-up for at least a week after your facelift procedure. If you decide to wear make-up after this you should not apply it over any incisions and you must make sure it is removed fully overnight as makeup can expose harmful bacteria to your incisions which can extend your healing time. If you are unsure we would recommend contacting you surgeon or their nursing team for advice.

  • How long will the results of a facelift last for?

    A facelift is essentially permanent however it will not stop your face from naturally ageing. For patients who take care of their skin, avoid smoking and excessive sun exposure then they should be able to reap the benefits of their facelift for upwards of 10 years. There are many non-surgical procedures that can be used to “touch-up” a facelift in the years following surgery.

  • One Stitch Facelift

  • What is the difference between a one stitch facelift and a temporal facelift?

    The one stitch facelift and temporal facelift are very similar in that they both are performed under local anaesthetic and involve minimal downtime. A one stitch facelift however is designed to target the mid-face area whereas the temporal facelift is best for the upper face. To find out more click here to book a consultation.

  • When will I see the results after a one stitch / temporal facelift?

    The results after a temporal or one stitch facelift procedure are immediate. You will instantly see a more lifted appearance to your face.

  • What areas of the face are a one stitch facelift best for?

    The one stitch facelift is best for providing a mid-face lift targeting the top cheek bone area in particular but can also improve the appearance of the jaw line.

  • How much does One Stitch Facelift & Temporal Facelift cost?

    One Stitch Facelift Cost Harley Street During your consultation with one of our Consultant Plastic & Reconstructive Surgeons, you will always be offered the most suitable procedure for your facial structure and desired results. We have a range of face and neck lifting procedures. The cost of the One stitch facelift starts from; £3,900 The cost of the Temporal facelift starts from; £4,900 Consultations for One Stitch Facelift procedures with one of our senior Consultant Plastic Surgeons are £100. Please note consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon

  • Is there a one stitch or temporal facelift clinic near me?

    Our one stitch facelift and temporal facelift is only available in London. Consultations will take place at; London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ and the surgery will take place at London Hospital, 1 Fitzroy Square, W1T 5HE To find out more about booking a consultation contact us here.

  • When can I wear make-up after a one stitch facelift or temporal facelift?

    Once the one stitch or temporal facelift has been performed you will be able to leave the clinic wearing make-up. A major advantage of these types of facelifts is that no one will ever need to know that you had the procedure and the downtime is minimal. The scar is located within your hairline so is not within the area where make-up would be applied. We do advise that you are gentle whilst applying the make-up and do not press against or pull on the skin too much for the initial couple of days but you will be able to return to your usual beauty routines almost instantly after the procedure.

  • Can I drive after a one stitch facelift or temporal facelift?

    You will not be able to drive on the day after having a one stitch or temporal facelift procedure but the majority of patients are fine to continue driving 24 hours after the procedure if they are feeling well.

  • What is a one stitch facelift?

    The one stitch facelift is a mid-facelift procedure that only involves one external stitch. The incision is located in the hairline close to the top of the year. It targets the top cheek bone area but many notice a subtle lift in the jawline area too. To find out more click here to book a consultation. The one stitch facelift and temporal facelift are very similar in that they both are performed under local anaesthetic and involve minimal downtime. A one stitch facelift however is designed to target the mid-face area whereas the temporal facelift is best for the upper face.

  • What is a temporal facelift?

    A temporal facelift targets the upper eye and brow area with the incision being made close the temple within the hair line. To find out more click here to book a consultation.

  • Am I good candidate for the one stitch facelift?

    Typical candidates for the one stitch or temporal facelift are patients in their 40’s, 50s and early 60s who are starting to experience facial sagging and lack of elasticity. The one stitch or temporal facelift is ideal for busy professional patients that want to look refreshed but are not able to take long periods of time off work to recover. It is also great for patients who do not wish to have a complete dramatic change but more of a subtle lift. To find out more about your suitability for a one stitch or temporal facelift click here to book a consultation.

  • One Stitch Facelift General Procedure

  • What is the difference between a one stitch facelift and a temporal facelift?

    The one stitch facelift and temporal facelift are very similar in that they both are performed under local anaesthetic and involve minimal downtime. A one stitch facelift however is designed to target the mid-face area whereas the temporal facelift is best for the upper face. To find out more click here to book a consultation.

  • What is a one stitch facelift?

    The one stitch facelift is a mid-facelift procedure that only involves one external stitch. The incision is located in the hairline close to the top of the year. It targets the top cheek bone area but many notice a subtle lift in the jawline area too. To find out more click here to book a consultation. The one stitch facelift and temporal facelift are very similar in that they both are performed under local anaesthetic and involve minimal downtime. A one stitch facelift however is designed to target the mid-face area whereas the temporal facelift is best for the upper face.

  • What is a temporal facelift?

    A temporal facelift targets the upper eye and brow area with the incision being made close the temple within the hair line. To find out more click here to book a consultation.

  • One Stitch Facelift Before Procedure

  • What areas of the face are a one stitch facelift best for?

    The one stitch facelift is best for providing a mid-face lift targeting the top cheek bone area in particular but can also improve the appearance of the jaw line.

  • How much does One Stitch Facelift & Temporal Facelift cost?

    One Stitch Facelift Cost Harley Street During your consultation with one of our Consultant Plastic & Reconstructive Surgeons, you will always be offered the most suitable procedure for your facial structure and desired results. We have a range of face and neck lifting procedures. The cost of the One stitch facelift starts from; £3,900 The cost of the Temporal facelift starts from; £4,900 Consultations for One Stitch Facelift procedures with one of our senior Consultant Plastic Surgeons are £100. Please note consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon

  • Is there a one stitch or temporal facelift clinic near me?

    Our one stitch facelift and temporal facelift is only available in London. Consultations will take place at; London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ and the surgery will take place at London Hospital, 1 Fitzroy Square, W1T 5HE To find out more about booking a consultation contact us here.

  • Am I good candidate for the one stitch facelift?

    Typical candidates for the one stitch or temporal facelift are patients in their 40’s, 50s and early 60s who are starting to experience facial sagging and lack of elasticity. The one stitch or temporal facelift is ideal for busy professional patients that want to look refreshed but are not able to take long periods of time off work to recover. It is also great for patients who do not wish to have a complete dramatic change but more of a subtle lift. To find out more about your suitability for a one stitch or temporal facelift click here to book a consultation.

  • What areas of the face are a temporal facelift best for?

    The temporal facelift is aimed to lift the upper portion of the face, in particular the eyes and brow areas.

  • One Stitch Facelift Day of Procedure

  • How long does a one stitch facelift take to perform?

    A one stitch facelift takes up to 40 minutes to perform. The procedure takes place under local anaesthetic which results in a shorter downtime and little to no bruising is expected. To find out more about the one stitch facelift procedure click here to book a consultation.

  • How long does a temporal facelift take to perform?

    A temporal facelift is performed in 40 minutes or less under local anaesthetic. Patients can expect little to no bruising and minimal downtime. Click here to book a consultation to find out more about our temporal facelift procedure.

  • Will I feel anything during a one stitch or temporal facelift procedure?

    Both procedures are carried out under local anaesthetic so you should not feel anything during the operation. The local anaesthetic injection may sting a little initially but once the anaesthetic takes place you will not feel it.  Some patients may feel a little discomfort from the procedure but it will not be painful and our surgical team will be on hand to ensure that you are feeling comfortable throughout the procedure. Our surgeons will be able to go into more detail about what to expect from the 1 stich or temporal facelift procedures in a consultation. Click here to book.

  • One Stitch Facelift After Procedure

  • When will I see the results after a one stitch / temporal facelift?

    The results after a temporal or one stitch facelift procedure are immediate. You will instantly see a more lifted appearance to your face.

  • When can I wear make-up after a one stitch facelift or temporal facelift?

    Once the one stitch or temporal facelift has been performed you will be able to leave the clinic wearing make-up. A major advantage of these types of facelifts is that no one will ever need to know that you had the procedure and the downtime is minimal. The scar is located within your hairline so is not within the area where make-up would be applied. We do advise that you are gentle whilst applying the make-up and do not press against or pull on the skin too much for the initial couple of days but you will be able to return to your usual beauty routines almost instantly after the procedure.

  • Can I drive after a one stitch facelift or temporal facelift?

    You will not be able to drive on the day after having a one stitch or temporal facelift procedure but the majority of patients are fine to continue driving 24 hours after the procedure if they are feeling well.

  • How long do the results from a one stitch facelift or temporal facelift last?

    The results after a one stitch or temporal facelift are permanent as it is a surgical procedure however it will not stop the face from ageing over time. If your skin elasticity is good then you can expect to continue seeing the results for years to come. Taking care of your face with a good skincare regime will help to ensure that your results last for a long time. To find out more about what to expect from the one stitch facelift or temporal facelift procedure click here to book a consultation with our experienced surgeons.

  • Will I need to wear any bandages after a one stitch facelift or temporal facelift procedure?

    You will not be required to wear any bandages after a one stitch or temporal facelift procedure. You may have one placed temporarily over the incision whilst you are still within the clinic but this often removed before you leave or you will be advised to remove it once you return home.

  • Do I need to take time off work if I am having a temporal facelift?

    We recommend that patients take off the day after the one stitch or temporal facelift to allow them to relax.  If you work in a particular strenuous or dusty job role then your surgeon may suggest allowing a couple of extra days but this will be discussed in your consultation.

  • How long until I can wash my hair after a one stitch facelift or temporal facelift?

    We advise patients to wash their hair the day/night before their procedure so that they are feeling fresh and clean for longer post-procedure. Patients are able to wash their hair 24 hours after the procedure and you will also be fine to take a shower 1 day after the procedure too. A full list of aftercare advice will be provided to you post-procedure.

  • Can I wear glasses after a temporal facelift?

    Following a temporal or one stitch facelift you will need to be careful when wearing glasses. The area where the incision was does sit within the area that the glasses would sit so we do advise patients to rest the glasses over the ear rather than behind the ear for a few days whilst the area heals. Some patient’s prefer to use a glasses strap for a few days and others find that contact lenses are the easiest option for a few days also.

  • Where is the scar for a one stitch facelift?

    The scar for the one stitch facelift is made in the hairline near to the top of the ear. Our surgeons take care to position your scar in a position that is not going to be noticeable and also easy to cover with hair. Your surgeon will provide you with information on how to care your scar at your post-op appointments. Following your surgeons scar care advice will ensure your scar continues to heal and fade over the course of a year. To find out more about scarring after a one stitch facelift click here to book a consultation.

  • Where is the scar for a temporal facelift?

    The scar for the temporal facelift is above the ear located closer to the temple in the hairline. This position makes it hidden and easy to cover up with various hair styles. Full advice on scar care will be given to you at your post-op appointments. With proper scar care you can expect your scar to gradually become less noticeable over the course of a year. To find out more about scarring after a temporal facelift click here to book a consultation.

  • Earlobe Repair

  • Is there a limit to the size of earlobe stretch that can be repaired?

    All sizes of ear stretches can be repaired.

  • What happens during an earlobe repair procedure?

    Topical numbing cream will be applied to your earlobes before local anaesthesia is injected into the lobe. Once numb, your ear will then be wiped down and sterile drapes will be placed around the ear. The technique of correcting a stretched earlobe will vary slightly deepening on the shape and size but generally a section of tissue will be removed and the open ends are then stitched back together with absorbable stitches and a bandage will be applied.

  • How long will the results from earlobe surgery last?

    Earlobe repair surgery is permanent so unless you decide to stretch your earlobes or you wear certain earrings that may stretch the ear again – your earlobe surgery results should be unaffected.

  • How much does Earlobe Repair Surgery cost?

    Split Earlobe Repair Cost UK Bilateral Earlobe reconstruction surgery prices start at £950 for a small procedure (split earlobe repair). Split earlobe repair on only one ear (unilateral) starts from £475. We also offer Tribal Earlobe / Stretched earlobe correction. Click here to find out more. We don’t follow a one-price-fits-all policy and prices are quoted on a case by case basis. You will be given an accurate quote for your requirements following your consultation. Consultations with our plastic surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our plastic surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Please note all consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon.

  • Is there an earlobe repair surgery clinic near me?

    The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an expert split earlobe repair surgeon located near to you. Our clinics are in; London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ Manchester – 25 St John Street, M3 4DT Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire Buckinghamshire – Stokenchurch Medical Center Oxford Road, HP14 3SX – South East England Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands We also have consulting rooms in Milton Keynes where you can have consultations with one of our patient advisors. To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here.

  • What is earlobe repair?

    Earlobe repair is a surgical procedure that aims to correct the appearance of split or stretched earlobes medically known as a lobuloplasty.

  • What is a split earlobe?

    A split earlobe is when there is a separation of the skin on the lobe which causes a split-like appearance.

  • What is a stretched or tribal earlobe?

    A stretched earlobe is when the lobe has been purposely stretched using various ear taper tools and plugs to create an enlarged appearance.

  • Why do earlobes split?

    Split earlobes are most commonly caused when earrings catch on clothing for example and they can tear the skin. They can also be caused by wearing heavy earrings for long periods of time.

  • Will a stretched or split earlobe heal naturally without surgery?

    If you had ear stretchers and they were below 10mm it is possible that the hole in your ear will naturally constrict back to a smaller size. If the hole is over 10mm then the hole will gradually shrink over time, but not enough so that it would not be noticeable and you will then require surgery to repair it.

  • Earlobe Repair General procedure

  • How long will the results from earlobe surgery last?

    Earlobe repair surgery is permanent so unless you decide to stretch your earlobes or you wear certain earrings that may stretch the ear again – your earlobe surgery results should be unaffected.

  • How much does Earlobe Repair Surgery cost?

    Split Earlobe Repair Cost UK Bilateral Earlobe reconstruction surgery prices start at £950 for a small procedure (split earlobe repair). Split earlobe repair on only one ear (unilateral) starts from £475. We also offer Tribal Earlobe / Stretched earlobe correction. Click here to find out more. We don’t follow a one-price-fits-all policy and prices are quoted on a case by case basis. You will be given an accurate quote for your requirements following your consultation. Consultations with our plastic surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our plastic surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Please note all consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon.

  • Is there an earlobe repair surgery clinic near me?

    The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an expert split earlobe repair surgeon located near to you. Our clinics are in; London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ Manchester – 25 St John Street, M3 4DT Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire Buckinghamshire – Stokenchurch Medical Center Oxford Road, HP14 3SX – South East England Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands We also have consulting rooms in Milton Keynes where you can have consultations with one of our patient advisors. To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here.

  • What is earlobe repair?

    Earlobe repair is a surgical procedure that aims to correct the appearance of split or stretched earlobes medically known as a lobuloplasty.

  • What is a split earlobe?

    A split earlobe is when there is a separation of the skin on the lobe which causes a split-like appearance.

  • What is a stretched or tribal earlobe?

    A stretched earlobe is when the lobe has been purposely stretched using various ear taper tools and plugs to create an enlarged appearance.

  • Why do earlobes split?

    Split earlobes are most commonly caused when earrings catch on clothing for example and they can tear the skin. They can also be caused by wearing heavy earrings for long periods of time.

  • Will a stretched or split earlobe heal naturally without surgery?

    If you had ear stretchers and they were below 10mm it is possible that the hole in your ear will naturally constrict back to a smaller size. If the hole is over 10mm then the hole will gradually shrink over time, but not enough so that it would not be noticeable and you will then require surgery to repair it.

  • What is a rotational flap earlobe repair?

    Split earlobe repair with rotation flap is a technique which allows patients be able to safely wear earrings again two weeks after their procedure instead of having to wait 6 months. The length of this procedure takes between 30 -40 minutes per earlobe.

  • Can I pierce my ears after earlobe surgery?

    You will be able to pierce you ears again after surgery. We usually recommend that you wait 6 months before doing this however to ensure the earlobe has fully healed. We would also recommend that you only wear small stud earrings to begin with as your earlobe will be weaker.

  • Earlobe Repair Before Procedure

  • Is there a limit to the size of earlobe stretch that can be repaired?

    All sizes of ear stretches can be repaired.

  • What does a free split earlobe repair consultation mean?

    We offer a free split earlobe repair phone and video consultations with an experienced patient adviser. They will provide information on the best earlobe repair surgeons to suit your requirements. In order to secure the timed appointment we will ask for a £25 refundable deposit. This is refunded once the consultation takes place. You can change your appointment time up to 48 hours before. Contact us to book your free phone or video consultation.

  • Earlobe Repair Day of Procedure

  • What happens during an earlobe repair procedure?

    Topical numbing cream will be applied to your earlobes before local anaesthesia is injected into the lobe. Once numb, your ear will then be wiped down and sterile drapes will be placed around the ear. The technique of correcting a stretched earlobe will vary slightly deepening on the shape and size but generally a section of tissue will be removed and the open ends are then stitched back together with absorbable stitches and a bandage will be applied.

  • How long does earlobe repair surgery take?

    Earlobe repair usually takes around 15 minutes per ear.

  • Is earlobe repair carried out under general or local anaesthetic?

    Earlobe repair surgery is usually carried out under local anaesthetic.

  • Does earlobe repair hurt?

    You should feel no pain during the procedure as both a topical numbing cream and local anaesthetic is applied to the area. As the anaesthetic gradually wears off post-procedure you may feel a little discomfort which can easily be managed with pain relief such as paracetamol.

  • Earlobe Repair After Procedure

  • How will I need to sleep after my surgery?

    There are no real limitations to the position you can sleep in after earlobe repair surgery. We usually recommend that you sleep with an extra pillow as this will elevate your head and reduce any bruising or swelling.

  • When can I exercise after earlobe repair surgery?

    We recommend that strenuous exercise is avoided for 48 hours to reduce the risk of bleeding and reduce pain.

  • Will I be able to drive home after earlobe repair surgery?

    You are usually fine to drive home after an earlobe procedure unless you have taken any medication during surgery that may make your insurance invalid.

  • When will I be able to wash my hair after earlobe repair surgery?

    You will be able to shower and wash your hair 24 hours after your procedure. Take care not to get the earlobe excessively wet and that you pat dry the area afterwards.

  • How long is the healing time after earlobe repair surgery?

    The healing time is usually 4-6 weeks.

  • Will my stitches need removing?

    The stitches used for earlobe repair are usually absorbable stitches which mean they will naturally dissolve within 2 weeks. If it has been two weeks and they are still visible then they can be removed at a post-op appointment.

  • Tribal Earlobe Repair

  • What is a stretched or tribal earlobe?

    A stretched earlobe is when the lobe has been purposely stretched using various ear taper tools and plugs to create an enlarged appearance.

  • Is there a limit to the size of earlobe stretch that can be repaired?

    Our surgeons are very experienced and are able to successfully repair all sizes of stretched tribal earlobes. Click here to book a consultation to see how we can help.

  • What happens during a tribal earlobe repair procedure?

    Topical numbing cream will have been applied to your earlobes and local anaesthetic is then injected into the lobe. At this point your ear should become completely numb and your ear will be wiped down and sterile drapes will be placed around the area to keep it clean. The technique used for stretched earlobes will depend on the on the shape and size of the earlobe but in most cases a section of tissue will be removed and the open ends will be stitched back together with absorbable stitches and a small bandage will be applied. Your surgeon will then start to repair your other ear if you are having both sides treated.

  • How much does Tribal Earlobe Repair cost?

    Bilateral stretched / tribal earlobe repair starts at £2,100 and can vary according to the degree of correction required, whether it is just the one ear or both that need the procedure and the size of your flesh tunnel. One tribal earlobe (unilaterial) repair starts from £1050 We don’t follow a one-price-fits-all policy and prices are quoted on a case by case basis. You will be given an accurate quote for your requirements following your consultation. Consultations with our plastic surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our plastic surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Please note all consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon.

  • Is there a tribal earlobe repair clinic near me?

    The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an expert earlobe repair surgeon located near to you. Our clinics are in; London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ Manchester – 25 St John Street, M3 4DT Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire Buckinghamshire – Stokenchurch Medical Center Oxford Road, HP14 3SX – South East England Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands We also have consulting rooms in Milton Keynes where you can have consultations with one of our patient coordinators. To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here.

  • Will a stretched earlobe heal naturally without surgery?

    If you had ear stretchers and they were below 10mm it is possible that the hole in your ear will naturally constrict back to a smaller size. If the hole is over 10mm then the hole will gradually shrink over time, but not enough so that it would not be noticeable and you will then require surgery to repair it.

  • How long does tribal earlobe repair surgery take?

    We usually estimate 15-20 minutes of surgery per ear. This will vary depending how big the ear is stretched too.

  • Is tribal earlobe repair carried out under general or local anaesthetic?

    We carry out the majority of our tribal earlobe repair procedures under local anaesthetic. The procedure itself is very quick and we will ensure that you are not in any pain throughout the procedure. If you are feeling anxious about surgery then a sedative could also be used but general anaesthetic is not normally used.

  • Does tribal earlobe repair hurt?

    You should not be in any pain during tribal earlobe repair surgery as both a topical numbing cream and local anaesthetic will have been applied to the area being treated. Post-surgery, you may start to feel a little discomfort as the anaesthetic wears off. In most cases this is easily dealt with but it can also be managed with pain relief such as paracetamol.

  • Will I be able to drive home after stretched earlobe repair surgery?

    If your tribal earlobe repair procedure took place under local anaesthetic then you should be fine to drive home afterwards. However we do recommend that patients come with a friend or family member in case you feel unwell or faint after the procedure and they can instead drive you home.

  • Tribal Earlobe Repair General Procedure

  • What is a stretched or tribal earlobe?

    A stretched earlobe is when the lobe has been purposely stretched using various ear taper tools and plugs to create an enlarged appearance.

  • Is there a limit to the size of earlobe stretch that can be repaired?

    Our surgeons are very experienced and are able to successfully repair all sizes of stretched tribal earlobes. Click here to book a consultation to see how we can help.

  • How much does Tribal Earlobe Repair cost?

    Bilateral stretched / tribal earlobe repair starts at £2,100 and can vary according to the degree of correction required, whether it is just the one ear or both that need the procedure and the size of your flesh tunnel. One tribal earlobe (unilaterial) repair starts from £1050 We don’t follow a one-price-fits-all policy and prices are quoted on a case by case basis. You will be given an accurate quote for your requirements following your consultation. Consultations with our plastic surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our plastic surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Please note all consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon.

  • Is there a tribal earlobe repair clinic near me?

    The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an expert earlobe repair surgeon located near to you. Our clinics are in; London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ Manchester – 25 St John Street, M3 4DT Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire Buckinghamshire – Stokenchurch Medical Center Oxford Road, HP14 3SX – South East England Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands We also have consulting rooms in Milton Keynes where you can have consultations with one of our patient coordinators. To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here.

  • Will a stretched earlobe heal naturally without surgery?

    If you had ear stretchers and they were below 10mm it is possible that the hole in your ear will naturally constrict back to a smaller size. If the hole is over 10mm then the hole will gradually shrink over time, but not enough so that it would not be noticeable and you will then require surgery to repair it.

  • How long will the results from tribal earlobe repair surgery last?

    The results from tribal earlobe repair surgery are permanent so unless you decide to stretch your ear again, they should not return to how they looked pre-surgery.

  • Can I pierce or stretch my earlobes again after tribal earlobe surgery?

    It is possible to pierce or stretch your ears again after tribal earlobe repair but for the best results we do advise that you refrain from doing so. A standard ear piercing avoiding the scar would be fine once the earlobe has fully healed after 6 months but try to refrain from stretching the lobe again as it will be weaker and more prone to splitting.

  • Will I need time off work after tribal earlobe surgery?

    The majority of patients return to work the following day after their tribal earlobe repair procedure. If you work in a dusty environment or in a particularly strenuous job then it may be advised that you take a couple of days off to allow for the earlobe to heal. It is worth noting that your stitches may still be visible for up to a week post-procedure so additional time off may be required if you work in a cosmetically sensitive job.

  • What is the scar like after tribal earlobe repair surgery?

    All surgical procedures unfortunately cause a scar. Tribal earlobe repair creates a thin linear scar on your earlobe. Initially this scar may appear red but this should gradually fade over time and in most cases becomes unnoticeable.  Our surgeons will be able to advise you on scar care post-procedure to help you achieve the best results.

  • Is tribal earlobe repair surgery safe?

    As with any surgical procedure there are always risks but tribal earlobe repair is a very safe procedure. Common complications include poor scaring and infection.

  • Tribal Earlobe Repair Before Procedure

  • What does a free tribal ear repair consultation mean?

    We are offering free tribal ear correction phone or video consultations. These consultations are with our experienced patient coordinators who will provide information on the procedure and the best tribal ear correction surgeon to suit your requirements. In order to secure the timed appointment we will ask you to pay a £25 refundable deposit. This is refunded once the consultation takes place. You can change your appointment time up to 48 hours before. Contact us to book a free phone or video consultation.

  • Tribal Earlobe Repair Day of Procedure

  • What happens during a tribal earlobe repair procedure?

    Topical numbing cream will have been applied to your earlobes and local anaesthetic is then injected into the lobe. At this point your ear should become completely numb and your ear will be wiped down and sterile drapes will be placed around the area to keep it clean. The technique used for stretched earlobes will depend on the on the shape and size of the earlobe but in most cases a section of tissue will be removed and the open ends will be stitched back together with absorbable stitches and a small bandage will be applied. Your surgeon will then start to repair your other ear if you are having both sides treated.

  • How long does tribal earlobe repair surgery take?

    We usually estimate 15-20 minutes of surgery per ear. This will vary depending how big the ear is stretched too.

  • Is tribal earlobe repair carried out under general or local anaesthetic?

    We carry out the majority of our tribal earlobe repair procedures under local anaesthetic. The procedure itself is very quick and we will ensure that you are not in any pain throughout the procedure. If you are feeling anxious about surgery then a sedative could also be used but general anaesthetic is not normally used.

  • Does tribal earlobe repair hurt?

    You should not be in any pain during tribal earlobe repair surgery as both a topical numbing cream and local anaesthetic will have been applied to the area being treated. Post-surgery, you may start to feel a little discomfort as the anaesthetic wears off. In most cases this is easily dealt with but it can also be managed with pain relief such as paracetamol.

  • Tribal Earlobe Repair After Procedure

  • Will I be able to drive home after stretched earlobe repair surgery?

    If your tribal earlobe repair procedure took place under local anaesthetic then you should be fine to drive home afterwards. However we do recommend that patients come with a friend or family member in case you feel unwell or faint after the procedure and they can instead drive you home.

  • How soon can I exercise after tribal earlobe repair surgery?

    You will be able to get back to your exercise routine 48 hours after your surgery. We advise patients to wait 48 hours to reduce the risk of bleeding and pain in the area treated. You should also take care if you are involved in contact sports and ensure that your ears are protected and not at risk of being rubbed for at least 6 weeks post-procedure.

  • When can I wash my hair after tribal earlobe repair surgery?

    You will be able to wash your hair 24 hours after stretched earlobe repair surgery. We recommend that you try to avoid the earlobe getting excessively wet and that you gently pat dry the area afterwards. Full aftercare advice will be provided to you on the day of your surgery.

  • How long does it take for the earlobe to heal after tribal earlobe repair surgery?

    It can take up to 4-6 weeks for the stitches to absorb and the wounds from tribal earlobe repair surgery to heal.

  • Will my stitches need to be removed after tribal earlobe repair surgery?

    At The Private Clinic we use absorbable stitches in earlobe repair surgery. Absorbable begin to naturally dissolve after 1-2 weeks. If you notice visible stitches after two weeks then you may need to book a post-op appointment to get them removed.

  • Otoplasty General Procedure

  • What is the recovery period like after ear correction surgery?

    A standard otoplasty recovery timeline; First 24 hours– You will be required to wear a mild compressive garment around your head. If you do manage to catch a glimpse, your ears may appear or feel larger but this is due to the swelling. 24 to 72 hours– Although the initial compression bandages may be removed, you will still be required to wear a light headband around your ears for the next 1-2 weeks. The majority of your swelling will begin to reduce. You will be able to shower/bathe from the neck down without any restrictions however you should avoid washing your hair until at least 3-4 days after the procedure. 72 hours to First Week– Some patients feel happy to return to work at this point but this will depend on the swelling and what your job involves. First Week to Second Week– At this point, the swelling should have subsided and most patients feel comfortable to be in social situations and have returned to work and their normal activities. You will also be able to shower as normal at the end of the first week. After two weeks you won’t need to wear the headband at all times, just at night for another couple of weeks. Three Months– Your swelling should be completely gone at this stage.

  • Is there a difference between an otoplasty and a pinnaplasty?

    If you have been researching ear correction you may have noticed that some refer to the procedure as an otoplasty and others as a pinnaplasty. Are they the same thing? You’ll be pleased to know that everyone is still talking the same language and there is no difference between an otoplasty and a pinnaplasty. There is no difference, Pinna refers to the projecting part of the ear outside the head, oto means ear when combined with other words such as ‘ology’ or ‘plasty’ which then means moulding or reshaping of a defect to restore form and/or function to a body part.

  • How much does Otoplasty (Ear Correction Surgery) cost?

    The cost of an otoplasty/pinnaplasty procedure starts from £3,295 (under local anaesthetic). We don’t follow a one-price-fits-all policy and prices are quoted on a case by case basis. You will be given an accurate quote for your requirements following your consultation. Consultations with our plastic surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our plastic surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Please note all consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon.

  • Is there an ear surgery clinic near me?

    The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an expert ear surgeons located near to you. Our clinics are in; London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ Manchester – 25 St John Street, M3 4DT Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands We also have consulting rooms in Milton Keynes where you can have consultations with one of our patient coordinators.

  • How does an otoplasty work?

    An otoplasty procedure involves the surgeon reshaping the cartilage of the ear. The cartilage is what forms the ear underneath the skin. If you are born with misshapen ears, this is often corrected through the use of a splint in the first couple of days as the cartilage is very soft and mouldable with no need for invasive surgery.gtf

  • How long will the procedure take?

    An Otoplasty procedure typically takes about two to three hours to complete. Depending on the case and the desired results, the treatment can be performed under local or general anaesthetic.

  • Is ear correction surgery painful?

    An otoplasty procedure is performed under local or general anaesthetic to ensure that you are comfortable and feel no pain. You may experience some mild discomfort after surgery which can be managed with painkillers and will subside after a few days.

  • I have had an otoplasty as a child, but I feel my ears are still prominent, can this be performed again?

    Generally a child will have ear correction surgery before the age of 5 and this is decided by the parents. When the child is between 5 and 13 they are usually not too worried about their appearance but then after age 13 there seems to be popularity again for those favouring the surgery. We are always able to operate again on the same area if you feel you need to have the procedure again, but always make sure you talk to your surgeon about your realistic expectations. To find out about your suitability for ear correction surgery, make a consultation to see one of our expert plastic surgeons.

  • Will there be a scar?

    EarFold® only requires a small incision which results in a small scar (8-10mm long). In the majority of cases the scar will fade and be virtually undetectable after a few months.

  • Can you make my ears smaller instead of changing their projection?

    Yes, we can. Your surgeon will assess your ears and give you objective advice about the proportions of your ears compared to your face and the best way for you to achieve natural-looking results. It is possible to change the shape, projection and size of the ears. Ears can be pinned back, or skin can be removed and the cartilage reshaped when making other aesthetic changes. To find out more about what an otoplasty procedure can do for you, click here to book a consultation.

  • Otoplasty Before Procedure

  • Am I suitable for ear correction surgery?

    An otoplasty / pinnaplasty procedure is not suitable for everyone. This is why it is important to do your research and go along for consultations with surgeons to work out your suitability and what you can realistically expect from surgery. Anyone with ears that are of normal size or shape with no obvious deformity apart from the prominence of them will be suitable for surgery. Those with lop ears for example or microtia will not be suitable for surgery. To find out about your suitability for ear correction surgery, make a consultation to see one of our expert plastic surgeons.

  • Am I too old for an otoplasty?

    You may be thinking you’ve left it too late, or it is not worth having anymore but age is just a number and if something is bothering you enough to even consider surgical options to treat it then it is well worth asking the question. As long as you are fit and healthy then there is no age limit to ear correction surgery. As this type of surgery is an elective operation, we are a little stricter on health as we need to ensure that you are able to recover from the aesthetic. To find out about your suitability for ear correction surgery, make a consultation to see one of our expert plastic surgeons.

  • Will an otoplasty affect my hearing?

    An otoplasty will have no effect on your hearing. There are three parts to the ear; the pinna is the external ear, the middle ear which is behind the eardrum and then deeper in you have the inner ear balance. When you have ear correction surgery it will only affect the pinna region of the ear. After the surgery you will be required to wear bandages which cover your ears – this may reduce your hearing slightly but once you are allowed to remove these, your hearing will return to normal.

  • How long will I have to wear a support band for?

    In the first five to seven days following your procedure, you will have to wear a turban head-bandage to protect and support your wounds. During this time, you will have to wear a support band day and night. Depending on your case, you may be required to wear the support band for up to four to six weeks. In the first five to seven days following your procedure, you will have to wear a turban head-bandage to protect and support your wounds. During this time, you will have to wear a support band day and night. Depending on your case, you may be required to wear the support band for up to four to six weeks.

  • What does a free EarFold® consultation mean?

    We are offering free EarFold® phone or video consultations with an experienced patient coordinator. Our expert coordinators will provide you with information about the EarFold® procedure and recommend the best EarFold® surgeons to suit your requirements. To book your timed appointment we do ask that you pay a £25 refundable deposit. This is refunded once the consultation takes place. You can change your appointment time up to 48 hours before. Contact us to book a free phone or video consultation.

  • What does a free ear surgery consultation mean?

    We offer a free ear surgery phone or video consultations with our experienced patient coordinators. They will be able to provide information on the procedure and the best ear correction surgeons that are going to suit your requirements. In order to secure the timed appointment we will require a £25 refundable deposit. This is refunded once the consultation takes place. You can change your appointment time up to 48 hours before. Contact us to book your free phone or video consultation.

  • Otoplasty Day of Procedure

  • Does ear correction need local or general anaesthetic?

    An otoplasty or pinnaplasty procedure can be performed under a local anaesthetic in most circumstances however this is decided on an individual case basis and you will be told at your consultation what to expect on the day of your procedure.

  • Otoplasty After Procedure

  • When will I be able to wash my hair after surgery?

    When it comes to having any type of surgery, the recovery period can be difficult not just because of any discomfort but because when it comes to doing normal things like having a shower or bath, you may be restricted. We would suggest that before having surgery you do anything that you need to do – bath, shower, hair wash and shave the day before you are due in for surgery. This way you know that it has been done and a few days without being able to perform these actions should not be too traumatic for you! After ear correction surgery you will be required to wear a bandage or dressing for 3-4 days so during this time hair washing will be off limits. Once you have been given the go-ahead by your nurse or surgeon to remove these dressings you will be okay to wash your hair, but just take it easy and it may be worth asking for assistance the first time you attempt to do this.

  • Will I be able to play sports like rugby after an otoplasty?

    Once recovered from ear correction surgery you will be free to play any sport this is usually from 6 weeks. However, we do recommend that you try and avoid any sports that cause excessive friction on the ear like rugby as although this shouldn’t cause your ears to return to their original state – it may distress the ear a little and may eventually lead to deformity that you can see on professional rugby players.

  • Otoplasty

  • Am I suitable for ear correction surgery?

    An otoplasty / pinnaplasty procedure is not suitable for everyone. This is why it is important to do your research and go along for consultations with surgeons to work out your suitability and what you can realistically expect from surgery. Anyone with ears that are of normal size or shape with no obvious deformity apart from the prominence of them will be suitable for surgery. Those with lop ears for example or microtia will not be suitable for surgery. To find out about your suitability for ear correction surgery, make a consultation to see one of our expert plastic surgeons.

  • What is the recovery period like after ear correction surgery?

    A standard otoplasty recovery timeline; First 24 hours– You will be required to wear a mild compressive garment around your head. If you do manage to catch a glimpse, your ears may appear or feel larger but this is due to the swelling. 24 to 72 hours– Although the initial compression bandages may be removed, you will still be required to wear a light headband around your ears for the next 1-2 weeks. The majority of your swelling will begin to reduce. You will be able to shower/bathe from the neck down without any restrictions however you should avoid washing your hair until at least 3-4 days after the procedure. 72 hours to First Week– Some patients feel happy to return to work at this point but this will depend on the swelling and what your job involves. First Week to Second Week– At this point, the swelling should have subsided and most patients feel comfortable to be in social situations and have returned to work and their normal activities. You will also be able to shower as normal at the end of the first week. After two weeks you won’t need to wear the headband at all times, just at night for another couple of weeks. Three Months– Your swelling should be completely gone at this stage.

  • Is there a difference between an otoplasty and a pinnaplasty?

    If you have been researching ear correction you may have noticed that some refer to the procedure as an otoplasty and others as a pinnaplasty. Are they the same thing? You’ll be pleased to know that everyone is still talking the same language and there is no difference between an otoplasty and a pinnaplasty. There is no difference, Pinna refers to the projecting part of the ear outside the head, oto means ear when combined with other words such as ‘ology’ or ‘plasty’ which then means moulding or reshaping of a defect to restore form and/or function to a body part.

  • How much does Otoplasty (Ear Correction Surgery) cost?

    The cost of an otoplasty/pinnaplasty procedure starts from £3,295 (under local anaesthetic). We don’t follow a one-price-fits-all policy and prices are quoted on a case by case basis. You will be given an accurate quote for your requirements following your consultation. Consultations with our plastic surgeons are £100 at our London Harley Street Clinic. Consultations with our plastic surgeons are £50 at our Bristol, Buckinghamshire, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester and Northampton clinics. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which require a £25 refundable deposit to secure your place. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. Please note all consultations at our Harley Street clinic are with a surgeon.

  • Is there an ear surgery clinic near me?

    The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an expert ear surgeons located near to you. Our clinics are in; London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ Manchester – 25 St John Street, M3 4DT Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands We also have consulting rooms in Milton Keynes where you can have consultations with one of our patient coordinators.

  • How does an otoplasty work?

    An otoplasty procedure involves the surgeon reshaping the cartilage of the ear. The cartilage is what forms the ear underneath the skin. If you are born with misshapen ears, this is often corrected through the use of a splint in the first couple of days as the cartilage is very soft and mouldable with no need for invasive surgery.gtf

  • How long will the procedure take?

    An Otoplasty procedure typically takes about two to three hours to complete. Depending on the case and the desired results, the treatment can be performed under local or general anaesthetic.

  • Does ear correction need local or general anaesthetic?

    An otoplasty or pinnaplasty procedure can be performed under a local anaesthetic in most circumstances however this is decided on an individual case basis and you will be told at your consultation what to expect on the day of your procedure.

  • Is ear correction surgery painful?

    An otoplasty procedure is performed under local or general anaesthetic to ensure that you are comfortable and feel no pain. You may experience some mild discomfort after surgery which can be managed with painkillers and will subside after a few days.

  • I have had an otoplasty as a child, but I feel my ears are still prominent, can this be performed again?

    Generally a child will have ear correction surgery before the age of 5 and this is decided by the parents. When the child is between 5 and 13 they are usually not too worried about their appearance but then after age 13 there seems to be popularity again for those favouring the surgery. We are always able to operate again on the same area if you feel you need to have the procedure again, but always make sure you talk to your surgeon about your realistic expectations. To find out about your suitability for ear correction surgery, make a consultation to see one of our expert plastic surgeons.

  • EarFold General Procedure

  • How does EarFold® work?

    The Earfold® implant has a pre-set, curved shape. Once in position and released, Earfold® takes up its curved shape again, repositioning your ear at the angle you and your consultant agreed on. The results are quick, so you won’t have to wait long to see the effect. An Otoplasty procedure typically takes about two to three hours to complete. Depending on the case and the desired results, the treatment can be performed under local or general anaesthetic.

  • What is EarFold® made of?

    EarFold® is a thin, curved, metal strip made of Nitinol. Nitinol is an alloy that is made from two metals, titanium and nickel, and is widely used in medicine. It is the same material that is used for coronary artery stents (for patients with heart disease due to a blockage of their arteries) and also for unbreakable spectacle frames. The EarFold® implant has been plated with 24-carat gold to reduce its visibility. The EarFold® implant has undergone extensive laboratory and human clinical testing over a period of several years. You can expect some normal numbness, swelling and bruising following surgery. You will be given full details about the recovery process during your appointments with the surgeon. You may want to take one to two weeks off work, as well as avoiding exercise or bending forward for the three to four weeks following your surgery. Contact sport should be avoided for at least six weeks.

  • Where can I have EarFold®?

    The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an expert EarFold® surgeon located near to you. Our clinics are in; London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ Manchester – 25 St John Street, M3 4DT Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands We also have consulting rooms in Milton Keynes where you can have consultations with one of our patient coordinators. To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here.

  • Is the procedure painful?

    The only discomfort you should experience is the prick of the needle used for inserting the local anaesthetic and the slight sting of the anaesthetic for 1-2 seconds. Thereafter, the rest of the procedure should be completely painless.

  • Is EarFold® suitable for children?

    EarFold® is suitable for both children and adults; however at The Private Clinic we only treat patients over the age of 18.

  • Do I need to take time off work?

    Any pain after the procedure will usually subside in 24-48 hours and you are not required to keep bandages on post-procedure. As soon as you feel comfortable you will be able to return to work.

  • Is the implant visible in the ear?

    Earfold® implants are coated with 24-carat gold to reduce visibility under your skin, so they are not easily noticeable.

  • EarFold Before Procedure

  • Is EarFold® suitable for all types of Ear Prominence?

    Those who will benefit most from EarFold® are individuals with prominent ears due to an absence or poor development of the anti-helical fold. This is the case for most people with prominent ears and, as a result, the majority of these individuals will benefit from treatment with EarFold®. However, in some cases, prominence can also be due to a very deep conchal bowl. In such cases, EarFold® may be able to improve the prominence but will not correct it altogether and additional procedures (such as a conchal bowl reduction) may be necessary. Either way, your surgeon will be able to advise you during the consultation.

  • How much correction can be achieved with EarFold®?

    For the first time in cosmetic surgery, EarFold® will provide you with a unique opportunity to select the precise amount of correction that you want rather than leaving it to the discretion of the surgeon. At your first visit to the surgeon, you will be able to decide how much of a correction you want. To do this, the surgeon will use EarFold® sizers which are placed onto the outside of your ear to help determine the optimum location for the implant. The sizers are also made of nitinol and are the same size and shape as the actual EarFold® implant. To achieve the desired correction, one or two EarFold® implants are used in each ear.

  • Is EarFold suitable for asymmetric prominence of the ears?

    Some people suffer from asymmetric ears (e.g. one ear is more prominent than the other). The EarFold® implant is the perfect treatment for such cases as it is possible to ensure that the implants are placed in just the right position to achieve satisfactory symmetry.

  • Can the EarFold® implant move once it is in the ear?

    Earfold® implants are made from a lightweight metal alloy called nitinol, a super-elastic material. So your ears can still move in a natural way, and Earfold® is designed to keep its desired shape.

  • Does EarFold® need to be removed or can it be left in permanently?

    The EarFold® implants have been designed to be completely biocompatible and are left in place permanently. If you are not happy with the implant however, then it can be removed.

  • EarFold Day of Procedure

  • How long does it take to insert Earfold®?

    This will depend on the number of implants needed to correct your ear prominence. However the whole procedure (making an incision, inserting EarFold® and closing the incision) should take no longer than 20 minutes.

  • EarFold

  • How does EarFold® work?

    The Earfold® implant has a pre-set, curved shape. Once in position and released, Earfold® takes up its curved shape again, repositioning your ear at the angle you and your consultant agreed on. The results are quick, so you won’t have to wait long to see the effect. An Otoplasty procedure typically takes about two to three hours to complete. Depending on the case and the desired results, the treatment can be performed under local or general anaesthetic.

  • What is EarFold® made of?

    EarFold® is a thin, curved, metal strip made of Nitinol. Nitinol is an alloy that is made from two metals, titanium and nickel, and is widely used in medicine. It is the same material that is used for coronary artery stents (for patients with heart disease due to a blockage of their arteries) and also for unbreakable spectacle frames. The EarFold® implant has been plated with 24-carat gold to reduce its visibility. The EarFold® implant has undergone extensive laboratory and human clinical testing over a period of several years. You can expect some normal numbness, swelling and bruising following surgery. You will be given full details about the recovery process during your appointments with the surgeon. You may want to take one to two weeks off work, as well as avoiding exercise or bending forward for the three to four weeks following your surgery. Contact sport should be avoided for at least six weeks.

  • Is EarFold® suitable for all types of Ear Prominence?

    Those who will benefit most from EarFold® are individuals with prominent ears due to an absence or poor development of the anti-helical fold. This is the case for most people with prominent ears and, as a result, the majority of these individuals will benefit from treatment with EarFold®. However, in some cases, prominence can also be due to a very deep conchal bowl. In such cases, EarFold® may be able to improve the prominence but will not correct it altogether and additional procedures (such as a conchal bowl reduction) may be necessary. Either way, your surgeon will be able to advise you during the consultation.

  • How much correction can be achieved with EarFold®?

    For the first time in cosmetic surgery, EarFold® will provide you with a unique opportunity to select the precise amount of correction that you want rather than leaving it to the discretion of the surgeon. At your first visit to the surgeon, you will be able to decide how much of a correction you want. To do this, the surgeon will use EarFold® sizers which are placed onto the outside of your ear to help determine the optimum location for the implant. The sizers are also made of nitinol and are the same size and shape as the actual EarFold® implant. To achieve the desired correction, one or two EarFold® implants are used in each ear.

  • Where can I have EarFold®?

    The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an expert EarFold® surgeon located near to you. Our clinics are in; London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ Manchester – 25 St John Street, M3 4DT Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands We also have consulting rooms in Milton Keynes where you can have consultations with one of our patient coordinators. To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here.

  • How long does it take to insert Earfold®?

    This will depend on the number of implants needed to correct your ear prominence. However the whole procedure (making an incision, inserting EarFold® and closing the incision) should take no longer than 20 minutes.

  • Is the procedure painful?

    The only discomfort you should experience is the prick of the needle used for inserting the local anaesthetic and the slight sting of the anaesthetic for 1-2 seconds. Thereafter, the rest of the procedure should be completely painless.

  • Is EarFold® suitable for children?

    EarFold® is suitable for both children and adults; however at The Private Clinic we only treat patients over the age of 18.

  • Is EarFold suitable for asymmetric prominence of the ears?

    Some people suffer from asymmetric ears (e.g. one ear is more prominent than the other). The EarFold® implant is the perfect treatment for such cases as it is possible to ensure that the implants are placed in just the right position to achieve satisfactory symmetry.

  • Do I need to take time off work?

    Any pain after the procedure will usually subside in 24-48 hours and you are not required to keep bandages on post-procedure. As soon as you feel comfortable you will be able to return to work.

  • Hair Transplant for Men

  • Am I suitable for a FUE Hair Transplant?

    There are a lot of factors that play a part in making a hair transplant successful. Your suitability for a hair transplant will be made during a consultation where your medical history will be taken, a hair analysis will be carried out and you will be able to discuss what your desired results will be from a hair transplant. At this stage your highly experienced Hair Transplant surgeon will be able to ensure it is the right procedure for you. In order to make this decision your surgeon will be looking at your; 1. Age – Although there is not really an age limit for a hair transplant, it still plays a role with the best candidates for hair transplants being over 27-30 years old in age. Many younger patients who are experiencing hair loss can be quick to rush into hair transplant procedures to correct the appearance of balding but it is often likely that you will need additional treatment later on in life as your hair loss will still continue naturally. At The Private Clinic we like to wait until patients are a bit older so we can better determine the pattern on baldness to accurately perform the treatment to help counteract further baldness. In the meantime, you may be recommended to have the Tricho Hair Loss DNA test which can help you better understand the underlaying factors of hair loss and offer you a personalised treatment plan to help protect and maintain your healthy hair follicles. 2. Donor Area – You must have a good supply of healthy hair follicles available to be transplanted. The donor area is usually the lower back portion of the scalp. At The Private Clinic one of the most important stages of your consultation is assessing your level of hair loss and both the quality and quantity of your donor hair. 3. Type of Hair Loss – The cause of your hair loss will also play a big part in your suitability for a hair transplant. The best candidates are those suffering with male or female pattern baldness as typically only affects certain areas of the scalp not the entire scalp meaning your donor area is most likely going to be unaffected. Hair loss conditions that affect the entire scalp such as un-patterned alopecia would not have a successful hair transplant. At The Private Clinic we will only offer hair transplant procedures to those who are suitable as we do not believe in wasting your time or money on a procedure that is not going to give you long-lasting results. 4. Health – To be suitable for a hair transplant you must be in good health both medically and through making healthy life choices. If you have an underlying health condition it is best to make your surgeon aware. To better determine your suitability for a hair transplant book in for a hair transplant consultation at The Private Clinic here.

  • How many grafts/follicles will be transplanted?

    The number of grafts that you require will depend on the size of the area that is being treated. Your surgeon will discuss with you what look you are aiming to achieve and on that basis be able to give you an estimated amount of grafts/follicles that they plan to transplant however this number can change during the procedure. The total number of grafts used can change during the procedure itself so the exact hair count will then be discussed at the end of your procedure. At The Private Clinic we are able to safely extract 7,000 hairs in one day.

  • How does follicular unit extraction (FUE) work?

    An FUE hair transplant involves taking individual hair follicles from the donor part of the scalp and then transplanting them back into areas of the head that are suffering from male pattern baldness. Donor hair is taken from the back of the head where there is healthy and permanent hair growth. Donor hair from the back of the head is also resistant to DHT which is the most common cause of male pattern baldness. When these DHT resistant hair follicles are transplanted into a new area, they still retain this element meaning that the hair will be more likely to survive and stay unless it was genetically meant to fall out. Hairs that have been transplanted from your donor area are also able to successfully root as they are from your own head. This is why hair transplanted from other areas or even other people will not be possible. To find out more about our successful hair transplant procedures click here to book an appointment with our specialist hair transplant surgeons.

  • How soon will I see the results?

    Patients will be able to see the outline of their new hairline immediately following treatment and the hair will start to grow as normal right away. It is perfectly normal for the transplanted hair to shed again a few weeks after treatment, but after that initial shedding it will grow back strong and healthy and will remain permanently. Results will start to be seen about four – six weeks after treatment with full results being seen between six to twelve months. At The Private Clinic you will be offered a number of follow up procedures where you will be able to meet with your surgeon to discuss the results of your procedure at different stages. During these consultations your surgeon can give you advice on how to continue caring for your newly transplanted hair as well as answer any questions that you may have about your FUE Hair Transplant procedure.

  • How much does Hair Transplant for Men cost?

    Hair Transplant cost The Private Clinic sees over 15,000 new patients every year and perform over 10,000 procedures, with one of the highest patients’ satisfaction in the sector, Trustpilot 9.4, 5 star rating, 93% would recommend us to their friends and family. We are a multi award winning provider and have been voted the Aesthetic award for Best UK Clinic Group 2017. How much does Hair Transplants cost? Every individual’s needs are different, meaning we treat all our patients on a case-by-case basis. Because of this we can only give an accurate Hair Transplant cost quote following your consultation and scalp assessment. We only transplant the strongest and healthiest hair grafts to ensure you the best results possible. See our before and after photos here. In fact 30% of all patients that come to us have been somewhere before and need further work to improve on a disappointing result. This could be a bad FUE or a FUT linear scar needing coverage. Any company who gives you guarantees and is offering massive discounts is not giving you honest advice. On average, we price by the number of hairs you require and charge approximately £2.50 per hair for standard FUE(follicular unit extraction) procedures. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which cost £35. This cost is redeemable against a Hair Transplant surgeon consultation should you wish to proceed. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. A consultation with one of our renowned Hair Transplant Surgeons starts from £100. The Private Clinic prides itself on ensuring you have the best quality and most comprehensive care: Outstanding results, don’t take our word for it, see our Trust Pilot reviews click here 24 hour patient helpline to ensure you are always in the best of hands. As many post-operative care and appointments with your Hair Transplant surgeon and nursing team as required. Highly experienced Hair Transplant Surgeons. Comprehensive patient information, every step of the way. Outstanding hospital facilities. Our excellent reputation for patient safety and satisfaction, honest advice and outstanding care means your journey with The Private Clinic will be an exciting experience to a newfound head of hair.

  • What are the causes of Hair Loss in men?

    Hair loss occurs when hair follicles that have previously produced healthy hairs begin to produce shorter, thinner, more brittle hairs with weaker shafts. This process is known as miniaturisation. Eventually, these follicles produce only fine, almost invisible short hairs, or in the worst case the hairs die out altogether. The most common cause in men is male patterned baldness. Male patterned baldness is related to three interdependent factors: 1. Genes. A predisposition to hair loss can be passed on by either parent. The common misconception that the genes on the maternal side have a greater impact is not the case. Having the gene does not necessarily mean you will go bald; for example, a man whose father is severely bald may not follow suit, but the chances are higher. 2. Hormones. The hormone directly involved in hair loss is DHT. DHT decreases the length of the growing cycle so that with each new cycle the hair shaft becomes progressively smaller. 3. Age. Genes and hormones are not enough by themselves to cause baldness. Hair loss occurs when the susceptible follicles are exposed to DHT over a period of time. However, the age at which this process starts differs from person to person. At The Private Clinic we have a team of expert hair transplant surgeons and trichologists who will be able determine the cause of your hair loss and offer you the best treatment to help restore a natural hair line or decrease the appearance of balding. We are also able to offer patients suffering from hair loss the Fagron Tricho Hair Loss DNA test which can help you to understand how genetics are affecting your hair loss and come up with a personalised treatment plan to help preserve your healthy hair follicles.

  • What are the stages of balding?

    The most common type of baldness is male pattern baldness, which occurs in stages. However, there is no definite time line for how this type of baldness progresses. You may notice that your hair has begun to thin quite noticeably in a short space of time, and then you might stay at that level of baldness for a long time before the next stage becomes obvious. The best way of assessing how much hair you have lost and how rapidly you are losing it is by comparing photographs of you now to photos taken a few years ago. The Norwood classification is an internationally recognised method of plotting the stages of hair loss in men. Below is a simplified version of the Norwood classification: STAGE 1 The first tell-tale sign of the onset of Male Pattern Baldness is the frontal recessions in the hairline. STAGE 2 Over time these recessions become larger and much more noticeable, and the hairline moves further back. STAGE 3 At the same time as the recessions taking place, a thinning area may also appear on the crown and will gradually increase in size. STAGE 4 The final stage of Male Pattern Baldness is when the hair is lost completely from the crown and frontal region, leaving the familiar horse shoe shape. We understand the stress and anxiety that male pattern baldness can cause and our team of expert surgeons here at The Private Clinic are highly experienced in diagnosing and treating male pattern baldness to help restore hair loss.

  • What is the Norwood Scale?

    The ‘Norwood Scale’, also known as the ‘Norwood Hamilton Scale’ is a tool used by hair transplant surgeons to measure the severity of your hair loss. The Norwood Scale originated from Dr James Hamilton in the 1950s before it was modified by Dr O’Tar Norwood in the 1970s. The scale visually shows the variety of male pattern baldness patterns and the stages of progression. Stage 1 – No significant hair loss. Stage 2 – Slight recession of the hairline that is often referred to as an adult/mature hairline. Stage 3 – The first stage of significant balding, most common in the temples. Stage 4 – A more severe recession compared to stage 3, the hair on the top of the scalp may be sparse. Stage 5 – A larger area of hair loss the area between the receding hair line and top of the head is often very narrow. Stage 6 – Balding from the front to the top of the head. Stage 7 – The most severe stage of hair loss with only a band of hair remaining around the back and side of the scalp. Click here for more information about assessing your hair loss with the Norwood Scale. Our expert hair transplant surgeons at The Private Clinic will use the Norwood Scale to determine your stage of male pattern baldness to accurately decide on how effective a hair transplant will be for you. Book in for a consultation to find out more.

  • I have a medical condition; will I still be able to have a hair transplant?

    It is important that you are upfront and honest about any pre-existing medical conditions with your surgeon. It will then be down to the surgeon’s discretion to decide if you are suitable or not. To make an appointment to assess your suitability for an FUE Hair Transplant click here to book an appointment with one of our expert surgeons.

  • I have a needle phobia; will I still be able to have a hair transplant procedure?

    It is possible for those with needle phobias to have a FUE hair transplant procedure. It is important that you let your surgeon know so they can put precautions in place to ensure that any needles are kept out of view during your procedure. Our hair transplant surgeons at The Private Clinic are very experienced in dealing with patients with needle phobias to help make the hair transplant procedure as comfortable and stress-free as possible.

  • Hair Transplant for Men General Procedure

  • Am I suitable for a FUE Hair Transplant?

    There are a lot of factors that play a part in making a hair transplant successful. Your suitability for a hair transplant will be made during a consultation where your medical history will be taken, a hair analysis will be carried out and you will be able to discuss what your desired results will be from a hair transplant. At this stage your highly experienced Hair Transplant surgeon will be able to ensure it is the right procedure for you. In order to make this decision your surgeon will be looking at your; 1. Age – Although there is not really an age limit for a hair transplant, it still plays a role with the best candidates for hair transplants being over 27-30 years old in age. Many younger patients who are experiencing hair loss can be quick to rush into hair transplant procedures to correct the appearance of balding but it is often likely that you will need additional treatment later on in life as your hair loss will still continue naturally. At The Private Clinic we like to wait until patients are a bit older so we can better determine the pattern on baldness to accurately perform the treatment to help counteract further baldness. In the meantime, you may be recommended to have the Tricho Hair Loss DNA test which can help you better understand the underlaying factors of hair loss and offer you a personalised treatment plan to help protect and maintain your healthy hair follicles. 2. Donor Area – You must have a good supply of healthy hair follicles available to be transplanted. The donor area is usually the lower back portion of the scalp. At The Private Clinic one of the most important stages of your consultation is assessing your level of hair loss and both the quality and quantity of your donor hair. 3. Type of Hair Loss – The cause of your hair loss will also play a big part in your suitability for a hair transplant. The best candidates are those suffering with male or female pattern baldness as typically only affects certain areas of the scalp not the entire scalp meaning your donor area is most likely going to be unaffected. Hair loss conditions that affect the entire scalp such as un-patterned alopecia would not have a successful hair transplant. At The Private Clinic we will only offer hair transplant procedures to those who are suitable as we do not believe in wasting your time or money on a procedure that is not going to give you long-lasting results. 4. Health – To be suitable for a hair transplant you must be in good health both medically and through making healthy life choices. If you have an underlying health condition it is best to make your surgeon aware. To better determine your suitability for a hair transplant book in for a hair transplant consultation at The Private Clinic here.

  • How does follicular unit extraction (FUE) work?

    An FUE hair transplant involves taking individual hair follicles from the donor part of the scalp and then transplanting them back into areas of the head that are suffering from male pattern baldness. Donor hair is taken from the back of the head where there is healthy and permanent hair growth. Donor hair from the back of the head is also resistant to DHT which is the most common cause of male pattern baldness. When these DHT resistant hair follicles are transplanted into a new area, they still retain this element meaning that the hair will be more likely to survive and stay unless it was genetically meant to fall out. Hairs that have been transplanted from your donor area are also able to successfully root as they are from your own head. This is why hair transplanted from other areas or even other people will not be possible. To find out more about our successful hair transplant procedures click here to book an appointment with our specialist hair transplant surgeons.

  • How much does Hair Transplant for Men cost?

    Hair Transplant cost The Private Clinic sees over 15,000 new patients every year and perform over 10,000 procedures, with one of the highest patients’ satisfaction in the sector, Trustpilot 9.4, 5 star rating, 93% would recommend us to their friends and family. We are a multi award winning provider and have been voted the Aesthetic award for Best UK Clinic Group 2017. How much does Hair Transplants cost? Every individual’s needs are different, meaning we treat all our patients on a case-by-case basis. Because of this we can only give an accurate Hair Transplant cost quote following your consultation and scalp assessment. We only transplant the strongest and healthiest hair grafts to ensure you the best results possible. See our before and after photos here. In fact 30% of all patients that come to us have been somewhere before and need further work to improve on a disappointing result. This could be a bad FUE or a FUT linear scar needing coverage. Any company who gives you guarantees and is offering massive discounts is not giving you honest advice. On average, we price by the number of hairs you require and charge approximately £2.50 per hair for standard FUE(follicular unit extraction) procedures. We offer consultations with our highly experienced Patient Coordinators which cost £35. This cost is redeemable against a Hair Transplant surgeon consultation should you wish to proceed. Patient coordinators are able to offer you all the information you require prior to meeting a surgeon. A consultation with one of our renowned Hair Transplant Surgeons starts from £100. The Private Clinic prides itself on ensuring you have the best quality and most comprehensive care: Outstanding results, don’t take our word for it, see our Trust Pilot reviews click here 24 hour patient helpline to ensure you are always in the best of hands. As many post-operative care and appointments with your Hair Transplant surgeon and nursing team as required. Highly experienced Hair Transplant Surgeons. Comprehensive patient information, every step of the way. Outstanding hospital facilities. Our excellent reputation for patient safety and satisfaction, honest advice and outstanding care means your journey with The Private Clinic will be an exciting experience to a newfound head of hair.

  • What are the causes of Hair Loss in men?

    Hair loss occurs when hair follicles that have previously produced healthy hairs begin to produce shorter, thinner, more brittle hairs with weaker shafts. This process is known as miniaturisation. Eventually, these follicles produce only fine, almost invisible short hairs, or in the worst case the hairs die out altogether. The most common cause in men is male patterned baldness. Male patterned baldness is related to three interdependent factors: 1. Genes. A predisposition to hair loss can be passed on by either parent. The common misconception that the genes on the maternal side have a greater impact is not the case. Having the gene does not necessarily mean you will go bald; for example, a man whose father is severely bald may not follow suit, but the chances are higher. 2. Hormones. The hormone directly involved in hair loss is DHT. DHT decreases the length of the growing cycle so that with each new cycle the hair shaft becomes progressively smaller. 3. Age. Genes and hormones are not enough by themselves to cause baldness. Hair loss occurs when the susceptible follicles are exposed to DHT over a period of time. However, the age at which this process starts differs from person to person. At The Private Clinic we have a team of expert hair transplant surgeons and trichologists who will be able determine the cause of your hair loss and offer you the best treatment to help restore a natural hair line or decrease the appearance of balding. We are also able to offer patients suffering from hair loss the Fagron Tricho Hair Loss DNA test which can help you to understand how genetics are affecting your hair loss and come up with a personalised treatment plan to help preserve your healthy hair follicles.

  • What are the stages of balding?

    The most common type of baldness is male pattern baldness, which occurs in stages. However, there is no definite time line for how this type of baldness progresses. You may notice that your hair has begun to thin quite noticeably in a short space of time, and then you might stay at that level of baldness for a long time before the next stage becomes obvious. The best way of assessing how much hair you have lost and how rapidly you are losing it is by comparing photographs of you now to photos taken a few years ago. The Norwood classification is an internationally recognised method of plotting the stages of hair loss in men. Below is a simplified version of the Norwood classification: STAGE 1 The first tell-tale sign of the onset of Male Pattern Baldness is the frontal recessions in the hairline. STAGE 2 Over time these recessions become larger and much more noticeable, and the hairline moves further back. STAGE 3 At the same time as the recessions taking place, a thinning area may also appear on the crown and will gradually increase in size. STAGE 4 The final stage of Male Pattern Baldness is when the hair is lost completely from the crown and frontal region, leaving the familiar horse shoe shape. We understand the stress and anxiety that male pattern baldness can cause and our team of expert surgeons here at The Private Clinic are highly experienced in diagnosing and treating male pattern baldness to help restore hair loss.

  • What is the Norwood Scale?

    The ‘Norwood Scale’, also known as the ‘Norwood Hamilton Scale’ is a tool used by hair transplant surgeons to measure the severity of your hair loss. The Norwood Scale originated from Dr James Hamilton in the 1950s before it was modified by Dr O’Tar Norwood in the 1970s. The scale visually shows the variety of male pattern baldness patterns and the stages of progression. Stage 1 – No significant hair loss. Stage 2 – Slight recession of the hairline that is often referred to as an adult/mature hairline. Stage 3 – The first stage of significant balding, most common in the temples. Stage 4 – A more severe recession compared to stage 3, the hair on the top of the scalp may be sparse. Stage 5 – A larger area of hair loss the area between the receding hair line and top of the head is often very narrow. Stage 6 – Balding from the front to the top of the head. Stage 7 – The most severe stage of hair loss with only a band of hair remaining around the back and side of the scalp. Click here for more information about assessing your hair loss with the Norwood Scale. Our expert hair transplant surgeons at The Private Clinic will use the Norwood Scale to determine your stage of male pattern baldness to accurately decide on how effective a hair transplant will be for you. Book in for a consultation to find out more.

  • Does the procedure hurt?

    An FUE Hair Transplant procedure is not painful, at The Private Clinic we use local anaesthetic to numb the area before the treatment starts which may sting a little bit initially but after a few minutes you will not feel any pain for the rest of the procedure. Patients describe the feeling as odd during the procedure as you may be able to sense the surgeon working on your scalp and a slight rubbing sensation but it is all definitely bearable and some patients even find themselves falling asleep during the procedure. Post-procedure you may start to feel a little discomfort in the hours after the procedure as the local anaesthetic begins to wear off but this is easily managed with pain killers and should not last longer than a few days and you will be fine to return to work within a week once the redness and initial swelling has subsided. We aim to provide all of our patients with outstanding care during their time spent here at The Private Clinic and making you feel comfortable and relaxed leading up to and during any procedure is our priority.

  • Hair Transplant for Men Before Procedure

  • I have a medical condition; will I still be able to have a hair transplant?

    It is important that you are upfront and honest about any pre-existing medical conditions with your surgeon. It will then be down to the surgeon’s discretion to decide if you are suitable or not. To make an appointment to assess your suitability for an FUE Hair Transplant click here to book an appointment with one of our expert surgeons.

  • I have a needle phobia; will I still be able to have a hair transplant procedure?

    It is possible for those with needle phobias to have a FUE hair transplant procedure. It is important that you let your surgeon know so they can put precautions in place to ensure that any needles are kept out of view during your procedure. Our hair transplant surgeons at The Private Clinic are very experienced in dealing with patients with needle phobias to help make the hair transplant procedure as comfortable and stress-free as possible.

  • How is my donor area chosen?

    Donor hair for hair transplant procedures is often only taken from 1 area of the scalp which is the lower back portion of hair. At The Private Clinic we choose to only take donor hair from this area as the hair at the lower part of the scalp is not affected by DHT and no hair loss tends to occur from this area making the hair follicles being transplanted the best quality. The lifespan of your donor hair during your lifetime is limited. Our expert hair transplant surgeons will always ensure that they use the best strategy to make sure that your donor hair is used in the best way. This is how we ensure patients gain the best possible results and we make sure to educate you regarding the potential for future hair loss. To find out more about Hair Transplants at The Private Clinic click here.

  • Can the donor hair be taken from someone else?

    A Hair Transplant is not like an organ transplant meaning unfortunately you will not be able to use hair from another person. Donor hair can only be taken from your own head as your body will reject foreign hair unless you can commit to taking additional medication for the remainder of your life to ensure they remain in place. Anti-rejection drugs can have a lot of potential side effects and long term risks and are often not easily prescribed to patients unless they have a severe medical need. At The Private Clinic we do not perform hair transplant procedures from donor hair that is not from your own scalp. To find out if your donor hair is suitable for a hair transplant book in for a consultation with one of our expert hair transplant surgeons here. In some cases donor hair can be taken from other areas of your own body such as the chest or back if the hair on the back or side of your scalp is not suitable.

  • Where will the procedure be performed?

    All Hair Transplant procedures at The Private Clinic are performed in our own clinics. There is no need to travel to a hospital and the procedure will be carried out at the clinic where you had your consultation at or another one of our clinics nearby. Our clinics are located in; The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an expert breast surgeon located near to you. Our clinics are in; London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ Manchester – 25 St John Street, M3 4DT Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton Our clinics are all CQC qualified with our expert hair transplant surgeons working within our dedicated hair transplant theatre rooms. Hair Transplant consultations are also available at our clinics in; Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands We also have consulting rooms in Milton Keynes where you can have consultations with one of our patient coordinators. Book in for a hair transplant consultation to see where your hair transplant procedure could take place.

  • Will I need to shave my hair before a procedure?

    On a standard FUE Hair transplant procedure you will be required to shave the donor area in the back and the sides and you will also need to be shaven in the treatment area. The majority of our FUE Hair Transplant patients at The Private Clinic do shave their entire head but in cases where patients are not keen we can either suggest hair styles or effective ways to cover the shaved areas post treatment or in some cases you may be suitable for an Unshaven FUE Hair Transplant. Unshaven FUE Hair Transplants are a delicate procedure that requires a huge amount of technical skill. The Private Clinic have spent many years perfecting the Unshaven FUE Hair Transplant method, and we understand what makes a suitable candidate for the best results. To find out more book in for a hair transplant consultation here.

  • How many procedures will I need?

    An FUE Hair Transplant procedure is designed to be a standalone procedure providing you with results that should last a significant amount of time. This does vary slightly from patient to patient however and will depend of your level of hair loss and desired outcome. Many patients may require a second hair transplant procedure to target additional hair loss that has occurred since their first procedure but it can also help to increase the density of hair in the newly transplanted area, refine the hair line or increase the coverage of hair overall. At The Private Clinic we always take the time before any hair transplant procedure to assess your level of hair loss and create a personalised treatment plan which not only aims to give you the results that you desire but protects your donor area too. We recommend waiting at least a year before considering a second hair transplant procedure which will allow for your new hair follicles to grow and increase in their density allowing your surgeon to get an idea of how they are going to sit to be able to make a more informed decision about where to place any additional grafts.

  • Are there any complications associated with the procedure?

    FUE Hair Transplant surgery is a very safe procedure that is performed regularly at The Private Clinic without any significant complications. Of course with any type of surgery or procedure there are risks such as; infection, swelling, bleeding, numbness, scarring, itching and loss of grafts. As the placement incisions are so small, the risk of post-operative infection is very low. You will likely experience some redness and maybe some slight swelling in the treatment area immediately after treatment, but this will subside after two to four days. . You may experience some bleeding post-procedure and we advise keeping your head elevated and placing gauze over the area with applied pressure. Temporary numbness is common and can last for 3 to 18 weeks it does not usually affect you too much and it is very rare for it to be permanent. At The Private Clinic we like you to be as informed as possible about your procedure so a full list of complications and risks will be discussed at your consultation with your expert surgeon to ensure that you are well aware and understand the procedure fully before going ahead with hair transplant surgery.

  • Hair Transplant for Men Day of Procedure

  • How many grafts/follicles will be transplanted?

    The number of grafts that you require will depend on the size of the area that is being treated. Your surgeon will discuss with you what look you are aiming to achieve and on that basis be able to give you an estimated amount of grafts/follicles that they plan to transplant however this number can change during the procedure. The total number of grafts used can change during the procedure itself so the exact hair count will then be discussed at the end of your procedure. At The Private Clinic we are able to safely extract 7,000 hairs in one day.

  • What should I wear for my hair transplant procedure?

    When you have a hair transplant procedure at The Private Clinic you will be with us for the majority of the day. We recommend that you wear comfortable clothing and most importantly a wide neck top or button up shirt as this will make it easier to remove post-treatment without rubbing against the newly transplanted hair follicles. You will receive information on how to prepare for your Hair Transplant procedure ahead of your procedure at The Private Clinic.

  • Can I bring my own entertainment?

    You can bring a tablet or your phone with music/movies on to keep you entertained throughout the day. At The Private Clinic we have televisions in most of our theatres but we find patients prefer to bring their own so they can have easier control of their viewing. It is actually not uncommon for patients to fall asleep during the procedure.

  • Will I be able to eat during the procedure?

    You are not required to fast before a hair transplant procedure at The Private Clinic as the procedure will be carried out under local anaesthetic. When using local anaesthetic we do not fast patients as it is preferred that the patient has food in their stomach. Having a full stomach means that the anaesthetic last longer and often doesn’t need an excessive amount. Large amounts of local anesthetic can cause additional swelling post-procedure which we always try to avoid here at The Private Clinic. Your hair transplant procedure will start in the morning so we do recommend that you eat a substantial breakfast before arriving that will last you through until the afternoon. Once your surgeon has completed the extraction stage of the procedure, you will have a break which tends to be in the afternoon. During this break you will be able to stretch your legs, visit the bathroom and have something to eat – which we encourage. At The Private Clinic we will provide lunch, snacks and drinks throughout the procedure. Please be sure to let your patient coordinator know of any dietary requirements so we can cater for you appropriately on the day, our priority is making you feel comfortable, relaxed and well catered for on the day of your Hair Transplant procedure at all times.

  • How long does the procedure take?

    An FUE Hair Transplant procedure is a lengthy and delicate process which requires a substantial amount of time to ensure that you are receiving the best results. The total length of time of hair transplant treatments will depend on the number of hairs that are being transplanted. At The Private Clinic the majority of the time hair transplant procedures can be performed over the course of a day (6-8 hours). In some cases the hair transplant procedure may need to be performed across two days, this is when a very large number of hairs are being transplanted and it would be more comfortable for the patient to perform it in two stages rather than one. Having a larger amount of time between the two procedures does not impact the effectiveness of the procedure and hair transplant procedures have been performed in this way a number of times with excellent results. At The Private Clinic we do not rush our Hair Transplant procedures and our experienced surgeons take as long as they need to ensure the procedure is performed with precision and excellence. To see what happens on the day of your hair transplant procedure take a look at our hair transplant video gallery above.

  • Will there be an overnight stay?

    At The Private Clinic the majority of our FUE Hair Transplant procedures are performed as day case procedures which means you will be free to leave once your procedure is over and recover in the comforts of your own home. If your hair transplant procedure is taken place over two days then it if often required that you stay nearby. The Private Clinic works in partnership with hotels that are close to clinics and we will be able to provide details of these and they will be able to offer you a discounted rate for staying with them.

  • Hair Transplant for Men After Procedure

  • How soon will I see the results?

    Patients will be able to see the outline of their new hairline immediately following treatment and the hair will start to grow as normal right away. It is perfectly normal for the transplanted hair to shed again a few weeks after treatment, but after that initial shedding it will grow back strong and healthy and will remain permanently. Results will start to be seen about four – six weeks after treatment with full results being seen between six to twelve months. At The Private Clinic you will be offered a number of follow up procedures where you will be able to meet with your surgeon to discuss the results of your procedure at different stages. During these consultations your surgeon can give you advice on how to continue caring for your newly transplanted hair as well as answer any questions that you may have about your FUE Hair Transplant procedure.

  • Will my results look natural?

    At The Private Clinic our aim is to provide you with long-lasting and natural looking results. Getting a natural hair transplant result relies mostly on the experience of your surgeon as well as the overall quality of your donor hair. We pride ourselves on being able to offer you FUE Hair Transplant doctors who have perfected their techniques to ensure patients receive natural results. Research into hair growth has revealed that natural scalp hairs grow in small groupings so our highly skilled team of hair surgeons use micro surgical needles to insert individual hair follicles at angles and density that match the patient’s natural existing hair growth. This ensures that when the new hair follicles begin to grow that they will mimic the characteristics of the surrounding hair follicles. To see photos of our natural FUE Hair Transplant results, see our before and after photo gallery above.

  • How long will my head look red for after the procedure?

    After a FUE Hair Transplant, you are likely to experience redness on the scalp in both the donor area and recipient area which will remain for at least 7 days but can take up to 14 days to fully subside and in some cases a little longer. The redness is similar to the appearance of sunburn and occurs due to presence of newly formed blood vessels and just the general inflammation from the surgical procedure. Our experience hair transplant surgeons here at The Private Clinic will talk you through the aftercare plan and will be able to recommend ways to help reduce or disguise the redness.

  • How do I look after my newly transplanted hair?

    Taking proper care of your newly transplanted hair is a really important stage of your FUE Hair Transplant procedure. At The Private Clinic we provide all of our hair transplant patients with an aftercare program that will include a course of antibiotics to reduce the risk of infection and specialist topical treatments along with detailed instructions on how to look after your newly transplanted hair. Over the first three days following your procedure we advise that you avoid touching the new hair graphs this includes with your fingers, nails, a comb, hat or helmet. At The Private Clinic you are provided with a spray on solution that needs to be sprayed over the scalp every half hour ideally for the first three days. The spray will help to prevent the formation of scabs and keep your new hair follicles well hydrated. You will have also been given medication to go home with and it is important that you take these as prescribed on a regular basis. You will also be given a series of post-op appointments where your surgeon will be able to take a look at your results and give you any additional information on how to care your new hair follicles.

  • What scarring are you left with after a FUE Hair Transplant compared to an FUT Hair Transplant? (Contains graphic content)

    The scarring left after a FUE Hair Transplant is minimal compared to the scar left after a FUT Hair Transplant. The only time that you would really notice any scarring would be if you were to shave your donor area of hair very short. Upon shaving you may notice some very small circular scars that may appear as little white dots. If you are not planning on keeping your hair short (0 length) then these will not be noticeable. FUE Hair Transplant recovery and no visible, linear scarring: FUT Strip recovery and scarring:

  • What is shock loss?

    Although shock loss is rare, it is important to be aware of this risk before undergoing your hair transplant procedure. Shock loss is when your natural (non-transplanted) hairs are shocked from the trauma of the procedure and fall out. The hairs that are shed will usually re-grow so it is often just a temporary phenomenon. The risk of shock loss is very low and is more common in women and large hair transplant procedures compared to smaller cases. Your surgeon will be able to talk you through this in more information at your consultation. Hair Transplant surgeons at The Private Clinic are very experienced in dealing with episodes of shock loss and will explain the rare phenomenon to you in detail at your FUE Hair Transplant consultation. Click here to book a consultation.

  • How long will the results last?

    The results of a successful FUE Hair Transplant should last you for decades. This is largely because the donor hair being used is resistant to male pattern baldness and they will retain this characteristic even when transplanted into the recipient areas. This is where the experience of the surgeon is crucial, as they need to have the skills and experience to foresee potential future hair loss patterns. It is important to note however that untreated areas of your scalp may still be prone to male pattern baldness and so over time balding and thinning may occur again in these areas which could result in another hair transplant procedure being carried out. At The Private Clinic we take the time to assess your suitability for an FUE Hair Transplant in full detail taking great consideration of your age, grade of baldness, family history of hair loss, medical history and the quality of your donor as all of these factors will determine how successful your hair transplant is and how long it is likely to last for. To book your FUE Hair Transplant click here.

  • How long do I need to book off work?

    We recommend that you take a week off work to recover in full from your FUE Hair Transplant procedure however many patients have been known to return to work a couple of days post-op whereas others have taken a full 2 weeks off. The amount of time you take off work will depend on your job, your responsibilities and if you are happy for your colleagues to know about your procedure or not. You will be red for a few days post procedure and you will need to take medication and use topical solutions on the area on a regular basis.

  • Will I be able to go on holiday after my procedure?

    We would advise that you rest for at least a week before travelling anywhere on holiday. When on holiday you must take great care not to expose your head to strong sunlight or rain for at least two weeks post procedure as this could damage the hair follicles. In order to achieve the best result it is really important that you follow all of the care instructions given to you.

  • How long before I can sunbathe?

    You should not be exposing your head to direct sunlight, or even rain for the first 14 days after your procedure. A hat should be worn especially when going out in direct sunlight to ensure you do not get sunburn on your head for 2 months post-procedure. Post-operative care when having a FUE Hair Transplant is vital to ensure that you are promoting new hair growth as effectively as possible. If you are thinking about having a hair transplant contact us to find out more.

  • Female Hair Transplants and Hair Loss

  • What does the treatment involve?

    In order to explain the benefits of our treatment and what it involves, it helps to give you an idea of what is involved in the more invasive Strip technique. The Strip technique involves removing a long band of skin from the back of the head with a scalpel, then dissecting the follicles under a microscope before placing them onto the bald or thinning area. This technique always leaves a scar, no matter how skilled the surgeon is, and can cause nerve damage and numbness of the scalp. With FUE, a special punch less than 1 mm in diameter is used to remove the hair follicles directly from the scalp. There is no need for a scalpel, hence no stitching or scarring. We can safely extract up to 7000 hairs in one day whereas with previous generations of FUE it was only possible to safely extract 2500 hairs a day. Another advantage of FUE is that none of the follicular units are damaged during the extraction, whereas with the Strip method up to 30% of the donor follicles may be damaged by the use of a scalpel.

  • Will I feel any pain during the procedure?

    The treatment is simple and painless and the graft heals within 2-4 days. Compare this to the Strip technique where healing time takes up to 30 days and requires very strict post-operative care, and you can see why so many people are choosing FUE over the Strip method.

  • How long does the procedure take?

    The length of the treatment depends on the number of hairs needed. Usually between 6 and 8 hours.

  • How much does Female Hair Transplants and Hair Loss cost?

    As there can be various reasons and factors affecting hair loss for females, we recommend a consultation and in depth lifestyle analysis with one of our highly experienced Trichologists. The cost for a trichologist consultation with Jane Mayhead in London Harley Street is £147. The cost for a trichologist consulation with Denise Knight in Leeds is £127. A consultation with one of our renowned Hair Transplant Surgeons starts from £100.

  • How soon will I see the results?

    You will notice a difference immediately. The newly implanted hairs will start to grow, and shed. Hair growth usually starts around 4 weeks, with the final results settling in at about 8-9 months.

  • Are there any complications associated with the procedure?

    As the placement incisions are so small, the risk of post-operative infection is very low with 3G FUE.

  • Female Hair Transplants and Hair Loss General

  • What does the treatment involve?

    In order to explain the benefits of our treatment and what it involves, it helps to give you an idea of what is involved in the more invasive Strip technique. The Strip technique involves removing a long band of skin from the back of the head with a scalpel, then dissecting the follicles under a microscope before placing them onto the bald or thinning area. This technique always leaves a scar, no matter how skilled the surgeon is, and can cause nerve damage and numbness of the scalp. With FUE, a special punch less than 1 mm in diameter is used to remove the hair follicles directly from the scalp. There is no need for a scalpel, hence no stitching or scarring. We can safely extract up to 7000 hairs in one day whereas with previous generations of FUE it was only possible to safely extract 2500 hairs a day. Another advantage of FUE is that none of the follicular units are damaged during the extraction, whereas with the Strip method up to 30% of the donor follicles may be damaged by the use of a scalpel.

  • How much does Female Hair Transplants and Hair Loss cost?

    As there can be various reasons and factors affecting hair loss for females, we recommend a consultation and in depth lifestyle analysis with one of our highly experienced Trichologists. The cost for a trichologist consultation with Jane Mayhead in London Harley Street is £147. The cost for a trichologist consulation with Denise Knight in Leeds is £127. A consultation with one of our renowned Hair Transplant Surgeons starts from £100.

  • How soon will I see the results?

    You will notice a difference immediately. The newly implanted hairs will start to grow, and shed. Hair growth usually starts around 4 weeks, with the final results settling in at about 8-9 months.

  • Are there any complications associated with the procedure?

    As the placement incisions are so small, the risk of post-operative infection is very low with 3G FUE.

  • Hair Thinning

  • When will I need to see a Trichologist?

    A trichologist should be consulted if you are experiencing lifeless, dull or thinning hair and you are unsure on the underlying cause. Men who are experiencing typical signs of male pattern baldness will normally find it more beneficial to meet with our hair surgeon team in the first instance.

  • Is female hair loss common?

    Female hair loss is a common problem. It is thought as many as half of women will experience some form of hair loss and 1 in 4 women will experience some form of shedding. Most women will begin to notice a change in their hair as they age. The conversation around female hair loss, in comparison, so male hair loss is not as common which does often cause women to feel that what they are experiencing is not common. Women find the experience very distressing and often see it as an ageing problem, or somehow a lack of femininity. Our experience is that women get very emotional, worried and confused. Understanding and listening can be just as effective as treatments can for the wellbeing of the sufferer.  Female pattern hair loss can be very varied in its progression and severity resulting in many sufferers feeling quite desperate.

  • What are the causes of hair loss?

    Hair loss in most cases is largely genetic and induced by hormones. You can be perfectly healthy and experience significant hair thinning. Medical conditions can certainly exacerbate it. Possible conditions that contribute to hair loss are (but in no way limited to): Various forms of Alopecia: Including Androgenic Alopecia, Scarring Alopecia, Alopecia Areata, Alopecia Universalis and Traction Alopecia. Thyroid Disorder: Hair problems can be the first sign of an underlying illness, particularly for those suffering from Thyroid Undersecretion. Full recovery of the hair is achievable for those suffering, providing the condition is diagnosed and treated in its early stages. Iron Deficiency: Lack of iron in the diet is a common cause of hair loss in women. Those who are vegetarian or have suffered from an eating disorder are particularly prone to this type of hair loss, though it can affect anyone. Trauma Hair Loss: The frequent use of hair styling products and devices, as well as tight hairstyles, can lead to hair loss taking place in certain areas. If the condition is treated prior to the scalp being damaged, hair will normally regrow. Afro-Caribbean hair can be particularly suspectable to this kind of hair damage. Click here for more information.

  • What treatments are available for hair loss?

    There are a lot of underlying factors such as age and the extent of hair loss which will determine which type of treatment is going to work best for you. Some of our most successful treatments are:

    • Minoxidil
    • Laser
    • Thickening conditioners / lotions
    • Concealers
    • MicroPigmentation
    • Hair Replacement -surgical or wigs
    To find out more about hair loss treatments. Book a consultation with one of our expert trichologists.

  • How much does Hair Thinning, Hair Loss & Trichology cost?

    The Private Clinic are amongst well known hair loss and hair restoration clinics in Europe and we offer help and advice to cover all hair loss and scalp concerns. If you have just started experiencing hair loss or if the texture of your hair concerns you, we would recommend an in depth consultation and lifestyle analysis with our of our industry leading and highly experienced Trichologists.

    • The cost for a trichologist consultation with Jane Mayhead in London Harley Street is £147.
    • The cost for a trichologist consulation with Denise Knight in Leeds is £127.
    If you are experiencing balding have extensive hair loss, you may want to arrange an appointment with one of our renowned Hair Transplant surgeons. A consultation with one of our renowned Hair Transplant Surgeons starts from £100. Find out more here.

  • Hair Loss & Trichology

  • Is female hair loss common?

    Female hair loss is a common problem. It is thought as many as half of women will experience some form of hair loss and 1 in 4 women will experience some form of shedding. Most women will begin to notice a change in their hair as they age. The conversation around female hair loss, in comparison, so male hair loss is not as common which does often cause women to feel that what they are experiencing is not common. Women find the experience very distressing and often see it as an ageing problem, or somehow a lack of femininity. Our experience is that women get very emotional, worried and confused. Understanding and listening can be just as effective as treatments can for the wellbeing of the sufferer. Female pattern hair loss can be very varied in its progression and severity resulting in many sufferers feeling quite desperate.

  • Hair Loss & Trichology General

  • Is female hair loss common?

    Female hair loss is a common problem. It is thought as many as half of women will experience some form of hair loss and 1 in 4 women will experience some form of shedding. Most women will begin to notice a change in their hair as they age. The conversation around female hair loss, in comparison, so male hair loss is not as common which does often cause women to feel that what they are experiencing is not common. Women find the experience very distressing and often see it as an ageing problem, or somehow a lack of femininity. Our experience is that women get very emotional, worried and confused. Understanding and listening can be just as effective as treatments can for the wellbeing of the sufferer. Female pattern hair loss can be very varied in its progression and severity resulting in many sufferers feeling quite desperate.

  • TrichoTest

  • What are the genetic variations analysed by TrichoTest™?

    The genetic variations analysed by Fagron TrichoTest™ are associated with 7 different hair loss treatment categories:

    • Prostaglandins metabolism
    • Inflammation
    • Androgenic effect
    • Vasodilation and blood circulation
    • Collagen synthesis
    • Deficit of vitamins and minerals
    • Insulin metabolism

  • What is the relationship between the genes analysed and the treatment options used for hair loss?

    The association of the analysed genes with hair loss treatment possibilities is based on more than 50 scientific publications and evidences. A detailed scientific validation document is available upon request which provides a complete explanation and further information about the genes analysed and the pathways involved.

  • What is the TrichoTest process?

    The quantity of DNA required for the analysis is obtained with an oral swab. The procedure to obtain the sample is simple, painless and can be carried out at home or in the clinician’s office. The sample collection kit contains all necessary materials and instructions in a very detailed way. Before taking the sample; Hands must be washed properly, or disposable gloves should be used. Patients should avoid eating, smoking, alcohol, drinking (water is the exception) or brushing teeth at least 1h before scraping. Patients are advised to rinse the mouth with water before scraping. Informed consents must be filled and signed by the clinician and the patient. During sample; Removal of the swab from the swab tube. The inside part of one of the cheeks must be scraped energetically with the scraping end of the swab for 1 minute, while rotating the swab. The scraping end of the swab should only be in contact with the inside of the cheek. The swab must be left to dry for 10 minutes, out of the tube, avoiding contact with any surface. The swab should be stored back in the tube and closed. The process must be repeated using the other swab, scraping the inside part of the other cheek.

  • How are the TrichoTest samples obtained?

    The quantity of DNA required for the analysis is obtained with an oral swab. The procedure to obtain the sample is simple, painless and can be carried out at home or in the clinician’s office. The sample collection kit contains all necessary materials and instructions in a very detailed way. Before taking the sample; Hands must be washed properly, or disposable gloves should be used. Patients should avoid eating, smoking, alcohol, drinking (water is the exception) or brushing teeth at least 1h before scraping. Patients are advised to rinse the mouth with water before scraping. Informed consents must be filled and signed by the clinician and the patient. During sample; Removal of the swab from the swab tube. The inside part of one of the cheeks must be scraped energetically with the scraping end of the swab for 1 minute, while rotating the swab. The scraping end of the swab should only be in contact with the inside of the cheek. The swab must be left to dry for 10 minutes, out of the tube, avoiding contact with any surface. The swab should be stored back in the tube and closed. The process must be repeated using the other swab, scraping the inside part of the other cheek.

  • What will the results of the TrichoTest tell me?

    The results of Fagron TrichoTest™ are able to inform you on the type of genetic gene mutation that you carry and how your lifestyle factors are contributing to your hair loss. The TrichoTest will also then provide several treatment recommendations to counter the gene mutation and help target hair loss and protect existing hair.

  • What is the efficacy of the Fagron TrichoTest?

    Fagron TrichoTest™ provides clinicians with complete information about their patients’ hair loss genetic profile. The genetic characteristics evaluated can influence the effect of certain treatments used for hair loss. To support the clinician, a Fagron TrichoTest™ report is created for each patient, providing suggested personalised treatments for hair loss. This can prevent clinicians from prescribing several try-out therapies, reducing the time needed to find the most suitable treatment available for the patient and reducing the possibility of side effects. The suggested formulations generated in Fagron TrichoTest™ reports are supported by literature. A Fagron TrichoTest™ Scientific validation document and Fagron TrichoTest™ Literature review is available to clinicians upon request. These documents contain the explanation of each gene and variation analysed by Fagron TrichoTest™ and how they relate to a specific treatment used for hair loss.

  • What is the expected waiting time until receiving the results?

    The process of analysing DNA is complex. The results are expected to be sent approximately 14 days after the patient sample was taken. This includes the time needed to process the sample and to generate a personalised report.

  • How are the results from the TrichoTest shared?

    The results from the TrichoTest report will be delivered to the clinician directly through the Fagron Genomics online platform. The report can be generated in multiple languages.

  • How reliable are the results from the TrichoTest?

    The technology used to analyse the DNA taken in the TrichoTest is widely validated as a platform for genetic studies, with reproducibility and specificity rates around 99%. Fagron Genomics laboratory technicians are particularly trained for this type of analysis and analyse thousands of samples every year, having extensive experience in this process.

  • What happens if my TrichoTest fails?

    Although the methodology used is the best currently available, sometimes it can happen that the sample does not contain enough DNA and it is not possible to provide a reliable result. This may be due to many factors, such as the sampling process was not performed correctly or that the sample was not kept in proper temperature conditions before or during shipment. In these cases a new batch of swabs will be sent without the kit box, to perform a new sampling of the patient. If the online registration was already performed previously, it will not be required again. One repeat test will be offered for free.

  • TrichoTest General Procedure

  • What are the genetic variations analysed by TrichoTest™?

    The genetic variations analysed by Fagron TrichoTest™ are associated with 7 different hair loss treatment categories:

    • Prostaglandins metabolism
    • Inflammation
    • Androgenic effect
    • Vasodilation and blood circulation
    • Collagen synthesis
    • Deficit of vitamins and minerals
    • Insulin metabolism

  • What is the relationship between the genes analysed and the treatment options used for hair loss?

    The association of the analysed genes with hair loss treatment possibilities is based on more than 50 scientific publications and evidences. A detailed scientific validation document is available upon request which provides a complete explanation and further information about the genes analysed and the pathways involved.

  • What is the TrichoTest process?

    The quantity of DNA required for the analysis is obtained with an oral swab. The procedure to obtain the sample is simple, painless and can be carried out at home or in the clinician’s office. The sample collection kit contains all necessary materials and instructions in a very detailed way. Before taking the sample; Hands must be washed properly, or disposable gloves should be used. Patients should avoid eating, smoking, alcohol, drinking (water is the exception) or brushing teeth at least 1h before scraping. Patients are advised to rinse the mouth with water before scraping. Informed consents must be filled and signed by the clinician and the patient. During sample; Removal of the swab from the swab tube. The inside part of one of the cheeks must be scraped energetically with the scraping end of the swab for 1 minute, while rotating the swab. The scraping end of the swab should only be in contact with the inside of the cheek. The swab must be left to dry for 10 minutes, out of the tube, avoiding contact with any surface. The swab should be stored back in the tube and closed. The process must be repeated using the other swab, scraping the inside part of the other cheek.

  • What will the results of the TrichoTest tell me?

    The results of Fagron TrichoTest™ are able to inform you on the type of genetic gene mutation that you carry and how your lifestyle factors are contributing to your hair loss. The TrichoTest will also then provide several treatment recommendations to counter the gene mutation and help target hair loss and protect existing hair.

  • What is the expected waiting time until receiving the results?

    The process of analysing DNA is complex. The results are expected to be sent approximately 14 days after the patient sample was taken. This includes the time needed to process the sample and to generate a personalised report.

  • TrichoTest Before Procedure

  • What is the efficacy of the Fagron TrichoTest?

    Fagron TrichoTest™ provides clinicians with complete information about their patients’ hair loss genetic profile. The genetic characteristics evaluated can influence the effect of certain treatments used for hair loss. To support the clinician, a Fagron TrichoTest™ report is created for each patient, providing suggested personalised treatments for hair loss. This can prevent clinicians from prescribing several try-out therapies, reducing the time needed to find the most suitable treatment available for the patient and reducing the possibility of side effects. The suggested formulations generated in Fagron TrichoTest™ reports are supported by literature. A Fagron TrichoTest™ Scientific validation document and Fagron TrichoTest™ Literature review is available to clinicians upon request. These documents contain the explanation of each gene and variation analysed by Fagron TrichoTest™ and how they relate to a specific treatment used for hair loss.

  • TrichoTest Day of Procedure

  • How are the TrichoTest samples obtained?

    The quantity of DNA required for the analysis is obtained with an oral swab. The procedure to obtain the sample is simple, painless and can be carried out at home or in the clinician’s office. The sample collection kit contains all necessary materials and instructions in a very detailed way. Before taking the sample; Hands must be washed properly, or disposable gloves should be used. Patients should avoid eating, smoking, alcohol, drinking (water is the exception) or brushing teeth at least 1h before scraping. Patients are advised to rinse the mouth with water before scraping. Informed consents must be filled and signed by the clinician and the patient. During sample; Removal of the swab from the swab tube. The inside part of one of the cheeks must be scraped energetically with the scraping end of the swab for 1 minute, while rotating the swab. The scraping end of the swab should only be in contact with the inside of the cheek. The swab must be left to dry for 10 minutes, out of the tube, avoiding contact with any surface. The swab should be stored back in the tube and closed. The process must be repeated using the other swab, scraping the inside part of the other cheek.

  • How are the results from the TrichoTest shared?

    The results from the TrichoTest report will be delivered to the clinician directly through the Fagron Genomics online platform. The report can be generated in multiple languages.

  • How reliable are the results from the TrichoTest?

    The technology used to analyse the DNA taken in the TrichoTest is widely validated as a platform for genetic studies, with reproducibility and specificity rates around 99%. Fagron Genomics laboratory technicians are particularly trained for this type of analysis and analyse thousands of samples every year, having extensive experience in this process.

  • What happens if my TrichoTest fails?

    Although the methodology used is the best currently available, sometimes it can happen that the sample does not contain enough DNA and it is not possible to provide a reliable result. This may be due to many factors, such as the sampling process was not performed correctly or that the sample was not kept in proper temperature conditions before or during shipment. In these cases a new batch of swabs will be sent without the kit box, to perform a new sampling of the patient. If the online registration was already performed previously, it will not be required again. One repeat test will be offered for free.

  • Scalp Micropigmentation

  • Am I suitable for scalp micropigmentation?

    You will need to have an initial consultation before deciding to go ahead with scalp micropigmentation which is where your suitability will be determined. Whether you are a good candidate or not will depend on your specific circumstances, type of hair loss and desired results. You will also be required to carry out a patch test which will make sure you have no unwanted side effects to the treatment. To find out if you are suitable for scalp micropigmentation, make a consultation with one of our experts.

  • Is scalp micropigmentation suitable for women?

    Scalp micropigmentation is a very effective treatment for reducing the appearance of hair loss in both men and women. Scalp Micropigmentation General procedure, Most Popular Scalp micropigmentation for men is usually focused on replicating the appearance of shaven hair follicles but for women we instead need to decrease the contrast between scalp and hair. Women are not usually required to shave before treatment and we instead work with you to apply pigmentation section by section which helps give the appearance of thicker hair. To see if you are suitable for scalp micropigmentation, come and see our experts for a consultation.

  • How many scalp micropigmentation treatments will I need?

    Scalp Micropigmentation is usually performed over the course of 3 treatments. The first session uses lighter pigments to help build the foundation. The second session takes place around 1 week after your first session, during this session we will start to add more density by using darker pigments. 3 – 5 weeks later you will return for your third session which will be focused on building up detail and completing the overall look.

  • Is Scalp Micropigmentation treatment permanent?

    No, scalp micropigmentation treatment is not considered permanent as the ink changes/fades over time. There are two options in terms of the pigment/ink; one which needs a touch-up or colour boost every 12 months on average and one which is more long-lasting and requires a top up every 3-5 years. Lifestyle, sun exposure and skin type can all impact on the longevity of the treatment. Microlipo starts from around £3,500 but will increase depending on the number of areas treated. See before and after photos here. For more information on vaser liposuction click here.

  • How much does Scalp Micropigmentation cost?

    Every individual’s needs are different, meaning we treat all our patients on a case-by-case basis. Because of this we can only give an accurate quote following your consultation and scalp assessment. Scalp micro-pigmentation can cost between £400 and £2,500, depending on the size of the area treated. Consultations with our Scalp Micro-pigmentation technician & Aesthetic practitioner are £50 which is non-refundable but is redeemable against any treatment booked, Patch tests are at a cost of £150 and can be done on the same day.

  • What is Scalp Micropigmentation?

    Scalp Micropigmentation or SMP is a non-surgical procedure that uses natural pigments which are applied to the scalp to give the appearance of hair follicles. Scalp micropigmentation is very effective at replicating a natural shaved head look.

  • Is Scalp Micropigmentation like a regular tattoo?

    No, a common misconception is that scalp micropigmentation is just a scalp tattoo. Although similar in that they both involve making marks on the skin, the similarities stop there. Scalp micropigmentation uses equipment specifically designed for this technique which is able to delicately deposit pigments into the dermis portion of the skin which is more controlled and prevents ink from spreading which means a higher level of precision. The inks and pigments used have been specifically designed for the treatment and are not permanent or prone to colour change like body art inks.

  • Will Scalp Micropigmentation match my hair colour?

    There are different shades and colours available depending on the choice of pigment/ink. Some treatments are completed with a grey scale and some with more warm tones depending on client needs and the area of treatment. All options will be covered during an in-depth consultation.

  • Can scalp micropigmentation help with hair transplant scars?

    Yes, scalp micropigmentation is a great option for men who have been left with scarring after a hair transplant. Scalp micropigmentation works to add colour tone into the scarring camouflaging it into the appearance of the hair follicles surrounding it. Scar concealment may require more sessions than standard as scars are usually made up of thick layers of tissue that can be difficult to cover and get the right depth of colour first time round. The result can allow the patient to keep their hair short without the scar being obvious as it once was.

  • How long does Scalp Micropigmentation treatment take?

    Treatment times vary for each client as there are many factors to treatment including the treatment area size and the type of skin. Most treatments take between 1 and 3 hours on average and a treatment plan is always set in place. SMP is a multi-session process to ensure a consistent, natural finish, with an average of three sessions required to complete the initial treatment phase.

  • Scalp Micropigmentation General Procedure

  • Am I suitable for scalp micropigmentation?

    You will need to have an initial consultation before deciding to go ahead with scalp micropigmentation which is where your suitability will be determined. Whether you are a good candidate or not will depend on your specific circumstances, type of hair loss and desired results. You will also be required to carry out a patch test which will make sure you have no unwanted side effects to the treatment. To find out if you are suitable for scalp micropigmentation, make a consultation with one of our experts.

  • Is scalp micropigmentation suitable for women?

    Scalp micropigmentation is a very effective treatment for reducing the appearance of hair loss in both men and women. Scalp Micropigmentation General procedure, Most Popular Scalp micropigmentation for men is usually focused on replicating the appearance of shaven hair follicles but for women we instead need to decrease the contrast between scalp and hair. Women are not usually required to shave before treatment and we instead work with you to apply pigmentation section by section which helps give the appearance of thicker hair. To see if you are suitable for scalp micropigmentation, come and see our experts for a consultation.

  • How many scalp micropigmentation treatments will I need?

    Scalp Micropigmentation is usually performed over the course of 3 treatments. The first session uses lighter pigments to help build the foundation. The second session takes place around 1 week after your first session, during this session we will start to add more density by using darker pigments. 3 – 5 weeks later you will return for your third session which will be focused on building up detail and completing the overall look.

  • Is Scalp Micropigmentation treatment permanent?

    No, scalp micropigmentation treatment is not considered permanent as the ink changes/fades over time. There are two options in terms of the pigment/ink; one which needs a touch-up or colour boost every 12 months on average and one which is more long-lasting and requires a top up every 3-5 years. Lifestyle, sun exposure and skin type can all impact on the longevity of the treatment. Microlipo starts from around £3,500 but will increase depending on the number of areas treated. See before and after photos here. For more information on vaser liposuction click here.

  • How much does Scalp Micropigmentation cost?

    Every individual’s needs are different, meaning we treat all our patients on a case-by-case basis. Because of this we can only give an accurate quote following your consultation and scalp assessment. Scalp micro-pigmentation can cost between £400 and £2,500, depending on the size of the area treated. Consultations with our Scalp Micro-pigmentation technician & Aesthetic practitioner are £50 which is non-refundable but is redeemable against any treatment booked, Patch tests are at a cost of £150 and can be done on the same day.

  • What is Scalp Micropigmentation?

    Scalp Micropigmentation or SMP is a non-surgical procedure that uses natural pigments which are applied to the scalp to give the appearance of hair follicles. Scalp micropigmentation is very effective at replicating a natural shaved head look.

  • Is Scalp Micropigmentation like a regular tattoo?

    No, a common misconception is that scalp micropigmentation is just a scalp tattoo. Although similar in that they both involve making marks on the skin, the similarities stop there. Scalp micropigmentation uses equipment specifically designed for this technique which is able to delicately deposit pigments into the dermis portion of the skin which is more controlled and prevents ink from spreading which means a higher level of precision. The inks and pigments used have been specifically designed for the treatment and are not permanent or prone to colour change like body art inks.

  • Will Scalp Micropigmentation match my hair colour?

    There are different shades and colours available depending on the choice of pigment/ink. Some treatments are completed with a grey scale and some with more warm tones depending on client needs and the area of treatment. All options will be covered during an in-depth consultation.

  • Can scalp micropigmentation help with hair transplant scars?

    Yes, scalp micropigmentation is a great option for men who have been left with scarring after a hair transplant. Scalp micropigmentation works to add colour tone into the scarring camouflaging it into the appearance of the hair follicles surrounding it. Scar concealment may require more sessions than standard as scars are usually made up of thick layers of tissue that can be difficult to cover and get the right depth of colour first time round. The result can allow the patient to keep their hair short without the scar being obvious as it once was.

  • Will anyone notice that I have had Scalp Micropigmentation?

    SMP is about re-creating a natural look so although the change can be noticeable, especially for those who are having a new hairline, it should not be recognised as you having a procedure. Working with what you have naturally and with skill and expertise your technician will be looking to give you an undetectable treatment.

  • Scalp Micropigmentation Day of Procedure

  • How long does Scalp Micropigmentation treatment take?

    Treatment times vary for each client as there are many factors to treatment including the treatment area size and the type of skin. Most treatments take between 1 and 3 hours on average and a treatment plan is always set in place. SMP is a multi-session process to ensure a consistent, natural finish, with an average of three sessions required to complete the initial treatment phase.

  • Scalp Micropigmentation After Procedure

  • How do I look after my scalp micropigmentation results?

    The best way to look after results after scalp micropigmentation treatment is to firstly follow the aftercare advice provided to you after treatment. This is to help you get the best out of your treatment. The second best thing you can do is protect your head from the sun. Ultraviolet rays can damage the pigment if it is exposed for long periods over a course of many months and we advise patients to apply SPF protection of 30 or more to the scalp every day to avoid excessive fading of the pigments.

  • Bunions

  • What is a bunion?

    A bunion, medically known as a Hallux Valgus is a deformity of the foot often around the big toe. A bunion is often first noticed when a bony lump appears on the outside edge of the foot which forms over time when your big toe pushes against your next toe, forcing the joint of your big toe to grow and stick out the side of your foot. In more severe cases the big toe can point towards the other toes on your foot instead of sitting upright. Some people experience pain, redness and swelling but this will vary between individuals. Bunion symptoms and bunionectomy treatments can be discussed at a consultation at our London Harley Street Bunion clinic, click here to book.

  • Can you prevent bunions?

    As bunions are often genetic it can be hard to prevent bunions if you are predisposed to developing them. You can take care to ensure that your shoes fit your feet correctly and have a broad toe area. It is also recommended that you avoid wearing heels over 4 cm high. At The Private Clinic we recommend that you check your feet regularly to spot deformities before any pain arises.

  • What causes bunions?

    The main cause of a bunion is often down to congenital factors which mean you may be genetically prone to bunions, they run in the family or the shape and anatomy of your foot. In some cases bunions are acquired which means the bunion has developed from wearing ill-fitting and uncomfortable footwear.

  • Why are women are more likely to develop bunions during pregnancy?

    Genetics play a major part in the formation of bunions; this means that if your mother or grandmother suffer from them then it is likely that you will also develop them. During pregnancy the weight of the unborn child means that women tend to put more weight on the front of the foot to give them greater stability. This can cause the front of the foot to collapse, increasing the risk of painful bunions forming. Unfortunately, once bunions form, they will not go away without undergoing surgery. They can cause chronic pain, swelling and redness over the big toe joint, particularly after wearing tight-fitting shoes or shoes that don’t fit you properly. The symptoms of bunions can be eased by wearing wide shoes with a low heel and soft sole, bunion pads to reduce rubbing and taking regular painkillers to ease the discomfort. At The Private Clinic we can help to treat the bunion rather than just ease the discomfort. Our minimally invasive bunion procedure uses keyhole surgery with no pins or screws meaning you will be able to walk straight after the procedure and get back to your usual activities much sooner than traditional bunionectomy surgery. Book a consultation today to find out more.

  • How do shoes cause bunions?

    Ill-fitting shoes can cause bunions to develop at a more rapid rate as they are likely to be causing excessive pressure and compression on the toes causing the deformity. The compression increases when wearing shoes with high heels as your body weight will sit at the front of the foot. Rigid shoes can also increase the risk of bunions as they will affect the natural flexion of the toes as you walk which weakens your foot muscles and encourages the development of bunions. Your shoes should conform to the shape of your feet without squeezing or pressing any part of your foot.

  • How do I know if I have a bunion?

    Most people know if they have a bunion by the appearance and often some pain. The best option is to come in and see us to discuss the bunionectomy procedure and follow up with an X-ray which we will arrange to be performed in-house.

  • Can men get bunions?

    It is possible for men to develop bunions too with one in ten of Britain’s 15 million bunion sufferers being men. The majority of men’s bunions are hereditary but ill-fitting footwear, collapsed arches and flat feet can also be part of the problem too. Here at The Private Clinic we are able to treat both men and women for bunions and to find out more information about our unique treatment click here for a consultation.

  • Does wearing High Heels cause bunions?

    The wearing of high heels and ill-fitting shoes are often blamed for the occurrence of bunions but actually it is more down to genetics and the way that you walk. If you have family members who suffer from bunions then the wearing of tight shoes and stilettos on a regular basis are not going to help but they will not be the direct cause. We can certainly help if you have a bunion, book a consultation today

  • What will happen if I don’t treat my bunion?

    If you don’t seek treatment for bunions then it can lead to further problems including increased pain, difficulty walking, difficulty to wear shoes and hammertoe. To find out more about our bunion treatments click here to book a consultation.

  • Why do we not use screws in bunion correction surgery?

    Introducing an external element such as metal screws into the body will always be very invasive. For example, the metal fixative devices used in bunion surgery can create problems such as the joints in the foot not being able to find a natural posture, which can result in a huge amount of discomfort post-surgery. Because of this, in some cases a second operation may be required to remove them. In addition, the healing from this kind of surgery can take a prolonged period of time and in some instances crutches are needed before the foot is able to bear weight. In order to address these issues with standard bunion surgery, Dr Bianchi has developed a more natural and biological method without using fixative devices like screws, plates or wires. Through his research over 20 years, Dr Bianchi has proven that self-stabilizing geometric fractures can be made on short-bones (without the need for immobilisation) with long term results. This not only means that healing and recovery is much quicker and easier, but that greater joint mobility is achieved after the surgery, compared to standard techniques. Each procedure is customised to the patient, and this is not a ‘one-size fits all’ approach. The bone is fractured, re-aligned and bandaged in such a way that creates the perfect result for the patient’s anatomy and better comfort and joint articulation. The absence of screws means that the joint is not fixed in one place, it can move freely. In addition, recovery from the method does not require the immobilisation of the foot so the patient can go back to walking immediately post-surgery without the need for crutches. Thanks to the special bandaging technique and supportive shoe, the patient is able to walk unaided straight after the operation. Make a consultation to find out more about our revolutionary new minimally invasive keyhole bunion removal procedure.

  • Bunions General Procedure

  • What is a bunion?

    A bunion, medically known as a Hallux Valgus is a deformity of the foot often around the big toe. A bunion is often first noticed when a bony lump appears on the outside edge of the foot which forms over time when your big toe pushes against your next toe, forcing the joint of your big toe to grow and stick out the side of your foot. In more severe cases the big toe can point towards the other toes on your foot instead of sitting upright. Some people experience pain, redness and swelling but this will vary between individuals. Bunion symptoms and bunionectomy treatments can be discussed at a consultation at our London Harley Street Bunion clinic, click here to book.

  • Can you prevent bunions?

    As bunions are often genetic it can be hard to prevent bunions if you are predisposed to developing them. You can take care to ensure that your shoes fit your feet correctly and have a broad toe area. It is also recommended that you avoid wearing heels over 4 cm high. At The Private Clinic we recommend that you check your feet regularly to spot deformities before any pain arises.

  • What causes bunions?

    The main cause of a bunion is often down to congenital factors which mean you may be genetically prone to bunions, they run in the family or the shape and anatomy of your foot. In some cases bunions are acquired which means the bunion has developed from wearing ill-fitting and uncomfortable footwear.

  • Why are women are more likely to develop bunions during pregnancy?

    Genetics play a major part in the formation of bunions; this means that if your mother or grandmother suffer from them then it is likely that you will also develop them. During pregnancy the weight of the unborn child means that women tend to put more weight on the front of the foot to give them greater stability. This can cause the front of the foot to collapse, increasing the risk of painful bunions forming. Unfortunately, once bunions form, they will not go away without undergoing surgery. They can cause chronic pain, swelling and redness over the big toe joint, particularly after wearing tight-fitting shoes or shoes that don’t fit you properly. The symptoms of bunions can be eased by wearing wide shoes with a low heel and soft sole, bunion pads to reduce rubbing and taking regular painkillers to ease the discomfort. At The Private Clinic we can help to treat the bunion rather than just ease the discomfort. Our minimally invasive bunion procedure uses keyhole surgery with no pins or screws meaning you will be able to walk straight after the procedure and get back to your usual activities much sooner than traditional bunionectomy surgery. Book a consultation today to find out more.

  • How do shoes cause bunions?

    Ill-fitting shoes can cause bunions to develop at a more rapid rate as they are likely to be causing excessive pressure and compression on the toes causing the deformity. The compression increases when wearing shoes with high heels as your body weight will sit at the front of the foot. Rigid shoes can also increase the risk of bunions as they will affect the natural flexion of the toes as you walk which weakens your foot muscles and encourages the development of bunions. Your shoes should conform to the shape of your feet without squeezing or pressing any part of your foot.

  • How do I know if I have a bunion?

    Most people know if they have a bunion by the appearance and often some pain. The best option is to come in and see us to discuss the bunionectomy procedure and follow up with an X-ray which we will arrange to be performed in-house.

  • Can men get bunions?

    It is possible for men to develop bunions too with one in ten of Britain’s 15 million bunion sufferers being men. The majority of men’s bunions are hereditary but ill-fitting footwear, collapsed arches and flat feet can also be part of the problem too. Here at The Private Clinic we are able to treat both men and women for bunions and to find out more information about our unique treatment click here for a consultation.

  • Does wearing High Heels cause bunions?

    The wearing of high heels and ill-fitting shoes are often blamed for the occurrence of bunions but actually it is more down to genetics and the way that you walk. If you have family members who suffer from bunions then the wearing of tight shoes and stilettos on a regular basis are not going to help but they will not be the direct cause. We can certainly help if you have a bunion, book a consultation today

  • Can I have bunion removal surgery on the NHS?

    Bunion removal surgery is available through the NHS however the type of surgery they offer is a lot more invasive and requires a considerable amount of downtime from 2-6 weeks. Going through the NHS for bunionectomy surgery can also take a considerable amount of time with many patients waiting months to even be referred from their GP to a surgeon and then even longer to be deemed suitable and in-need of the surgical procedure. Many NHS hospitals will only operate for extreme bunion cases. Our minimally invasive bunion correction procedure that we are able to offer here at The Private Clinic may be more favourable especially for those who have work or children commitments and are seeking a reliable procedure without the lengthy downtime. To find out more click here for a consultation.

  • What is a hammer toe?

    Hammertoe is a deformity that causes your toe to bend or curl downwards permanently instead of pointing forwards. It is usually caused by weakened muscles that make the tendons in your foot shorter. Hammertoes usually start out as mild deformities and get progressively worse over time with other issues such as corns and calluses appearing with the build-up of hard skin over the raised joints. Hammertoe can affect any toe on your foot and it usually caused by;

    • Badly fitting shoes
    • Arthritis
    • Toe injury
    • Pressure from a bunion
    • High foot arch
    • Nerve damage
    • Genetics
    • Having calluses or corns
    To find out more about hammertoe and too see if you are suitable for hammertoe correction surgery click here to book a consultation.

  • Bunions Before Procedure

  • What will happen if I don’t treat my bunion?

    If you don’t seek treatment for bunions then it can lead to further problems including increased pain, difficulty walking, difficulty to wear shoes and hammertoe. To find out more about our bunion treatments click here to book a consultation.

  • Why do we not use screws in bunion correction surgery?

    Introducing an external element such as metal screws into the body will always be very invasive. For example, the metal fixative devices used in bunion surgery can create problems such as the joints in the foot not being able to find a natural posture, which can result in a huge amount of discomfort post-surgery. Because of this, in some cases a second operation may be required to remove them. In addition, the healing from this kind of surgery can take a prolonged period of time and in some instances crutches are needed before the foot is able to bear weight. In order to address these issues with standard bunion surgery, Dr Bianchi has developed a more natural and biological method without using fixative devices like screws, plates or wires. Through his research over 20 years, Dr Bianchi has proven that self-stabilizing geometric fractures can be made on short-bones (without the need for immobilisation) with long term results. This not only means that healing and recovery is much quicker and easier, but that greater joint mobility is achieved after the surgery, compared to standard techniques. Each procedure is customised to the patient, and this is not a ‘one-size fits all’ approach. The bone is fractured, re-aligned and bandaged in such a way that creates the perfect result for the patient’s anatomy and better comfort and joint articulation. The absence of screws means that the joint is not fixed in one place, it can move freely. In addition, recovery from the method does not require the immobilisation of the foot so the patient can go back to walking immediately post-surgery without the need for crutches. Thanks to the special bandaging technique and supportive shoe, the patient is able to walk unaided straight after the operation. Make a consultation to find out more about our revolutionary new minimally invasive keyhole bunion removal procedure.

  • What is a geometric fracture?

    Our minimally invasive bunion procedure involves making a geometric fracture. A geometric fracture refers to way the bones are carefully fractured with precision and then realigned into a straight position creating a perfect result for the patient’s anatomy and better comfort and joint articulation. The absence of screws means that the joint is not fixed in one place, it can move freely. The fractured bone is then bandaged without the need for screws to keep it in place. A special bandaging technique is then used with a supportive shoe, So the patient can go back to walking immediately post-surgery without the need for crutches promoting the natural healing of the foot. Make a consultation to find out more about our revolutionary new minimally invasive keyhole bunion removal procedure.

  • What are dental burrs?

    Dental burs are used for cutting hard tissues including tooth or bone. They are made of steel, stainless steel, tungsten carbide and diamond grit. Dr Andreas Bianchi uses dental burrs in this revolutionary new keyhole bunion surgery to keep it minimally invasive and the scars to a minimum. Book a consultation today to find out more.

  • Does bunion correction surgery hurt?

    Bunion Correction surgery at The Private Clinic is performed under local anaesthesia which will last for some time post procedure. Most patients do not feel any significant amounts of pain post-procedure and any pain felt can be easily managed by painkillers such as paracetamol.

  • Can I have both feet treated at the same time?

    At The Private Clinic we recommend that you have your bunion correction procedures carried out on one foot at a time to aid for a better recovery. Double bunion surgery is not advised by Dr Bianchi. You will be able to discuss your bunionectomy treatment plan at your consultation.

  • Bunions Day of Procedure

  • Are you awake for bunion surgery?

    Bunion correction surgery at The Private Clinic is performed under local anaesthetic so you will be awake for the procedure. In some cases a sedative may be given for patients who are feeling particularly anxious about the surgery which will help you to relax. We will explain everything in detail, and make you feel at ease and relaxed on the day of your bunionectomy treatment you will be in safe, expert and medically qualified hands at all times.

  • Bunions After Procedure

  • When can i wear high heels after bunion correction surgery?

    Immediately after bunion correction surgery you will be required to wear a specalised orthopaedic shoe for the first couple of days. Your surgeon will let you know post-procedure when you can stop wearing this and go back to wearing your usual shoes. We do advise that you initially stick to comfortable and well-fitted shoes to allow your foot to heal properly. High heels can be worn 2 months after surgery. Full aftercare will be provided to you by your surgeon after your procedure. To find out more about bunion correction surgery click here to book an appointment.

  • Why is there no scar?

    In our minimally invasive keyhole bunion surgery we use small, surgical, dental burrs to correct and modify the bones of the forefoot. These dental burrs are inserted through small incisions in the skin that are approximately 2-3mm. These incisions do not require stitches and will heal naturally over time just like a small cut in the skin would. Book a consultation to find out more about our revolutionary new minimally invasive keyhole bunion removal procedure.

  • Will I need physiotherapy after bunion correction surgery?

    We encourage patients to get back on their feet quickly after bunion correction surgery to aid their recovery. You will not require physiotherapy or any other type of walking aid during your minimally invasive bunionectomy recovery at The Private Clinic.

  • When can I drive again after bunion correction surgery?

    Although you will be able to walk after bunion correction surgery we do advise that you take care when returning to drive a car. We recommend that patients wait until they are able to wear their usual shoes again instead of the orthopaedic shoe given to you post-procedure. In some cases your insurance may be invalid if you drive too soon after a surgical procedure.

  • Why does wrapping the foot help the foot recover after the bunion keyhole surgery?

    Minimally invasive bunion surgery at The Private Clinic involves using personalised bandaging. This process following the operation is just as important as the surgery itself, and allows the physiological healing process to spontaneously restructure the foot and avoid any additional stress caused by arbitrary immobilisation. You will keep your foot bandaged for 15-20 days before returning for a post-op appointment with Dr Bianchi who will then reduce it and you will be able to leave wearing a trainer instead of the surgical shoe.

  • Will my bunion return after surgery?

    Based on the geometric correction used to correct the bunion it is far less likely for it to reappear compared to the traditional surgery method. It is not impossible however and your surgeon will go over all the risks and complications associated with bunionectomy surgery at your consultation. Click here to book a bunion correction consultation to discuss your bunion issues.

  • Can you walk after bunion surgery?

    Our revolutionary new bunion correction surgery allows patients to be able to walk almost immediately after their procedure. Once the surgery has taken place we encourage patients to place their foot flat on the ground and regularly walk around to encourage the bones to heal to the correct physiological readjustments. You will be able to leave the hospital without the need for any walking aids or help after your bunion correction procedure at The Private Clinic. Although you will be able to walk post-procedure you must take care not to do too much too soon and if you find yourself in pain or experience swelling of the foot then take some time to rest with the foot elevated. Click here to book a consultation and find out more.

  • HydraFacial

  • What is a HydraFacial?

    A HydraFacial is an invigorating facial treatment that can deliver long-term skin health results. The treatment can be tailored to the specific needs of patients offering them instant and noticeable results with no downtime. The treatment works to remove dead skin cells whilst extracting impurities and exposing the skin to cleansing, hydrating and moisturising serums. The treatment is soothing and refreshing similar to a standard facial but with more effective and longer lasting benefits. Am I suitable for a HydraFacial? HydraFacial treatment is suitable for all skin types, even the most sensitive of skin. At your consultation, your expert skin practitioner will assess your skin and choose specific treatment serums to be used during your HydraFacial treatment to meet the needs of your skin. To find out more, contact us to book a consultation.

  • How long does a HydraFacial take?

    Our Skin Health For Life and Prescriptive HydraFacial treatments will take 60 minutes to complete. Our HydraGenesis can take around 90 minutes to perform.

  • What results can I expect from HydraFacial treatment?

    The results from HydraFacial are immediate and you will notice a visible improvement to your skin and the smooth results and hydration may last 5 to 7 days or even longer.

  • How much does HydraFacial treatment cost?

    HydraFacial treatment prices will vary depending on the type of treatment you are having. As a guide, the cost of HydraFacial starts from £190. To find out more and to get a treatment plan with a more accurate cost, contact us to book a consultation with one of our expert skin practitioners. Consultations with our expert skin practitioners are £25 however this cost is redeemable against the price of any skin treatment that you wish to book following your consultation.

  • How many HydraFacial treatments will I need?

    The number of HydraFacial treatments that you will need will depend on what you are hoping to achieve from treatment. Most patients can expect to see visible skin refinement and a more radiant skin tone after just one treatment. However, to maintain these results, we do recommend regular treatments. If you are looking to treat specific skin concerns such as pigmentation, acne and wrinkles then you will be given a personalised treatment plan during your consultation that will detail the number of treatments recommended to give you the best results this is usually a course of 3 or 6 treatments.

  • Is a HydraFacial painful?

    HydraFacial treatment is designed to be soothing, relaxing, and refreshing and you should not experience any pain during the treatment. Our expert skin practitioners will ensure that you are comfortable throughout your procedure.

  • Can I wear make-up after a HydraFacial?

    Yes, there is no downtime required following a HydraFacial and patients will be able to apply make-up after treatment has been completed.

  • HydraFacial General Procedure

  • What is a HydraFacial?

    A HydraFacial is an invigorating facial treatment that can deliver long-term skin health results. The treatment can be tailored to the specific needs of patients offering them instant and noticeable results with no downtime. The treatment works to remove dead skin cells whilst extracting impurities and exposing the skin to cleansing, hydrating and moisturising serums. The treatment is soothing and refreshing similar to a standard facial but with more effective and longer lasting benefits. Am I suitable for a HydraFacial? HydraFacial treatment is suitable for all skin types, even the most sensitive of skin. At your consultation, your expert skin practitioner will assess your skin and choose specific treatment serums to be used during your HydraFacial treatment to meet the needs of your skin. To find out more, contact us to book a consultation.

  • How long does a HydraFacial take?

    Our Skin Health For Life and Prescriptive HydraFacial treatments will take 60 minutes to complete. Our HydraGenesis can take around 90 minutes to perform.

  • What results can I expect from HydraFacial treatment?

    The results from HydraFacial are immediate and you will notice a visible improvement to your skin and the smooth results and hydration may last 5 to 7 days or even longer.

  • How many HydraFacial treatments will I need?

    The number of HydraFacial treatments that you will need will depend on what you are hoping to achieve from treatment. Most patients can expect to see visible skin refinement and a more radiant skin tone after just one treatment. However, to maintain these results, we do recommend regular treatments. If you are looking to treat specific skin concerns such as pigmentation, acne and wrinkles then you will be given a personalised treatment plan during your consultation that will detail the number of treatments recommended to give you the best results this is usually a course of 3 or 6 treatments.

  • How much does HydraFacial treatment cost?

    HydraFacial treatment prices will vary depending on the type of treatment you are having. As a guide, the cost of HydraFacial starts from £190. To find out more and to get a treatment plan with a more accurate cost, contact us to book a consultation with one of our expert skin practitioners. Consultations with our expert skin practitioners are £25 however this cost is redeemable against the price of any skin treatment that you wish to book following your consultation.

  • Is a HydraFacial painful?

    HydraFacial treatment is designed to be soothing, relaxing, and refreshing and you should not experience any pain during the treatment. Our expert skin practitioners will ensure that you are comfortable throughout your procedure.

  • HydraFacial After Procedure

  • Can I wear make-up after a HydraFacial?

    Yes, there is no downtime required following a HydraFacial and patients will be able to apply make-up after treatment has been completed.

  • Nose Reshaping

  • Am I suitable for Non-Surgical Nose Shaping?

    Non-surgical rhinoplasty is ideal for patients who are wishing to improve the appearance of their nose without having a surgical procedure. A large nose however can’t be made smaller but any small imperfections such as bumps on the bridge of the nose can be smoothed out and corrected during this procedure. The best way to find out your suitability for a non-surgical nose job is to visit us for a free consultation with one of our expert nurses, doctors or surgeons. Click here to book.

  • Can I have a non-surgical rhinoplasty if I have had a surgical rhinoplasty?

    It is possible to have a non-surgical rhinoplasty after undergoing a surgical rhinoplasty to correct any remaining imperfections but we do recommend waiting for at least a year after having surgery to consider this treatment option. The reason for waiting is because nose cartilage can take a long time to heal and will continue to heal and change for at least a year and a half after surgery. Ideally you want to have the final result before having a non-surgical rhinoplasty treatment otherwise a change in the healing of your cartilage could then affect the result of the non-surgical treatment.

  • What filler is best for the nose?

    We offer a number of dermal fillers, our expert medical professionals will discuss what dermal filler is best for non surgical nose reshaping at your free consultation prior to surgery.

  • How much does Non-Surgical Nose Reshaping cost?

    Prices start from around £500 at The Private Clinic for non-surgical nose reshaping. The cost of treatment will vary dependent on: The type of dermal filler used.. How much dermal filler is required. How many areas are treated. The best way to get an idea of how much non-surgical nose reshaping treatment with dermal filler is going to cost is to book a consultation with one of our expert aesthetic doctors or nurses who will be able to provide you with an individual treatment plan to help you get the results you wish to achieve. Consultations with our expert doctors or nurses are £50 however this cost can be redeemable against the price of treatment should you wish to book following your consultation. Our prices are competitive and we only use experienced and qualified medical professionals at The Private Clinic to administer our dermal fillers. We believe our patients deserve the utmost safety in our care and we are committed to offering reliable, effective results.

  • When will I be able to see my results after a non-surgical rhinoplasty?

    The results after a non-surgical rhinoplasty is instant but swelling may alter the appearance for a few days afterwards.

  • What is a non-surgical rhinoplasty?

    A non-surgical rhinoplasty may also be referred to as a non-surgical nose job, non-surgical nose shaping, liquid rhinoplasty or 30 minute nose job to name a few. The procedure is not a rhinoplasty but instead a dermal filler technique where filler is injected into the nose to improve the appearance of any minor imperfections including a smoothing out any lumps or bumps and correcting a crooked nose to appear more symmetrical.

  • How does a non-surgical rhinoplasty work?

    Injecting dermal filler into the nose can give really great results at the hands of an experienced practitioner. The effects of filler is similar to when you use make-up to contour your face as injecting filler into certain areas will influence the light to hit the area in a certain way. When it comes to lumps or bumps in the nose then dermal filler can be used to fill the surrounding areas making everything more even. Although adding filler usually means adding volume, this is not always the case and in a non-surgical rhinoplasty it is often making the nose appear slightly slimmer.

  • What are the benefits of a Non-Surgical Nose Job?

    A Non-Surgical nose job can improve the shape of the tip and bridge of the nose without the need for a surgical procedure. Small imperfections can be safely corrected through use of dermal filler with minimal pain, downtime and swelling post-treatment. To find out more about our Non Surgical Rhinoplasty procedure click here to book a free consultation.

  • What can a non-surgical rhinoplasty help with?

    A non-surgical rhinoplasty can help to;

    • Correct and smooth bumps in the nose
    • Correct asymmetrical noses
    • Straighten a hooked nose
    • Add more height or definition to a small nose
    • Straighten crooked noses
    • Correct mild to moderate nasal tip droops
    • Refine any remaining imperfections after a surgical rhinoplasty
    Minor imperfections like the ones detailed above are often easily treated with the non-surgical nose job procedure. To find out if a non-surgical nose job is suitable for you then click here to book in for a free consultation with one of our medical experts.

  • What is a non-surgical rhinoplasty unable to help with?

    A non surgical rhinoplasty is not suitable to help with;

    • Reducing the overall size of the nose
    • Significant Asymmetry of the nose
    • Nose tip reduction
    • Large humps in the nose
    • Help with breathing issues
    In these instances, a surgical rhinoplasty would be the preferred option in order for you to achieve the best results. To find out more click here.

  • Nose Reshaping General Procedure

  • Can I have a non-surgical rhinoplasty if I have had a surgical rhinoplasty?

    It is possible to have a non-surgical rhinoplasty after undergoing a surgical rhinoplasty to correct any remaining imperfections but we do recommend waiting for at least a year after having surgery to consider this treatment option. The reason for waiting is because nose cartilage can take a long time to heal and will continue to heal and change for at least a year and a half after surgery. Ideally you want to have the final result before having a non-surgical rhinoplasty treatment otherwise a change in the healing of your cartilage could then affect the result of the non-surgical treatment.

  • What filler is best for the nose?

    We offer a number of dermal fillers, our expert medical professionals will discuss what dermal filler is best for non surgical nose reshaping at your free consultation prior to surgery.

  • How much does Non-Surgical Nose Reshaping cost?

    Prices start from around £500 at The Private Clinic for non-surgical nose reshaping. The cost of treatment will vary dependent on: The type of dermal filler used.. How much dermal filler is required. How many areas are treated. The best way to get an idea of how much non-surgical nose reshaping treatment with dermal filler is going to cost is to book a consultation with one of our expert aesthetic doctors or nurses who will be able to provide you with an individual treatment plan to help you get the results you wish to achieve. Consultations with our expert doctors or nurses are £50 however this cost can be redeemable against the price of treatment should you wish to book following your consultation. Our prices are competitive and we only use experienced and qualified medical professionals at The Private Clinic to administer our dermal fillers. We believe our patients deserve the utmost safety in our care and we are committed to offering reliable, effective results.

  • When will I be able to see my results after a non-surgical rhinoplasty?

    The results after a non-surgical rhinoplasty is instant but swelling may alter the appearance for a few days afterwards.

  • What is a non-surgical rhinoplasty?

    A non-surgical rhinoplasty may also be referred to as a non-surgical nose job, non-surgical nose shaping, liquid rhinoplasty or 30 minute nose job to name a few. The procedure is not a rhinoplasty but instead a dermal filler technique where filler is injected into the nose to improve the appearance of any minor imperfections including a smoothing out any lumps or bumps and correcting a crooked nose to appear more symmetrical.

  • How does a non-surgical rhinoplasty work?

    Injecting dermal filler into the nose can give really great results at the hands of an experienced practitioner. The effects of filler is similar to when you use make-up to contour your face as injecting filler into certain areas will influence the light to hit the area in a certain way. When it comes to lumps or bumps in the nose then dermal filler can be used to fill the surrounding areas making everything more even. Although adding filler usually means adding volume, this is not always the case and in a non-surgical rhinoplasty it is often making the nose appear slightly slimmer.

  • What are the benefits of a Non-Surgical Nose Job?

    A Non-Surgical nose job can improve the shape of the tip and bridge of the nose without the need for a surgical procedure. Small imperfections can be safely corrected through use of dermal filler with minimal pain, downtime and swelling post-treatment. To find out more about our Non Surgical Rhinoplasty procedure click here to book a free consultation.

  • What can a non-surgical rhinoplasty help with?

    A non-surgical rhinoplasty can help to;

    • Correct and smooth bumps in the nose
    • Correct asymmetrical noses
    • Straighten a hooked nose
    • Add more height or definition to a small nose
    • Straighten crooked noses
    • Correct mild to moderate nasal tip droops
    • Refine any remaining imperfections after a surgical rhinoplasty
    Minor imperfections like the ones detailed above are often easily treated with the non-surgical nose job procedure. To find out if a non-surgical nose job is suitable for you then click here to book in for a free consultation with one of our medical experts.

  • What is a non-surgical rhinoplasty unable to help with?

    A non surgical rhinoplasty is not suitable to help with;

    • Reducing the overall size of the nose
    • Significant Asymmetry of the nose
    • Nose tip reduction
    • Large humps in the nose
    • Help with breathing issues
    In these instances, a surgical rhinoplasty would be the preferred option in order for you to achieve the best results. To find out more click here.

  • Can a non-surgical nose job help with a deviated septum?

    A non-surgical nose-job will not be able to help with breathing issues associated with having a deviated septum. The best treatment to help with this would be a septoplasty and a consultation with a plastic surgeon would best assess your suitability for this procedure. Click here to find out more.

  • Nose Reshaping Before Procedure

  • Am I suitable for Non-Surgical Nose Shaping?

    Non-surgical rhinoplasty is ideal for patients who are wishing to improve the appearance of their nose without having a surgical procedure. A large nose however can’t be made smaller but any small imperfections such as bumps on the bridge of the nose can be smoothed out and corrected during this procedure. The best way to find out your suitability for a non-surgical nose job is to visit us for a free consultation with one of our expert nurses, doctors or surgeons. Click here to book.

  • Where is dermal filler injected into the nose?

    For a non-surgical nose job the placement of filler will depend on what the issue is that the treatment is trying to correct. For example, if you have a bump then dermal filler will be injected above and below the bump to smooth it out. If you are looking to alter the bridge of the nose then dermal filler will be injected in-between the eyes to help raise the nasal bridge. Dermal filler can also be injected into the tip of the nose to increase the projection and help to refine the overall shape. If you are suffering from asymmetry then filler will be injected into areas that will help to even it out.

  • Nose Reshaping After Procedure

  • Can I wear glasses after a non-surgical nose reshape?

    Generally you should be fine to wear glasses post-treatment although we recommend that you avoid any that push into the nasal bridge area for 2 weeks after the procedure.

  • Body Ballancer®

  • How does the Body Ballancer® work?

    The Body Ballancer® uses patent protected inflating compression garments to apply a gentle or firm massage. Each garment contains 24 individual air chambers that overlap to apply fluent compression strokes that target every inch of the treated area. The massage motion, with its special direction of flow, increases circulation and gently but thoroughly decongests the problem areas of hips, thighs, buttocks and upper arms. The Body Ballancer® action accelerates the removal of waste products and excess fluid via the lymphatic system, reducing the appearance of cellulite, improving skin tone and reducing volume in areas affected by excess fluid retention whilst it’s gentle, rhythmic action promotes relaxation.

  • How long does a Body Ballancer® treatment take?

    The time taken for a Body Ballancer® treatment to be performed will vary depending on the type of treatment being carried out. On average treatments tend to take around 30 minutes. Circulatory Program – 30 mins Sports Massage – 30 mins Relaxation – 30 mins Post Pregnancy – 30 mins Cellulite, Toning & Water Retention – 1hr Lymphoedema Program – 1hr Pre & Post Liposuction programmes are available by request

  • What can Body Ballancer® treatment help with?

    Liposuction & CoolSculpting Results – Body Ballancer® will help to reduce swelling caused by inflammation, bring healthy oxygenated blood to the upper dermal layers of skin and speed up scar tissue to repair. CoolSculpting patients in particular will see quicker results from treatment as the dead cells following treatment use the lymphatic system to rid them from the body. Gut Health – The gut is host to a crucial component of the lymphatic system, the lacteal. The fat we consume is absorbed by the lacteals and carried through the lymphatic network. A sluggish lymphatic system will slow down this process causing unhealthy build ups of fat in the digestive system. A single Body Ballancer® treatment will help to clear this and improve oval gut health. Cellulite and skin tone – Boosting the supply of fresh, oxygenated blood to the tissues will result in a significant improvement in cellulite and skin quality, leaving it firm, toned and feeling smoother and softer. Detox & Weight Loss – No need for faddy diets or juice fasts, as the elimination of waste, toxins and fats will be accelerated through an enhanced lymphatic system. Slimming and Body Contouring – The improvements in the lymphatic and circulatory systems will lead to the rapid elimination of fluid, reducing volume and ‘puffiness’ in as little as a single session. Fitness and Exercise – Incorporated as part of your fitness routine, the Body Ballancer® will both improve performance and provide active sports recovery. Stress Relief – Improves the elimination of the free radicals that are a by-product of the body’s stress-fighting hormones, recognised as a factor in premature ageing. Pregnancy – Body Ballancer® treatment during the third trimester will help to relieve any discomfort from water retention as well as reducing the risk of cellulite, spider or varicose veins forming.

  • How many Body Ballancer® treatments will I need?

    The number of Body Ballancer® that you require will depend on the type of treatment being performed and the condition being targeted. If using the Body Ballancer® to help reduce the appearance of cellulite and improve skin tone then a course of treatments will be advised. This usually involves a course of 12 treatments spread over 3 to 4 weeks. When using the Body Ballancer® following a procedure such as Vaser Liposuction a course of 3 to 10 sessions depending on the body areas targeted. Bloating and puffiness in general can be effectively reduced by use of the Body Ballancer®. The effects from treatment are usually felt after a single session but you may choose to have regular treatment to maintain the results.

  • What should I wear to a Body Ballancer® treatment session?

    We advise patients to attend clinic in comfortable clothing that covers the areas being treated. It is best that no skin touches the specialised Body Ballancer® garments due to hygiene reasons.

  • What is the Lymphatic System?

    The lymphatic system sits alongside the body’s cardio-vascular system quietly helping to maintain our health and well-being by performing three critical functions: Aiding the immune system in removing and destroying waste, debris, dead blood cells, pathogens and other toxins. Absorbing fats and fat-soluble vitamins from the digestive system and delivering these nutrients to the cells of the body where they are used as fuel. Removing excess fluid – ‘lymph’ and waste products from the spaces between the cells and organs of the body. A compromised lymphatic system can lead to a range of health issues including tissue swelling, poor skin tone, excess weight, cellulite and headaches.

  • Body Ballancer® General Procedure

  • How does the Body Ballancer® work?

    The Body Ballancer® uses patent protected inflating compression garments to apply a gentle or firm massage. Each garment contains 24 individual air chambers that overlap to apply fluent compression strokes that target every inch of the treated area. The massage motion, with its special direction of flow, increases circulation and gently but thoroughly decongests the problem areas of hips, thighs, buttocks and upper arms. The Body Ballancer® action accelerates the removal of waste products and excess fluid via the lymphatic system, reducing the appearance of cellulite, improving skin tone and reducing volume in areas affected by excess fluid retention whilst it’s gentle, rhythmic action promotes relaxation.

  • How long does a Body Ballancer® treatment take?

    The time taken for a Body Ballancer® treatment to be performed will vary depending on the type of treatment being carried out. On average treatments tend to take around 30 minutes. Circulatory Program – 30 mins Sports Massage – 30 mins Relaxation – 30 mins Post Pregnancy – 30 mins Cellulite, Toning & Water Retention – 1hr Lymphoedema Program – 1hr Pre & Post Liposuction programmes are available by request

  • What can Body Ballancer® treatment help with?

    Liposuction & CoolSculpting Results – Body Ballancer® will help to reduce swelling caused by inflammation, bring healthy oxygenated blood to the upper dermal layers of skin and speed up scar tissue to repair. CoolSculpting patients in particular will see quicker results from treatment as the dead cells following treatment use the lymphatic system to rid them from the body. Gut Health – The gut is host to a crucial component of the lymphatic system, the lacteal. The fat we consume is absorbed by the lacteals and carried through the lymphatic network. A sluggish lymphatic system will slow down this process causing unhealthy build ups of fat in the digestive system. A single Body Ballancer® treatment will help to clear this and improve oval gut health. Cellulite and skin tone – Boosting the supply of fresh, oxygenated blood to the tissues will result in a significant improvement in cellulite and skin quality, leaving it firm, toned and feeling smoother and softer. Detox & Weight Loss – No need for faddy diets or juice fasts, as the elimination of waste, toxins and fats will be accelerated through an enhanced lymphatic system. Slimming and Body Contouring – The improvements in the lymphatic and circulatory systems will lead to the rapid elimination of fluid, reducing volume and ‘puffiness’ in as little as a single session. Fitness and Exercise – Incorporated as part of your fitness routine, the Body Ballancer® will both improve performance and provide active sports recovery. Stress Relief – Improves the elimination of the free radicals that are a by-product of the body’s stress-fighting hormones, recognised as a factor in premature ageing. Pregnancy – Body Ballancer® treatment during the third trimester will help to relieve any discomfort from water retention as well as reducing the risk of cellulite, spider or varicose veins forming.

  • How many Body Ballancer® treatments will I need?

    The number of Body Ballancer® that you require will depend on the type of treatment being performed and the condition being targeted. If using the Body Ballancer® to help reduce the appearance of cellulite and improve skin tone then a course of treatments will be advised. This usually involves a course of 12 treatments spread over 3 to 4 weeks. When using the Body Ballancer® following a procedure such as Vaser Liposuction a course of 3 to 10 sessions depending on the body areas targeted. Bloating and puffiness in general can be effectively reduced by use of the Body Ballancer®. The effects from treatment are usually felt after a single session but you may choose to have regular treatment to maintain the results.

  • What is the Lymphatic System?

    The lymphatic system sits alongside the body’s cardio-vascular system quietly helping to maintain our health and well-being by performing three critical functions: Aiding the immune system in removing and destroying waste, debris, dead blood cells, pathogens and other toxins. Absorbing fats and fat-soluble vitamins from the digestive system and delivering these nutrients to the cells of the body where they are used as fuel. Removing excess fluid – ‘lymph’ and waste products from the spaces between the cells and organs of the body. A compromised lymphatic system can lead to a range of health issues including tissue swelling, poor skin tone, excess weight, cellulite and headaches.

  • Body Ballancer® Before Procedure

  • What should I wear to a Body Ballancer® treatment session?

    We advise patients to attend clinic in comfortable clothing that covers the areas being treated. It is best that no skin touches the specialised Body Ballancer® garments due to hygiene reasons.

  • Mesotherapy

  • Am I suitable for Mesotherapy?

    Your suitability for Mesotherapy treatment will be assessed following a medical assessment at your consultation. The majority of patients who are fit and well are suitable and it can be carried out on all skin types. Mesotherapy treatment is only suitable for patients who are above the age of 18 and those who are not pregnant or breast feeding. To find out more about mesotherapy treatment, book a consultation with one of our experts.

  • What areas of the body can be treated with Mesotherapy?

    Mesotherapy is suitable to be used on; Face Neck Décolleté Double Chin Scalp Hands Arms Legs Knees Inner Thigh bulge Back Abdomen/Stomach Buttocks Hips/Flanks To find out more about mesotherapy treatment, book a consultation with one of our experts.

  • What is Mesotherapy used for?

    There are lots of different uses for Mesotherapy treatment. Some of the common conditions treated in our clinic include; Fine lines & wrinkles Dull Skin Pigmentation Cellulite Stretch Marks Scars Reducing Fat To find out more about mesotherapy treatment, book a consultation with one of our experts.

  • How many Mesotherapy treatments are required?

    The number of treatments required will depend on the areas being treated. Facial rejuvenation will usually require a course of 6-8 treatments for the best results followed by yearly treatments to help maintain them. Cellulite reduction will need between 8-12 treatments. Hair loss treatment will need a minimum of 10 treatments and then regular maintenance treatments. To find out more about mesotherapy treatment, book a consultation with one of our experts.

  • How much is Mesotherapy treatment?

    The cost of Mesotherapy treatment will vary depending on the areas being treated and the number of areas too. Mesotherapy treatment for the face starts from £200 Mesotherapy treatment for the body starts from £220 We offer a range of treatment courses from 3 to 6 treatments which can be discussed at your consultation with one of our experts. Consultations with our expert skin practitioners are £25 however this cost is redeemable against the price of any skin treatment that you wish to book following your consultation.

  • Does Mesotherapy treatment hurt?

    Mesotherapy treatment can cause some patients slight discomfort and we are able to offer topical anaesthetic to patients who request it.

  • How long does Mesotherapy treatment take?

    Mesotherapy treatment usually takes around 30-60 minutes to perform. If you have requested topical anaesthesia then an additional 30 minutes would be required for this to take effect.

  • How long does Mesotherapy take to work?

    The time that you can expect to see results will depend on the purpose of treatment. For skin rejuvenation especially patients often comment on how glowing and fresh their skin felt in the days following treatment. For treating areas of cellulite it can take up to 3 session before you can start to see the initial results.

  • What can I expect after Mesotherapy treatment?

    The downtime following mesotherapy is minimal however you may experience; Bruising – Bruising is common around the injection site and it can last for up to a week. Tenderness – The area treated may feel tender when touched which can last 1-2 weeks. Further treatment should not be carried out until this has subsided. Swelling – Swelling is another common result from mesotherapy treatment, it is normal and to be expected from treatment, it should only last a few days following treatment before settling. Redness – The majority of patients will have some form of redness immediately following treatment. This is quick to fade and is usually not noticeable after 24 hours. Our expert doctors and nurses will explain in detail what to expect following Mesotherapy treatment and we have a 24-hour patient helpline should you feel worried at any time.

  • How long will the results from Mesotherapy last for?

    The results following mesotherapy are expected to last for up to a year following treatment. In order to maintain your results, continued treatment will be required. The best results are seen on patients who live a healthy lifestyle with regular exercise, nutritious diet and good skin care. If you do not continue with mesotherapy treatment then the results are likely to disappear after 12-18 months. To find out more about mesotherapy treatment and our personalised treatment plans, book a consultation to see one of our skin experts.

  • Mesotherapy General Procedure

  • What areas of the body can be treated with Mesotherapy?

    Mesotherapy is suitable to be used on; Face Neck Décolleté Double Chin Scalp Hands Arms Legs Knees Inner Thigh bulge Back Abdomen/Stomach Buttocks Hips/Flanks To find out more about mesotherapy treatment, book a consultation with one of our experts.

  • What is Mesotherapy used for?

    There are lots of different uses for Mesotherapy treatment. Some of the common conditions treated in our clinic include; Fine lines & wrinkles Dull Skin Pigmentation Cellulite Stretch Marks Scars Reducing Fat To find out more about mesotherapy treatment, book a consultation with one of our experts.

  • How many Mesotherapy treatments are required?

    The number of treatments required will depend on the areas being treated. Facial rejuvenation will usually require a course of 6-8 treatments for the best results followed by yearly treatments to help maintain them. Cellulite reduction will need between 8-12 treatments. Hair loss treatment will need a minimum of 10 treatments and then regular maintenance treatments. To find out more about mesotherapy treatment, book a consultation with one of our experts.

  • How much is Mesotherapy treatment?

    The cost of Mesotherapy treatment will vary depending on the areas being treated and the number of areas too. Mesotherapy treatment for the face starts from £200 Mesotherapy treatment for the body starts from £220 We offer a range of treatment courses from 3 to 6 treatments which can be discussed at your consultation with one of our experts. Consultations with our expert skin practitioners are £25 however this cost is redeemable against the price of any skin treatment that you wish to book following your consultation.

  • Does Mesotherapy treatment hurt?

    Mesotherapy treatment can cause some patients slight discomfort and we are able to offer topical anaesthetic to patients who request it.

  • How long does Mesotherapy treatment take?

    Mesotherapy treatment usually takes around 30-60 minutes to perform. If you have requested topical anaesthesia then an additional 30 minutes would be required for this to take effect.

  • How long does Mesotherapy take to work?

    The time that you can expect to see results will depend on the purpose of treatment. For skin rejuvenation especially patients often comment on how glowing and fresh their skin felt in the days following treatment. For treating areas of cellulite it can take up to 3 session before you can start to see the initial results.

  • How long will the results from Mesotherapy last for?

    The results following mesotherapy are expected to last for up to a year following treatment. In order to maintain your results, continued treatment will be required. The best results are seen on patients who live a healthy lifestyle with regular exercise, nutritious diet and good skin care. If you do not continue with mesotherapy treatment then the results are likely to disappear after 12-18 months. To find out more about mesotherapy treatment and our personalised treatment plans, book a consultation to see one of our skin experts.

  • What are the side effects from mesotherapy treatment?

    As with all treatments, side effects are possible following mesotherapy treatment. Due to the personalised nature of mesotherapy treatment, side effects can vary from patient to patient. Side effects of mesotherapy include; redness, sensitivity, minor swelling, itching, bruising and bulging around the injection sites as the solution settles. These all tend to subside after 24-48 hours. Rare side effects include; Nausea, hematomas, dark spots on the skin, infection and scarring. All patients will have access to our 24hour patient helpline following treatment who are available to take your call should you feel worried or concerned about anything following treatment. Our experienced doctors and nurses will also ensure that you are fully informed about the risks, side effects and suggested aftercare following treatment.

  • Mesotherapy Before Procedure

  • Am I suitable for Mesotherapy?

    Your suitability for Mesotherapy treatment will be assessed following a medical assessment at your consultation. The majority of patients who are fit and well are suitable and it can be carried out on all skin types. Mesotherapy treatment is only suitable for patients who are above the age of 18 and those who are not pregnant or breast feeding. To find out more about mesotherapy treatment, book a consultation with one of our experts.

  • Does Mesotherapy treatment hurt?

    Mesotherapy treatment can cause some patients slight discomfort and we are able to offer topical anaesthetic to patients who request it.

  • What can I expect after Mesotherapy treatment?

    The downtime following mesotherapy is minimal however you may experience; Bruising – Bruising is common around the injection site and it can last for up to a week. Tenderness – The area treated may feel tender when touched which can last 1-2 weeks. Further treatment should not be carried out until this has subsided. Swelling – Swelling is another common result from mesotherapy treatment, it is normal and to be expected from treatment, it should only last a few days following treatment before settling. Redness – The majority of patients will have some form of redness immediately following treatment. This is quick to fade and is usually not noticeable after 24 hours. Our expert doctors and nurses will explain in detail what to expect following Mesotherapy treatment and we have a 24-hour patient helpline should you feel worried at any time.

  • Mesotherapy be combined with other treatments?

    Mesotherapy is commonly performed to help boost the effects of other treatments such as anti-wrinkle injections and dermal filler. At The Private Clinic we are offering a Cellulite treatment package which combines Mesotherapy with our Body Ballancer treatment to help you achieve the best results.

  • Acne

  • Am I suitable for acne treatment?

    The majority of patients who are experiencing acne are suitable for at least one of our acne treatments. We are unable to treat patients under the age of 18 for any cosmetic skin treatments in clinic unless it is Acne. We can perform out n-lite laser acne treatment on patients aged 16 and above but they will need to provide us with a GP referral and they must be accompanied by a parent or guardian at every visit. Suitability for acne treatment will be assessed at consultation.

  • Do you offer combined acne treatments?

    Combined treatment is a common way to deal with acne and will often be recommended by our specialist skin practitioners. Acne can be treated in different ways with some treatments working to unblock your pores with others working to decrease oil production and bacteria in the skin.

  • How much does Acne treatment cost?

    Now that you are on the road to clear skin, checkout our competitive prices and start your journey today. N-Lite Acne treatment prices start from £250 for single treatments and £700 for a course of 3 treatments. Chemical Peel and Enzyme Treatment prices start from £75. However price may vary depending on the number of treatments needed. See our before and after photos. To book a no obligation consultation to discuss your skin concerns click here. Consultations with our expert skin practitioners are £25 however this cost is redeemable against the price of any skin treatment that you wish to book following your consultation. A consultation with a dermatologist is £200. Dermatology consultations are only available at our London Harley Street clinic.

  • How soon will I see the results?

    You should start seeing visible improvements after your second N-Lite session with continued improvement over the following three months. Results after a chemical peel can take two to three weeks but the best results are not seen until you are near the end of a course of treatment. It is worth noting that sometimes after acne treatment your skin may get worse before it gets better. However patients undergoing acne treatment need to be prepared for the long term management of their acne. The nature of the problem means that things will change according to hormones, stressful events etc. This is something that we cannot control. However our range of treatments can control the outbreaks and keep them to a minimum therefore preventing the long term after effects such as pitted scarring and pigmentation.

  • Is there an acne treatment clinic near me?

    The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an acne clinic located near to you however treatment offerings may vary between clinics. Our clinics are in; London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ Manchester –  25 St John Street, M3 4DT Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands Glasgow – 11 Park Circus, Glasgow, G3 6AX – Scotland Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire Buckinghamshire – Stokenchurch Medical Center Oxford Road, HP14 3SX – South East England Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here. To book a no obligation consultation at our acne skin clinics to discuss your skin solution click here.

  • Is adult acne common?

    Acne outbreaks are common for both males and females between 20-40 years old but it is also not unusual to have patients outside this age range too, especially during hormonal changes caused during menopause. It is a myth that only teenagers suffer from acne and unfortunately some people are just more prone to acne outbreaks than others.

  • Can all types of acne be treated?

    In the majority of cases we will be able to find a treatment that is suitable for the type of acne that you are suffering with. Sometimes you may need to make lifestyle changes to help clear up acne too if we find anything additional to be direct cause. This will all be discussed within your consultation.

  • Can you treat all skin types?

    Here at The Private Clinic we have treatments to suit all skin types.

  • What does the treatment involve?

    N-Lite The SmartPulse™ laser light is directed at the affected area, targeting the bacteria and stimulating the natural repair mechanism of the skin. By destroying the bacteria, this laser treatment quickly clears the acne – sometimes in just a few sessions. Because the N-Lite laser targets the cause of the acne and not just the symptoms it reduces the risk of new acne developing and also reduces the risk of acne scarring. N-Lite is one of the most effective laser acne treatments available today. Chemical Peel Your skin will be cleansed before the chemical peel or enzyme solution is applied to your skin. Different peel types will have different treatment times. Once the time is up a neutraliser will be applied to your face to stop the chemical peel from working before it is removed from the skin. You will then have SPF applied to your face before your leave.

  • Does the treatment hurt?

    No, N-Lite is a pain-free treatment, though you may feel a slight tingling sensation as the laser light is absorbed by the skin. Chemical Peels are not painful but you again, may feel a tingling or warmth as they are applied to your skin.

  • Acne Before Procedure

  • Am I suitable for acne treatment?

    The majority of patients who are experiencing acne are suitable for at least one of our acne treatments. We are unable to treat patients under the age of 18 for any cosmetic skin treatments in clinic unless it is Acne. We can perform out n-lite laser acne treatment on patients aged 16 and above but they will need to provide us with a GP referral and they must be accompanied by a parent or guardian at every visit. Suitability for acne treatment will be assessed at consultation.

  • Do you offer combined acne treatments?

    Combined treatment is a common way to deal with acne and will often be recommended by our specialist skin practitioners. Acne can be treated in different ways with some treatments working to unblock your pores with others working to decrease oil production and bacteria in the skin.

  • How much does Acne treatment cost?

    Now that you are on the road to clear skin, checkout our competitive prices and start your journey today. N-Lite Acne treatment prices start from £250 for single treatments and £700 for a course of 3 treatments. Chemical Peel and Enzyme Treatment prices start from £75. However price may vary depending on the number of treatments needed. See our before and after photos. To book a no obligation consultation to discuss your skin concerns click here. Consultations with our expert skin practitioners are £25 however this cost is redeemable against the price of any skin treatment that you wish to book following your consultation. A consultation with a dermatologist is £200. Dermatology consultations are only available at our London Harley Street clinic.

  • Is there an acne treatment clinic near me?

    The Private Clinic has clinics nationwide so we are sure to have an acne clinic located near to you however treatment offerings may vary between clinics. Our clinics are in; London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ Manchester –  25 St John Street, M3 4DT Birmingham – 88 Hagley Road, B16 8LU – West Midlands Glasgow – 11 Park Circus, Glasgow, G3 6AX – Scotland Leeds – 45 Park Square North, LS1 2NP – Yorkshire Buckinghamshire – Stokenchurch Medical Center Oxford Road, HP14 3SX – South East England Bristol – 92c Whiteladies Road, BS8 2QN – Clifton Northampton – 82 Billing Road, NN1 5DF – East Midlands To find out more about booking a consultation at a clinic near you, contact us here. To book a no obligation consultation at our acne skin clinics to discuss your skin solution click here.

  • Can all types of acne be treated?

    In the majority of cases we will be able to find a treatment that is suitable for the type of acne that you are suffering with. Sometimes you may need to make lifestyle changes to help clear up acne too if we find anything additional to be direct cause. This will all be discussed within your consultation.

  • Can you treat all skin types?

    Here at The Private Clinic we have treatments to suit all skin types.

  • What does the treatment involve?

    N-Lite The SmartPulse™ laser light is directed at the affected area, targeting the bacteria and stimulating the natural repair mechanism of the skin. By destroying the bacteria, this laser treatment quickly clears the acne – sometimes in just a few sessions. Because the N-Lite laser targets the cause of the acne and not just the symptoms it reduces the risk of new acne developing and also reduces the risk of acne scarring. N-Lite is one of the most effective laser acne treatments available today. Chemical Peel Your skin will be cleansed before the chemical peel or enzyme solution is applied to your skin. Different peel types will have different treatment times. Once the time is up a neutraliser will be applied to your face to stop the chemical peel from working before it is removed from the skin. You will then have SPF applied to your face before your leave.

  • Why You Should Choose The Private Clinic

    We are the UK’s leading non-invasive cosmetic group and have some of the most experienced Consultant Dermatologists and skin experts working with us. Our treatment packages have delivered significant results time and time again, and we’re proud of the difference we can make in people’s lives. There are no hidden costs We afford all our patients the right care well before, during and long after every procedure Our nurses, technical assistants and therapists are all very experienced and well trained Our aftercare promise – you can call, email and visit us to discuss how we tailor-make each procedure and offer ethical and professional aftercare for every patient We are contactable 24/7, 365 days a year for patients We are competitively priced for the expertise and professionalism we provide to every patient

  • Are the treatments safe?

    N-lite acne treatment is painless and totally safe as long as it is carried out by skilled and experienced practitioners. Adverse reactions following a chemical skin peel or enzyme treatment are rare. Chemical peel treatments are only performed by trained and experienced practitioners and all potential side effects will be discussed during your consultation.

  • Thermage

  • What is a Non-Surgical Facelift?

    A non-surgical facelift is a broad term used to describe aesthetic skin treatments than can achieve similar results to a facelift. Treatments include Thermage, Wrinkle Relaxing Injections, Dermal Filler and Thread Lifts all of which do not involve surgery, incisions, anaesthesia and significant downtime. We offer free consultations with our expert aesthetic nurses and doctors all of which will be able to advise on the best course of treatment for you. Click here to book a consultation.

  • Where on the body is Thermage performed?

    The Thermage CPT procedure is actually a very versatile, non-invasive treatment that can be performed on numerous areas of the body. As well as being able to help tighten your skin safely on your face, neck and décolletage it can also be performed on areas of the body that are suffering from skin that is crepey or sagging. Face & Jaws: Sagging skin Loose jowls or lack of definition in jaw line Sagging skin under the chin Wrinkles and fine lines around the mouth or forehead Eyes Hooding Fine Lines Wrinkles Furrowed Brows Body (abdomen, thighs, buttocks, and arms) Crepey Skin Dimples Cellulite Sagging

  • How is Thermage different from other skin tightening treatments?

    While laser treatments and other radiofrequency procedures also tighten skin, no other treatment heats as deeply as Thermage. By heating the innermost layers of skin, Thermage is the most effective at tightening collagen and stimulating the formation of new collagen, which results in tighter skin and an overall younger looking appearance. Also, Thermage generally achieves results in a single treatment compared to other technologies requiring multiple treatment sessions.

  • How soon will I see the results?

    Most clients will notice an improvement straight after treatment. The effects continue to improve for up to 6 months following a single treatment. Results can last for years depending on your skin condition and natural ageing process.

  • How much does Thermage cost?

    The cost for the Thermage CPT skin tightening treatment will vary depending on the areas being treated. You will be able to discuss the fees and obtain an accurate quote during your initial consultation. Consultations with our expert thermage practitioners are £25 however this cost is redeemable against the price of any thermage treatment that you wish to book following your consultation. Below is a guide to our Thermage Skin Tightening treatment prices: Lower face & Jowls – £1,900 Face – £2,300 Lower Face, Jowls & Upper Neck – £2,500

  • What is Thermage?

    Thermage CPT is a Radio-frequency treatment that smooths, tightens and contours the skin for an overall younger looking appearance. Thermage is a unique treatment that can address visible signs of aging in one short, non-invasive appointment. The Thermage CPT System represents a significant leap forward in skin tightening and body contouring technology utilising Comfort Pulse Technology to get skin back to its healthy, youthful appearance. This treatment is the premium non-invasive procedure to help smooth, tighten and contour the skin in a single treatment with no surgery, no injections and little to no downtime. Click here to book a consultation and find out more.

  • How does Thermage work?

    Thermage treatment works by using best-in-class radiofrequency technology to heat collagen fibres deep in the skin and underlying tissue. Thermage transfers heat to the epidermis which not only tightens the existing collagen but also promotes the skin to produce more. The radiofrequency technology produces electrical currents that cause the collagen to tighten which then encourages the skin to contract and become tighter and smoother. The Thermage CPT system has a uniform heating action that causes the structures in the skin and underlying tissue to immediately tighten while stimulating collagen growth. Over time, new and remodelled collagen is produced to further tighten and contour the skin. Most individuals experience skin tightening and smoothing of the skin for 6 months and the results can last up to 10 years however this does depend on factors such as smoking, severe sun damage and skin disorders.

  • Does the treatment hurt?

    Some patients experience minor discomfort, however, the new Thermage system is considerably less painful than previous generations of this type of treatment. The Thermage CPT system incorporates proprietary Comfort Pulse Technology™ in every aspect of the system including a new vibrating handpiece and scientifically advanced treatment tips. There is a special device in the new system that reduces discomfort and allows higher radiofrequency energies for greater results. Patient care is our priority at The Private Clinic and we will always aim to make any treatment carried out at our clinics as comfortable as possible for the patient. As the Thermage treatment device touches your skin, you’ll feel a brief cooling sensation which will then be followed by a deep but brief heating sensation, followed by another cooling sensation. Throughout the procedure, our practitioners will ensure that you are comfortable with the level of heat which allows them to gauge a balance between your comfort and results. No ongoing pain should be present after treatment but you may feel some tissue tightening.

  • How long does the Thermage treatment take?

    The time is takes to perform a Thermage treatment will vary depending on the area being treated. When treating the face, it takes on average 45 minutes but it can longer if treating larger areas of the body or multiple areas. Thermage treatment is generally a short procedure and is most commonly performed as a single treatment.

  • How long before I can return to daily activities?

    There’s no special care needed after the procedure and most patients return to their regular activities immediately following treatment.

  • Thermage General Procedure

  • What is a Non-Surgical Facelift?

    A non-surgical facelift is a broad term used to describe aesthetic skin treatments than can achieve similar results to a facelift. Treatments include Thermage, Wrinkle Relaxing Injections, Dermal Filler and Thread Lifts all of which do not involve surgery, incisions, anaesthesia and significant downtime. We offer free consultations with our expert aesthetic nurses and doctors all of which will be able to advise on the best course of treatment for you. Click here to book a consultation.

  • Where on the body is Thermage performed?

    The Thermage CPT procedure is actually a very versatile, non-invasive treatment that can be performed on numerous areas of the body. As well as being able to help tighten your skin safely on your face, neck and décolletage it can also be performed on areas of the body that are suffering from skin that is crepey or sagging. Face & Jaws: Sagging skin Loose jowls or lack of definition in jaw line Sagging skin under the chin Wrinkles and fine lines around the mouth or forehead Eyes Hooding Fine Lines Wrinkles Furrowed Brows Body (abdomen, thighs, buttocks, and arms) Crepey Skin Dimples Cellulite Sagging

  • How is Thermage different from other skin tightening treatments?

    While laser treatments and other radiofrequency procedures also tighten skin, no other treatment heats as deeply as Thermage. By heating the innermost layers of skin, Thermage is the most effective at tightening collagen and stimulating the formation of new collagen, which results in tighter skin and an overall younger looking appearance. Also, Thermage generally achieves results in a single treatment compared to other technologies requiring multiple treatment sessions.

  • How soon will I see the results?

    Most clients will notice an improvement straight after treatment. The effects continue to improve for up to 6 months following a single treatment. Results can last for years depending on your skin condition and natural ageing process.

  • How much does Thermage cost?

    The cost for the Thermage CPT skin tightening treatment will vary depending on the areas being treated. You will be able to discuss the fees and obtain an accurate quote during your initial consultation. Consultations with our expert thermage practitioners are £25 however this cost is redeemable against the price of any thermage treatment that you wish to book following your consultation. Below is a guide to our Thermage Skin Tightening treatment prices: Lower face & Jowls – £1,900 Face – £2,300 Lower Face, Jowls & Upper Neck – £2,500

  • What is Thermage?

    Thermage CPT is a Radio-frequency treatment that smooths, tightens and contours the skin for an overall younger looking appearance. Thermage is a unique treatment that can address visible signs of aging in one short, non-invasive appointment. The Thermage CPT System represents a significant leap forward in skin tightening and body contouring technology utilising Comfort Pulse Technology to get skin back to its healthy, youthful appearance. This treatment is the premium non-invasive procedure to help smooth, tighten and contour the skin in a single treatment with no surgery, no injections and little to no downtime. Click here to book a consultation and find out more.

  • How does Thermage work?

    Thermage treatment works by using best-in-class radiofrequency technology to heat collagen fibres deep in the skin and underlying tissue. Thermage transfers heat to the epidermis which not only tightens the existing collagen but also promotes the skin to produce more. The radiofrequency technology produces electrical currents that cause the collagen to tighten which then encourages the skin to contract and become tighter and smoother. The Thermage CPT system has a uniform heating action that causes the structures in the skin and underlying tissue to immediately tighten while stimulating collagen growth. Over time, new and remodelled collagen is produced to further tighten and contour the skin. Most individuals experience skin tightening and smoothing of the skin for 6 months and the results can last up to 10 years however this does depend on factors such as smoking, severe sun damage and skin disorders.

  • Does the treatment hurt?

    Some patients experience minor discomfort, however, the new Thermage system is considerably less painful than previous generations of this type of treatment. The Thermage CPT system incorporates proprietary Comfort Pulse Technology™ in every aspect of the system including a new vibrating handpiece and scientifically advanced treatment tips. There is a special device in the new system that reduces discomfort and allows higher radiofrequency energies for greater results. Patient care is our priority at The Private Clinic and we will always aim to make any treatment carried out at our clinics as comfortable as possible for the patient. As the Thermage treatment device touches your skin, you’ll feel a brief cooling sensation which will then be followed by a deep but brief heating sensation, followed by another cooling sensation. Throughout the procedure, our practitioners will ensure that you are comfortable with the level of heat which allows them to gauge a balance between your comfort and results. No ongoing pain should be present after treatment but you may feel some tissue tightening.

  • How long does the Thermage treatment take?

    The time is takes to perform a Thermage treatment will vary depending on the area being treated. When treating the face, it takes on average 45 minutes but it can longer if treating larger areas of the body or multiple areas. Thermage treatment is generally a short procedure and is most commonly performed as a single treatment.

  • How long before I can return to daily activities?

    There’s no special care needed after the procedure and most patients return to their regular activities immediately following treatment.

  • Acne After procedure

  • How soon will I see the results?

    You should start seeing visible improvements after your second N-Lite session with continued improvement over the following three months. Results after a chemical peel can take two to three weeks but the best results are not seen until you are near the end of a course of treatment. It is worth noting that sometimes after acne treatment your skin may get worse before it gets better. However patients undergoing acne treatment need to be prepared for the long term management of their acne. The nature of the problem means that things will change according to hormones, stressful events etc. This is something that we cannot control. However our range of treatments can control the outbreaks and keep them to a minimum therefore preventing the long term after effects such as pitted scarring and pigmentation.

  • Thermage Before Procedure

  • Is there a particular preparation or follow up regime?

    There is no special care required after treatment, aside from basic skin maintenance and sunscreens as part of a regular skincare regimen. Since the Thermage procedure has little to no downtime, most patients return to their regular activities immediately following treatment. Some patients exhibit a temporary redness or minor swelling after treatment, but this usually goes away within 24 hours.

  • Can Thermage treatment be combined with other treatments?

    You can get great results when you combine Thermage with other treatments that we offer here at The Private Clinic. We recommend that you wait at least 48 hours however before having another treatment such as dermal fillers, chemical peels or laser hair removal in the same area.

  • Acne General Procedure

  • Is adult acne common?

    Acne outbreaks are common for both males and females between 20-40 years old but it is also not unusual to have patients outside this age range too, especially during hormonal changes caused during menopause. It is a myth that only teenagers suffer from acne and unfortunately some people are just more prone to acne outbreaks than others.

  • Acne Day of procedure

  • Does the treatment hurt?

    No, N-Lite is a pain-free treatment, though you may feel a slight tingling sensation as the laser light is absorbed by the skin. Chemical Peels are not painful but you again, may feel a tingling or warmth as they are applied to your skin.

  • How long does the treatment take?

    Each N-Lite session lasts 30 minutes. Chemical Peel treatments take less than half an hour.

  • Acne Scars Treatment

  • What does the treatment involve?

    The Pixel Laser is a high-energy beam of light that is directed onto damaged areas of skin. The laser removes the epidermis and upper dermis on targeted zones, which triggers the body’s natural healing process and stimulates the growth of healthy new skin. The advantage of the Pixel Laser over other laser treatments is that it can treat very small areas of skin leaving the surrounding tissue untouched and undamaged.

  • How long does the treatment take?

    This will depend on the size of the area to be treated. Sessions can last from a few minutes to half an hour and we usually recommend a course of three to five treatments every four to six weeks.

  • How much does Acne Scars treatment cost?

    Consultations with our experienced skin and laser practitioners are £25 however this cost is redeemable against the price of any skin treatment that you wish to book following your consultation. Prices for Laser Skin Resurfacing start from £500. IPL Photorejuvenation treatment prices start from £200. Microneedling/Dermaroller treatment starts from £280 for single sessions or £850 for a course of 4 treatments. Chemical Peel treatments costs start from £75 for a single session. Medical Microdermabrasion prices start from £65 for a single session and £325 for a course. All acne scar treatment prices will vary depending on the number of treatments needed. You will be given an accurate quote following your consultation. You can also arrange a consultation to seek advice from one of London’s top Consultant Dermatologists. The cost of a dermatologist consultation is £200. This is only available at our London Harley Street clinic.

  • How soon will I see the results?

    You should start to see results after your very first session of this scar laser treatment, however, the final results won’t be visible until the end of your course of treatment.

  • What is the recovery process?

    For several hours after treatment your skin will feel tight, and look ‘sunburned’ and swollen. It may look pinkish for another five to seven days, while the swelling should go down after one to three days. For this reason you may want to spend a day or two at home, depending on your job. As your skin starts to heal it may flake a little which can last for up to two weeks.

  • Is the treatment painful?

    Very few people feel any pain at all with the Pixel Laser, though some experience a tingling sensation.

  • Acne Scars Treatment Before procedure

  • What does the treatment involve?

    The Pixel Laser is a high-energy beam of light that is directed onto damaged areas of skin. The laser removes the epidermis and upper dermis on targeted zones, which triggers the body’s natural healing process and stimulates the growth of healthy new skin. The advantage of the Pixel Laser over other laser treatments is that it can treat very small areas of skin leaving the surrounding tissue untouched and undamaged.

  • How long does the treatment take?

    This will depend on the size of the area to be treated. Sessions can last from a few minutes to half an hour and we usually recommend a course of three to five treatments every four to six weeks.

  • Is the treatment painful?

    Very few people feel any pain at all with the Pixel Laser, though some experience a tingling sensation.

  • Acne Scars Treatment General procedure

  • How much does Acne Scars treatment cost?

    Consultations with our experienced skin and laser practitioners are £25 however this cost is redeemable against the price of any skin treatment that you wish to book following your consultation. Prices for Laser Skin Resurfacing start from £500. IPL Photorejuvenation treatment prices start from £200. Microneedling/Dermaroller treatment starts from £280 for single sessions or £850 for a course of 4 treatments. Chemical Peel treatments costs start from £75 for a single session. Medical Microdermabrasion prices start from £65 for a single session and £325 for a course. All acne scar treatment prices will vary depending on the number of treatments needed. You will be given an accurate quote following your consultation. You can also arrange a consultation to seek advice from one of London’s top Consultant Dermatologists. The cost of a dermatologist consultation is £200. This is only available at our London Harley Street clinic.

  • How soon will I see the results?

    You should start to see results after your very first session of this scar laser treatment, however, the final results won’t be visible until the end of your course of treatment.

  • Acne Scars Treatment After procedure

  • What is the recovery process?

    For several hours after treatment your skin will feel tight, and look ‘sunburned’ and swollen. It may look pinkish for another five to seven days, while the swelling should go down after one to three days. For this reason you may want to spend a day or two at home, depending on your job. As your skin starts to heal it may flake a little which can last for up to two weeks.

  • Keloid Scars

  • What does the treatment involve?

    Injections of the steroid (triamcinolane) are the most effective way of treating most Keloid scars, though this will depend on the size and location of the scar. After 4 to 6 sessions of this treatment the appearance of Keloids will have improved dramatically. If the scar is particularly large, it will usually be reduced in size with surgery. This will then be followed up with a series of postoperative steroid injections.

  • How long does the treatment take?

    Steroid treatment for Keloid scars takes between 15 and 30 minutes per session. Surgical removal of Keloids can take up to 1 hour depending on size.

  • How much does Keloid Scars cost?

    A consultation with our Consultant Dermatologist in London Harley Street is £200. Prices for Keloid Scar Removal start from £240 in case of steroid injections. Surgical removal of Keloids starts at £1,150. A consultation is always your first step, where you can obtain a full understanding of the severity of your scarring and your treatment options.

  • How soon will I see the results?

    With steroid treatments you should notice an improvement in the appearance of your scars within two to three weeks of your first treatment. Usually a course is required. In case of surgery, results are immediate.

  • How long will the results last?

    In rare occasions Keloid scars may grow back and you may need to be treated again.

  • Keloid Scars Before Procedure

  • What does the treatment involve?

    Injections of the steroid (triamcinolane) are the most effective way of treating most Keloid scars, though this will depend on the size and location of the scar. After 4 to 6 sessions of this treatment the appearance of Keloids will have improved dramatically. If the scar is particularly large, it will usually be reduced in size with surgery. This will then be followed up with a series of postoperative steroid injections.

  • How long does the treatment take?

    Steroid treatment for Keloid scars takes between 15 and 30 minutes per session. Surgical removal of Keloids can take up to 1 hour depending on size.

  • Keloid Scars General Procedure

  • How much does Keloid Scars cost?

    A consultation with our Consultant Dermatologist in London Harley Street is £200. Prices for Keloid Scar Removal start from £240 in case of steroid injections. Surgical removal of Keloids starts at £1,150. A consultation is always your first step, where you can obtain a full understanding of the severity of your scarring and your treatment options.

  • How soon will I see the results?

    With steroid treatments you should notice an improvement in the appearance of your scars within two to three weeks of your first treatment. Usually a course is required. In case of surgery, results are immediate.

  • How long will the results last?

    In rare occasions Keloid scars may grow back and you may need to be treated again.

  • Mole Checks & Removal

  • When is a mole dangerous?

    We recommend checking your skin every few months for any new moles and changes in existing ones. Any new moles that appear after the age of 30 should be checked thoroughly by a professional as their risk is significantly higher. A helpful way to remember what to look for in determining a dangerous mole is to use the ABCD method:

  • Will I be left with any scars following mole removal?

    Depending on the size of your mole, its location and the method used to remove it, you may be left with a small scar. Your dermatologist will always work with you to ensure that any blemishes are minimal and will advise you on your risk of scarring during consultation and treatment.

  • How much does Mole Checks & Removal cost?

    The cost of an appointment with our Consultant Dermatologist is £200. A full mole check cost is £200 (included in the consultation price) and, depending on the treatment course offered by the Consultant Dermatologist, mole removal will cost approximately £600. If you require a biopsy, the following pricing guidelines apply: Diagnostic skin biopsy – £300 Excisional skin biopsy – £600 You will be informed of an accurate pricing structure for your treatment following your consultation.

  • Mole Checks & Removal General Procedure

  • When is a mole dangerous?

    We recommend checking your skin every few months for any new moles and changes in existing ones. Any new moles that appear after the age of 30 should be checked thoroughly by a professional as their risk is significantly higher. A helpful way to remember what to look for in determining a dangerous mole is to use the ABCD method:

  • Will I be left with any scars following mole removal?

    Depending on the size of your mole, its location and the method used to remove it, you may be left with a small scar. Your dermatologist will always work with you to ensure that any blemishes are minimal and will advise you on your risk of scarring during consultation and treatment.

  • How much does Mole Checks & Removal cost?

    The cost of an appointment with our Consultant Dermatologist is £200. A full mole check cost is £200 (included in the consultation price) and, depending on the treatment course offered by the Consultant Dermatologist, mole removal will cost approximately £600. If you require a biopsy, the following pricing guidelines apply: Diagnostic skin biopsy – £300 Excisional skin biopsy – £600 You will be informed of an accurate pricing structure for your treatment following your consultation.

  • Laser Skin Resurfacing

  • What is Pearl Laser Resurfacing?

    The Pearl Laser Resurfacing procedure combines the impact of resurfacing lasers with the gentleness and safety of non-invasive procedures. It is designed to treat ageing and sun-damaged skin. Pearl can effectively help to reduce wrinkles, uneven texture and sun damage with a single treatment and less downtime than other skin resurfacing treatmetns. A Pearl Laser Resurfancing treatment involves treating the top layer of skin with pulses of laser. This process removes a small portion of the skin surface (the epidermis) and a natrual protective barrier is created on the skin surface. Recovery time can take 3-4 days and the skin will shed revealing new, healthy and vibrant skin underneath. Not only does Pearl Laser Resurfacing replace the top layer of skin but it also works to stimulate new collagen growth beneath the skin which fills out and reduces the apperance of fine lines and wrinkles. This new collagen growth will continue for 4-6 weeks post-treatment. In a short time, patients will notice overall skin clarity, smoothness and softness – all from a 15 to 30-minute treatment with only 3 – 4 days of ‘social’ downtime.

  • What does Laser Skin Resurfacing treat?

    Laser skin resurfacing is an effective treatment for;

    • Smoothing any uneven texture and discolouration to the skin.
    • Repairing sun damage and reducing pore size.
    • Reducing fines lines and wrinkles.
    • Gives the skin an overall glow and soft feel.
    • Scar Care.
    Find out more about how Laser Skin Resurfacing could benefit you in one of our skin consultations with our laser experts.

  • What are the different Pearl Laser Resurfacing treatments?

    There are three types of Pearl Resurfacing Treatment available; Pearl, Pearl Fractional and Pearl Fusion. Pearl: Pearl is often most suitable for finer wrinkles and sunspots. The practitioner guides the laser over the whole face, removing the top layer of the epidermis and heating a layer of tissue below it. Pearl Fractional: Often used for deeper wrinkles or particular areas of more severe damage, Pearl Fractional penetrates deeper into the skin to rejuvenate fully. Pearl Fusion: This is a combination of the two procedures. Pearl is used first to improve the whole texture of the face and then Pearl Fractional is used to target deeper wrinkles.

  • Am I suitable for Pearl Laser Skin Resurfacing treatment?

    Pearl Laser Skin Resurfacing treatment is only suitable for patients who are skin type 1-3 on the Fitzpatrick scale. The best results are seen on patients with light-to-medium skin tones and skin imperfections due to aging and sun damage. All patients will require a patch test ahead of their first treatment.

  • Is there a Laser Skin Resurfacing clinic near me?

    Laser Skin Resurfacing treatment is currently only available in; London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ To find out more about booking a consultation contact us here.

  • What is Pearl Fusion laser treatment?

    Pearl Fusion is a laser treatment concept that combines both the Pearl Fractional (fractional ablative technology) and Pearl (full-epidermal renewal) lasers.

  • What is Pearl Fractional laser treatment?

    Pearl Fractional is a new volumizing laser technique that is perfect for treating photoaging. Pearl Fractional laser treatment aims to improve the appearance of photo damage, uneven skin tone and texture and generally give you a smoother and brighter complexion.

  • Why is Pearl Fusion Unique?

    Pearl Fusion is based on the 2790 nm wavelength using proprietaryYSGG technology. It is a new generation that reaches beyond CO² and erbium that were developed more than a decade ago.

  • How does Pearl Laser Skin Surfacing work?

    Most patients benefit from a full-face Pearl treatment for an overall re-freshening of the skin, followed by treatment over the troubled spots with Pearl Fractional. Pearl renews the skin’s entire surface and stimulates new collagen. This treatment reduces fine lines, smooths uneven texture, repairs sun damage, reduces discolouration and gives the skin an overall glow. Pearl Fractional treats deeper into the dermis and is effective around difficult-to-treat areas including around the lip and eyes. Together, Pearl Fusion offers a unique solution for treating wrinkles, fine lines, uneven skin texture, pore size, pigmentation and sun damage. Combining these two modalities allow practitioners to tailor a treatment for the specific condition of the patient. For example, if the patient has epidermal issues (brown spots, uneven color/texture), Pearl does very well. But for dermal issues, Pearl Fractional is effective because it is a deeper penetrating laser. Compared to other treatment options, Pearl Fusion offers the ideal balance of ablation and thermal effect. This leads to collagen stimulation and a more refreshed, younger-looking appearance.

  • How does the Pearl Fractional Laser Skin Surfacing treatment work?

    Pearl Fractional laser skin resurfacing treatment is a treatment that treats only a small percentage of the skin, a fraction. The laser pulses create tiny holes deep in the skin and columns of damaged tissue are selectively removed, leaving the surrounding skin intact. Pearl Fractional Laser treatment aims to shorten the healing time and stimulate the body’s natural ability to create new collagen, which then plumps the skin from below and reverses photoaging and any other imperfections. The tiny holes create a safe treatment and rapid recovery and the deep treatment is able to provide results in a single session. The controlled energy used maximises the results without affecting the comfort of the patient.

  • Laser Skin Resurfacing General Procedure

  • What is Pearl Laser Resurfacing?

    The Pearl Laser Resurfacing procedure combines the impact of resurfacing lasers with the gentleness and safety of non-invasive procedures. It is designed to treat ageing and sun-damaged skin. Pearl can effectively help to reduce wrinkles, uneven texture and sun damage with a single treatment and less downtime than other skin resurfacing treatmetns. A Pearl Laser Resurfancing treatment involves treating the top layer of skin with pulses of laser. This process removes a small portion of the skin surface (the epidermis) and a natrual protective barrier is created on the skin surface. Recovery time can take 3-4 days and the skin will shed revealing new, healthy and vibrant skin underneath. Not only does Pearl Laser Resurfacing replace the top layer of skin but it also works to stimulate new collagen growth beneath the skin which fills out and reduces the apperance of fine lines and wrinkles. This new collagen growth will continue for 4-6 weeks post-treatment. In a short time, patients will notice overall skin clarity, smoothness and softness – all from a 15 to 30-minute treatment with only 3 – 4 days of ‘social’ downtime.

  • What does Laser Skin Resurfacing treat?

    Laser skin resurfacing is an effective treatment for;

    • Smoothing any uneven texture and discolouration to the skin.
    • Repairing sun damage and reducing pore size.
    • Reducing fines lines and wrinkles.
    • Gives the skin an overall glow and soft feel.
    • Scar Care.
    Find out more about how Laser Skin Resurfacing could benefit you in one of our skin consultations with our laser experts.

  • What are the different Pearl Laser Resurfacing treatments?

    There are three types of Pearl Resurfacing Treatment available; Pearl, Pearl Fractional and Pearl Fusion. Pearl: Pearl is often most suitable for finer wrinkles and sunspots. The practitioner guides the laser over the whole face, removing the top layer of the epidermis and heating a layer of tissue below it. Pearl Fractional: Often used for deeper wrinkles or particular areas of more severe damage, Pearl Fractional penetrates deeper into the skin to rejuvenate fully. Pearl Fusion: This is a combination of the two procedures. Pearl is used first to improve the whole texture of the face and then Pearl Fractional is used to target deeper wrinkles.

  • Is there a Laser Skin Resurfacing clinic near me?

    Laser Skin Resurfacing treatment is currently only available in; London – 98 Harley street, W1G7HZ To find out more about booking a consultation contact us here.

  • What is Pearl Fusion laser treatment?

    Pearl Fusion is a laser treatment concept that combines both the Pearl Fractional (fractional ablative technology) and Pearl (full-epidermal renewal) lasers.

  • What is Pearl Fractional laser treatment?

    Pearl Fractional is a new volumizing laser technique that is perfect for treating photoaging. Pearl Fractional laser treatment aims to improve the appearance of photo damage, uneven skin tone and texture and generally give you a smoother and brighter complexion.

  • Why is Pearl Fusion Unique?

    Pearl Fusion is based on the 2790 nm wavelength using proprietaryYSGG technology. It is a new generation that reaches beyond CO² and erbium that were developed more than a decade ago.

  • How does Pearl Laser Skin Surfacing work?

    Most patients benefit from a full-face Pearl treatment for an overall re-freshening of the skin, followed by treatment over the troubled spots with Pearl Fractional. Pearl renews the skin’s entire surface and stimulates new collagen. This treatment reduces fine lines, smooths uneven texture, repairs sun damage, reduces discolouration and gives the skin an overall glow. Pearl Fractional treats deeper into the dermis and is effective around difficult-to-treat areas including around the lip and eyes. Together, Pearl Fusion offers a unique solution for treating wrinkles, fine lines, uneven skin texture, pore size, pigmentation and sun damage. Combining these two modalities allow practitioners to tailor a treatment for the specific condition of the patient. For example, if the patient has epidermal issues (brown spots, uneven color/texture), Pearl does very well. But for dermal issues, Pearl Fractional is effective because it is a deeper penetrating laser. Compared to other treatment options, Pearl Fusion offers the ideal balance of ablation and thermal effect. This leads to collagen stimulation and a more refreshed, younger-looking appearance.

  • How does the Pearl Fractional Laser Skin Surfacing treatment work?

    Pearl Fractional laser skin resurfacing treatment is a treatment that treats only a small percentage of the skin, a fraction. The laser pulses create tiny holes deep in the skin and columns of damaged tissue are selectively removed, leaving the surrounding skin intact. Pearl Fractional Laser treatment aims to shorten the healing time and stimulate the body’s natural ability to create new collagen, which then plumps the skin from below and reverses photoaging and any other imperfections. The tiny holes create a safe treatment and rapid recovery and the deep treatment is able to provide results in a single session. The controlled energy used maximises the results without affecting the comfort of the patient.

  • What does Pearl Laser do?

    Our Pearl laser treatment helps to reduce the appearance of wrinkles, uneven texture and sun damage with fewer treatments and a shorter recovery period when compared to other technologies. During the procedure, the top layer of skin is treated with pulses of light in a pre-selected pattern to help provide a healthy, pearl-like glow.

  • Laser Skin Resurfacing Before Procedure

  • Am I suitable for Pearl Laser Skin Resurfacing treatment?

    Pearl Laser Skin Resurfacing treatment is only suitable for patients who are skin type 1-3 on the Fitzpatrick scale. The best results are seen on patients with light-to-medium skin tones and skin imperfections due to aging and sun damage. All patients will require a patch test ahead of their first treatment.

  • Do the treatments hurt?

    The treatments feel like a series of brief pinches, and have been delibately chosen for being less invasive. On a scale of 1 to 10 (with 10 representing pain and 1 representing no pain) most people say it feels like a 2 or 3. An anaesthetic cream will also be applied before treatment to make you as comfortable as possible.

  • Can Pearl Laser Resurfacing be combined with other treatments?

    We recommend that all patients considering any type of skin treatment to come for a consultation first where we can discuss the best treatment plan to suit you and your desired results. Many patients choose to have a Pearl Fusion treatment combined with additional treatments of IPL to help target pigmentation or a further Pearl Fractional treatment to target deeper lines or wrinkles. Pearl Fusion can also be combined with our Laser Genesis treatment to promote scar healing following surgery. Pearl treatment is often combined with Limelight/IPL to better target pigmentation or Pearl fractional laser to address deeper wrinkles. If having injectable treatments such as dermal filler or botox we recommend that patients wait 1-2 weeks both before and after having laser skin resurfacing before having an injectable treatment.

    You can discuss combination treatments with our skin experts at your consultation.

  • Can I have Laser Skin Resurfacing if my skin is tanned?

    If you have got a tan or your skin has had a reaction to something then it is important that you let your medical expert know as it can increase your risks of adverse side effects such as pigmentation changes. At The Private Clinic, we do not perform any laser treatments on tanned skin. Any sun exposure should be avoided when having laser treatments. Our laser specialists will be able to discuss this is more detail and analyse your skin at your consultation.

  • Laser Skin Resurfacing After Procedure

  • When can i wear make-up after Pearl Laser Resurfacing treatments?

    Your skin after Pearl Laser Resurfacing treatments will be dry and gradually starting to become flaky. You will need to keep your skin well moisturised for 3-4 days and we recommend that you can start wearing make-up again on day 3 but you may wish to wait a week once the peeling has settled.

  • Melasma

  • What is Melasma?

    Melasma; also known as ‘chloasma’ or ‘pregnancy mask’ is a common skin condition that develops in adults where brown or grey coloured patches of pigmentation  develop on the skin, usually on the face. Melasma is more noticeable in the summer as your skin is exposed to more sunlight and seems to improve during the winter months. Melasma is not an infection of the skin and is not contagious. It is also not cancerous and will not develop into skin cancer.

  • What causes Melasma?

    The specific cause of Melasma is still unknown, but it is reported to be because of the pigment-producing cells in the skin (melanocytes) producing too much pigment (melanin). Factors that can contribute to developing melasma, include; Pregnancy Birth Control Pills Hormone Replacement Medical problems that affect hormones Certain medications medications  such as anti-epileptics. Exposure to ultraviolet (UV) light Use of sun-beds Phototherapy Melasma is more commonly developed by women, particularly during pregnancy where up to 50% of women can be affected. It is also more common in people of colour and those who tan very quickly. Melasma is not hereditary but it is more common in people with a family history of the condition.

  • What is Melasma?

    Melasma; also known as ‘chloasma’ or ‘pregnancy mask’ is a common skin condition that develops in adults where brown or grey coloured patches of pigmentation  develop on the skin, usually on the face. Melasma is more noticeable in the summer as your skin is exposed to more sunlight and seems to improve during the winter months. Melasma is not an infection of the skin and is not contagious. It is also not cancerous and will not develop into skin cancer.